THEORY OF VIBRATORY TECHNOLOGY Revised and Augmented Edition LF. Goncharevich Magny iat of Machin Sense USI Aton af Sees K. V. Frolov Dior Mechanical rgnceringRstach nine TUSK Healey of See Englh Eton Bator E. 1. Rivin Depron of Mecha! Exgiering Vigne Se User, Der ONEMISPHERE PUBLISHING CORPORATION ‘A memer ofthe Tylor & Francis Group New York WaslagonPhiadphia LondonWORY OF VIBATORY TECHNOLOGY, Red nd ped ig i © 190 Hee ag Crt, A rer Psa te “Arn Ea pe a rn a Cog ot sea “Ean ed tt nay fw of ens ae me, et wien eof Se ce Opa rch Reg stay te, coe aint Sy a rs at ‘19 Congr Ct a Pan Da eco Fi ‘yt ‘nic Ft tn ee ior og se Wan 1 tA ie ‘CONTENTS FOREWORD PHYSICAL puunctPts OF ViBRATORY ‘ecHNoLocY Finda pes of aces reat wid hws of ‘heal, Vrain ines Yat conveyance ia besterg pre) inate io Bling ye and ier cmpacon “THEORETICAL PRINCIPLES OF VIBRATORY ‘TECINOLOGY ‘Phen dscepn of epost ad of ‘beso mach ‘iy comer of bl ad Miao proce of persed mea dba ne iro cating ors ae ating sd ering af ets rary neat Francie of eclpel oae 20‘cnarren rune ‘cuarren Four [BASIC SCHEMATICS AND DESIGN OF ‘VIBRATORY MACHINES Pipl ye of vay machines Dap her of rn igs Dececimesing ces ‘em som ac) hi pr egg LVInRATiOW excrrees vIMRATORS) PRINCIELE (OF OPERATION, GENERATION OF EXCITING FORCE ‘Types of wean ese (aos) ‘ite dig ares: oman fe ening ce Inet vio exer ih xc em DESIGN OF VIBRATORY MACHINES ‘CONSIDERING LOADING AND DRIVE ‘CHARACTERISTICS Fermin of in pens rate: ery ea ay vias cmeying machines Vito ees Optimization of secur a poses panes of ex FOREWORD ‘Vieory techaslgy toy is amecited with sew, prowenine siete and ‘purpose ofeaabling new pysical elects [On te oder hand, increasing the [over of vbraor machines andthe gah of thee specie lading, dite by the ‘eed messy production, engens be lks beveos he machine, ad, nd he ve, eading tothe necro ensierng hem as single lad mache ve wit ‘wih aronglneracon tween the conainent abaya Sach systems ex foci effect hat ae not charceriae of tana iil loaded very maces, 7 ‘The. presented methods of systemic condieetion of loat-aachine dive ‘onary systems enabled the formulation of suf approaches tothe alization ‘sence psnomena in the processed medium, which opened the posit of 3 radia increase of poner itty of brary production proctis, rducton of ‘soaproducve energy lanes, and an increase of prods of he equipment "ight o caret demands for furber developmen of wtraary eaog,te ators devote consdenibeateton to the developmen ofthe hor of vnrary [rocsss onthe bis of penomenologial vibration ely snd the compat!ciety of weary mich er od igi aco te ‘haters ofthe dive. Special eteton piven the develope of bas of etn developmen nd ceaicaon of pheninenologial models of vats pic cee ‘New aplication of vibratory wchology and sew approaches i atonal spheres of 8 aplication are considered inthis bok, Signin tenn i het ‘te sysematzaton and lsieton of vibratory machines hich, tenon of ator, ents he fundametal eres iret nations of ach pe ‘of machine, sats tenis for futher development, and lds detons ot Sein improve, Development of elale mths of anys of the posts parameters andthe staracteriics of viomory machines enblee the development of apltion ‘rine for material pina sgn methods. This i diaed by he merous xampes of characterise vibratory aches, “The ators eres he hope ht the rede wl fod he book intresting and ‘hat ic wl prove wef in praca! ates, CHAPTER ONE 1 wide range of different processes are tion of vibration In. which “Therefore, it is difficult to ‘igorous functional classification. However, if the tain operation executed in the given process Is adopted os the ‘classification index, then the following msin categories of ‘operations ‘realized with the application of vibration can be Identified: conveyance, processing, of disperse systema with the purpose of maintaining or increasing efficiency "of "one or {other production process, cutting, and crushing. ‘i Vibratory conveyance serves not only conveying. purposes, but also constitutes "the. basis for" several technological “processes. The main types of vibratory conveying operations are long" horizontal ‘levated (ated) surfaces, lifting slong a spiral load-carrying element or In devices of specal construction, vibratory loading snd discharge ‘fom containers, bunkering. The second field of application of ration ~ processing of disperse systems with the purpore of | technological treatment ~ in the most versatile, This includes first of all, formation of a vibratory boiling layer to accelerate tmass-transfor processes in which various types of chemical and Bhyelcovchemicel reactions occur. Such processes. include “catalytic and solid-phase reactions, combustion, extraction, | Alssolution and Teaching, reclamation of metale frot ores, and “8 many-others, Realized in vibration-processed disperse systems nee eesso are mixing, classification and aeparation, compaction of Poured mixtures and — concretes, enstalization pressure Processing, hardening, drying, dewatering, granulation, washing entrfuging, and. other operations. Vibration is. fairly widely Used In the ‘processes of cutting and. crushing” these are wibratlon turning and. delling, abrasive forming, breaking. ard rinding, crushing of soil and rocks Since the efficiency of the given processes is dependent on the regime of oscillations of the working, clement of the ‘machine, various types. of vibrations are used In practice, harmonic and. semicharmonie rectilinear, two-component, and three-dimensiona. The trajectory of motion te generally, shaped by translational and torsional “vibrations. of "the. working slements, Parameters of trajectories and modes of vibrations of the working elements of wbratory machines are constantly being developed and improved. In many processing. operations superposition of vibrations to the morking clement can cresse the specific energy intensity and efficiency of the process. The ange of frequencies used tn modern machines starts, with low-frequency mechanical escilatons.Gnfrasound) and. reaches high-frequency ultrasound, Large amplitudes corvespond to. Tow Frequencies and lesser ones to high Frequencies, 12 VIBRATORY CONVEYANCE Due to influences of many Factors, the process of conveyance by" vibration of massive loads is very compliceted. OF ‘main Interest. when determining. the ficiency of the regimes of convening processing machines Is. the study of" plysics characteristics of the "process and. establishment ofthe ‘lopendence of “conveyance speed, process nergy-latensity, gree of spood tranemission tothe. transported. medutn Intensity of Its mixing, creating the state of vibratory belling, fom parameters of the oscillation regime. These. parameters. are the shape of the trojectory, Frequencien, amplitudes, phase shite ‘angle between the harmonic components of two-component ‘oscillations, angle of vibration and. inclination of the load-carring element. OF no lesser significance lo the study of the effect of the properties of the transported medium, degree of filling of the working slement and the operation conditions fon the” enumerated performance parameters of wibratory Conveyance’ processing igetcet imuiptes wt rian) tettatig 3 Lat wt conser the an crrtins bene the sped st srnory comeyance under rclee harmon ostlatons & penmrits of thn woringrogine of te ron, machine SLTitstin spade od eqn an asthe aos eves td ication of the moving cement Seite depeinne of the comoyance peed af refernce of ‘ied tp penactond) wins couteten of nape, get lye cones of ip “to nm fore bone [Siengecn ofthe whiter cine tad ane of vtrason of BOP con frequency at various vibration amplitides ix presented Iecingue’ tins For ca conson neue ample the pendence ly wt cttin exten of bolt cancer Then Pith tequscics te carver bncome get song and seh farther creat of reqney, they con pus thangh a ‘aremum," Morera, with cesing raion’ ope the ‘Srverbecome suit "ind soque a urge lcineen “ake pops show iw Iara the econ, apie tie lower te Frequencies st wih the etree wes af the speed of comeyanee re ached It cease be ne thet Sih inrnsngsmpliede the yale ofthe ermal oped of ‘aeeyag increase By comparing the shape af te cares of She speed = feguensy Soporte withthe shueticr ofthe scltntery conveyance veins tcotnous,Itemiten, can “be oriced that with Increasing oscllaion frequency inthe a « * | Ze Tram | tate Oe Rgure 11 Conveyance speed ve. the regime parameter under pln up toadFegion of continuous (no loss of contact) vibratory conveyance regimes, a slow but more or less uniform increase In coed fakes place. Upon transition toa Jolting. regime. frequency Increase entails more intensive growth ef ‘conveying speed However, the latter takes place only within a limited sange of Frequencies “which is narrower the "greater the oselliation amplitude, Further Increase of oscillation Frequency at fee ‘causes only an insignificant Increase of speed and then even a decrease in speed occurs. In thie care, an unstable conveying Process is observed which Is caused “by physical reeceee 4gssociated with the violation of ehe energy transfer conditions from the working element to the transported, median. For each amplitude value there evlots manimum peed obtained at frequency which Ix lomer the greater the ‘oscillation amplitude. Thus, In order to attain maximum speeds, ‘one must operate at a possibly larger amplitude adopting uch frequencies and vibration angles which enable. obtaining tie required speed of vibration conveyance Analysis of experimental data indkates that to determine the speed of motion of a product of interest, the speed ‘obtained from the graph for sand should be multiplied by the ‘ooificient of wansportabilty fr the predict Figure Lib shows the dependence of the conveying. speed for a smalt-lump load For different loads at the same regimes magnitude of the conveying speed is diferent. When dificult to transport lone ate moved, 8 sharper decrease in speed takes place beyond the Vibration angle has a considerable effect on the speed of vibratory conveyance. Figure 12a shows the dependenee, of the speed of vibration conveying of « 40 mm layer af sand on the vibration angle at acceleration amplitudes of brat load-carrying element from 28 to 635 g, and Fig, L2b shows the dependence for rocks up to 50 mm chunk size st k= Tee 14S. As can be seen, the correlation ‘between the speed oF motion on the vibration angio is very comples. is charecter ie largely determined by the properties aad thickness of the layer of the transported Toad. im particular by the wibration af the ‘oad-carring element. Under limited oscillation Intensity of the latter, the “speed rises with increasing. vibration angle, For caslly transportable loads at small Inver thickness thie endenes is retained in s narrower range of accelerations than for loads that are difficule to” transport and ere moved Ina ick “layer. Under’ medium vibration, intensity an opposite Todi | or aa] 5tendency Is observed = when the vibration angle is Increased he speed. of vibration motion ‘decreaues. In the reglon_ of high-intensity cegimes increasing the vibrtion angle leads frst to a decrease of the speed then to Its increase again, although le absolute maximum speed Is attened nonetheless’ at Teaser Vibration angles Hence, it Follows that to increase the speed of vibratory ‘rele 2 can be obtained Which representa considered stress distribution. By drawing. srnight line CU the center, we obtain the value of the lateral pressure usly. cirelo 2 allows one to obtain magnitude ‘of the new vectors of the principal stresses. © third (the smallest) principal stress o'y whose vector nthe: transverse plane is also increasing ih the presence eration. Finally becoming equal to. dy, The lateral Tm this plane in the presence of ly hotlontal so equal to 24 * 3 © ts'The lateral pressure In the longitudinal plane whose vector Fs directed along the trough axis not changing after reaching "magnitude cy ln the static stressed condition SnSWhen the sign of the acceleration is changed, magnitudes Of vectors of principal stresses, and 2, reach the values after changing. their direction. Howerer, in passing through the zero value of acceleration the reas state ofthe layer will be characterized by circle iL Such an effect can be | explained by the presence of some compaction in the Taper! at © pac a” additional vertical pressure component appeers. ‘The principal stresses in three states, when e.* dryayr t= Oy ini ae respectively equal to ww Tous, the apa trees aurbution in represented bs three sta Clee a Tair of the anlar body reaches «nit when the sem ty aden the wlte BP fee when ae a Berita paint "Ch rencee Sure’ “ba” ReCerean Corresponding Yo sear of the tyr ln = efi angie _itcndion of vctor'Z, co the wet! axis ihe moment of far ipso acain ow«0 The values Analys of the results of this series of experiments Indicates that pe Dressures.at the bottom and the walls are developing. wit [phase shifts of f and f, relative to the maninnim sctslertic Indlesting viscous properties by the granular medium The impact of the losd against a plane cannot be calle lastlc, since an instantaneous rebound of the lood ism Setected in the diagrams of vertical displacement. Collision the lower monolayer with the plane and’ the subsequent. lmpec ofthe upper monolayers causes a pressure jump exceeding, f ‘example, the static pressure by more than fourfold when 116 orang too DUFINg the flight phase the pressure does not always dro toozero. ‘The presence’ of the lateral pressure Is. explained the fect that ‘even in flight the layer does not lose. conta: with the walls of the vibratory trough. The presence of som: vertical pressure can be explained by the fact that sepurtic from the bottom of some segments of the layer ought to © regarded not ax pure flight, but ar loovening. [At any > I the granular body passes through stages the are characteristic for less intensive regimes. For example, up t the moment when the vertical acceleration exceeds the valu = £0. the layer Is compacted without periodic loosening. | the interval corresponding to 08g flow!in the entire layer of the treated product. Vibration also «destroys hngrup fortis: Under the combloed ston boch Ghd required gon flow velocity and ocilation intensity ar “conden rece Sie now consider the procenses taking place in the Gapirs sate when treated by Moreone of iferontInens omprction, separation, mining. Undo the selon of vibration SFE Cetin ntensy om 5) poured product" undergoee, Sempacio, The Inter takes place ar rere of reduction of fretlonal forsee benvcon the Indhiea! pares of the medion derivation tnd under the action of gratationa and inera force. I esabihed experimentally that competion ff poured eur i mniny dotomined ty the magne of Sctlertionof the tranemitied csllotion. The optimum vale oF scsleration at which the highest degre of Compaction te fchieed ts dependent on the physical and mechanical proper OF the medium. For Gaperse media with weak fnteon inks {his "tcnoreton is lace than for “maerais. wi internal Friction force. A altaive picture of the processes taking pce under the svi of viraton om mae’ tk Tons can be edequtey tatyed om the bans of experimental sade, Tests with Imeerils of Wenlcl specife weight and grain site ‘chalk an Coat" prin aise 30°° 50 mm poured ina lager Intorating bin showed that at the optimum for the compaction process) magnitude of acceleration (8.0 m/sec’), a natceable eduction of the volume occupied by the material ls. attained [At the “same time, Its initial layer position. Inthe bin Is Fetained. ‘The same pattera Is also noticed under the setion of bration on a fine granular material (03-30. eum) with ‘optimum magnitude acceleration 75 m/sec* in ths case, Experiments on. the action of vibration on chunky Of identical grain size (20 - 30 mm) and different specific weight (coal: 12. g/em? and ballast: 19 kg/em) showed that under vibration with optimum acceleration secling, of the entire mass of the matorial taker place, moreover, the heavier pieces move upwards. If the light product: war placed tthe bottom and the heavy product et the top, then material stratification isnot disturbed after ‘being subjected "to the ame vibration regime “Tests on the action of vibration on chunky materials of ntical specific weight but aiferent grain sive (chelk 30 — 45 ‘mm and coal 2~"10\mm) enabled one to eatablish that under vibration with optimum acceleration compaction of the entire material takes place. Furthermore, If the chalk layer ie placed at the bottom, then following application of vlbration the larger chunks were moving upwards if It was placed at the top. it does not change its portion, “Thus, "investigations revealed the following qualitative Features of the vibratory ection on granlar Toads, Partctes with large specific weight and large. dimensions. under, the ction of vibration With optimum from the standpoint oF ‘Compsction) acceleration rise to the top, in the meastime, the entire mass of the material Ig compacted, This phenomenon 1s ‘caused, apparently, by the Tact that the valves of the optimum vibration sceelerations. Tor’ the larger particles with large specific’ weight are below the optimum ‘accelerations. of the smaller particles with lower specific ‘weight. ‘The. vibration, Fegime adopted for compaction was optimized for lighter and ‘smaller particles, Therefore, ‘compaction of these particles ‘occurs more rapidly than compaction “of large and hear) particles. As a result, the smell particles in the relative motion fare travelling downwards more rapidly pushing the larger ones fo the surface, It can. also” be assumed. that under some vibration” regimes a lifng force ie created. which Is Proportional to the specific weight and size of the chunk. and Which causes the described phenomenon, eee 43 Wen designing vibratory compaction machines the sependece ef the egresefcommetion on the’ norton faramers amis apis, frequen, nrstory aloes, and fceslrione of prinipal invest. Tspornenta nace that in cies matucy compaction We ase at Tower ffowever with nceeogfretuens he’ degree af ompacion is devresing.Inctesing ampliide. af ie'couing a0 increasing devaty oly tos corte Farther intese ample Can” even lead to Woocnig'of the stern! PBeeTe each value of the amplitude corresponds its own most frequency of oulaons a which asim 5 Sampection tise isco When vibrating at frequencies of 200°" “oor dxc/min, some compaction ofthe ma = th icreasing trequsncy the compecton 230 Gat 20 one/nin fo 1S 2 es 10. cnc/min _ Increasing the frequency farther (Go 0" onl, compaction racially In no changing. I the frequen tv Intense ren = itr, the "compaction process cease and hosenne _Bommencen ita intensity increasing with Icreng. baton with Fein be concluded that the frequency does not unlquels ‘etermine the dogres of compaction of the materi ‘Sc From the anulysis of the correlation ofthe compression fatio and. the averaged magnitude of the vibratory velocity 1 follows het different values af the vibratory veloc) correspond to the same value af the compression ratio. Ths the velocity, just as the frequency, does not completely Aetermine the vibration effects, It He. well known that each value of the compression ratio corresponds to the practically Constant value of the averaged vibratory acceleration. Tho imum value of the averaged acceleration, corresponding. to Se aetiouim degree af compaction of material of chunk size O' 12 mm, i 650 7.50 m/sec [At Frequencies lower then. S00 ose/min, the value of the ‘optimum accelerations are unchanged. In the frequency range 2300'~ 2500 osc/min the manimum compaction effect somewhat ‘decreases, "Thus, it can be ascertained that the compaction effect for ‘ull loads Is mainly determined 8y che magnitude of vibratory‘compaction process is also affected by other factors: degree of filing of the bin which Is subjected to vibration, physical and mechanical properties of the compacted product, and duration of the vibration process The results ‘of studies of = correlation of duration of the bration process and the degree of compaction show that the process. Is. progressing. nomuniformiy, with ishing. speed: most intensively at the initial moment of vibration application, then the speed ts decreasing. and. after vibrating Tor 60. sec, the "process essentially "ends. Such nonuniformity is caused by the fact that te. the material, is ‘compacted, areas of the contact surfaces between” individual particles are Increasing, causing reduction of effectiveness of the vibratory ‘action. Investigations show that. the minimal uration “of vibration which iz nowded to provide maximum, compaction is erasing with increasing mace of the vibrating ‘Experimental investigations of effects of the physics mechanical properties of the compacted materia on characteristics of the vibratory compaction process enabled one to establish the following. Dimensions of the. particles exert considerable influence “on the process of compaction. With Increasing grain size the maximum compression ratio decreases, ‘The maximum achieved degree of compaction of dimensionally hhomogencous products corresponds to. the rinallet sine. clese (0 10 mm). For compacting dimensionally diverse products {class 0 "100 mm), the maximum degree of ‘compaction reached (7 = 187. For this case, the averaged value of the ‘ptimum vibratory acceleration is 6.50" ~ #00 m/sec The franulometcic composition of the compacted product) alse foticeebly affects the magnitude of the optimum. vibratory Acceleration: with Increasing. grain size. the magnitude of the ‘Optimum acceleration Is incressing Effect of humidity of the compacted material on the process of ‘compaction is reflected in the fact. that with, Increase in humidity the optimum acceleration Is Increasing, and maximum compaction decreasing. In the majority of cases increasing vibratory acceleration to the value of the free fall accaloraton doce not. enable Provision of @ dense compsction of disperse. material, and Increasing acceleration abote this critical value causes, particle separation and Increased porosity. In these canes, to create a tate of vibration liquefaction additional cushioned weights are Used. The latter are punches which sre connected by elastic rian en eee « lement (apengs) with the man source of force acting on the focred material (lad, press. These weights do not alow the Melon to separate from each other sn Trom the bottom of fi fr the same time, when forming vrious mavens “of Internal fiction. forces under" the. aston of Jnables achievement of donee packing of the particles wr pressure from the. weight. compared withthe reqrequred for static compaction acceleration ia increnand above the cial value, the on boiling and becomes lose ute poronty of the vibratory Baliag layer depends on frequency and emplitude of wbrations. The lower the gnc) the greater the layer porosity that cam be attained ‘vleration magaitudes. In the range from one #0 imes, gravity acceleration, the layer volume. incessee Intenaively than with even higher ecelerations. This can rexpleined tot certain extent ty the ection val he feetyamlc force which is." developing, at's rest of fareaction under the Tajer of the bulk Tow. The magnitude ot Chia force can exceed. by several tines the weight af the tater Itc For example, seradynamic pressure on vibratory {ili layer of glare ball of O13 mm damster a feequencs {50,Hr and amplitude 42 mm exceade the gravity force by 10 = mes, The Inensity of loosening ofthe leer easterly “dependent_on the physical properties ofthe ‘metium. Thin ovonty of tie layer of sont fly apered payer powders Wetnotcesty,inresing ander vcileon acelraion, above Se However, these costtions do wot sob) to. lyer of finy capersed powders, whore porcies hve ‘high sdhesve forces. The vraton’acton, oy facitating these parses in rowing together mare clos, compresee ‘the layer ond dost ddtroy tr segresates bun formed. In some cates egsoson fs ayer of ine spersed materia can be ahived the Joi action of vibration and gar beng biown though she ter hy the uae of suteceactiv agree we amsltaeoet action of wortion and axe hrough the nbrtory boing ayer from the bottom #0 the fon. tnablee ope to bts» unform dutatton of the gua wish SSanidersbe increase “of layer povsigy or trample th ‘Slum of’ Iter wih 4p ponetes and denny /em® nder"the inuttancous acton of sibretion and tr, Blown sthrugh tin ayer rom th bartom tothe top, to lncresing by cles than 30%, which le about 13. ‘mee” greater" thanIncrease of the volume of the boiling layer, The volume of 4 layer of heavier particles Increases to lesser degree. For ‘ample, the volume of a powder layer with 63. um pariles Sand density 7.9 g/em® in a state of ibratory boiling Increases just by 14 umes compared with the volume of layer without \ibration and of the seme velocity of blomn-through al ‘Some powders of polymer materials, whose bulk porosity does not Increase at low intensities of oaciliations, increase the layer volume by. 60 ~ 70% under the ction of vibretion with gas blow-through. The coefficients of volume increase of ¢ Mibratory boiling. Inyer in the case of “ger. blow-throurh Ie higher than for the boing layer, and, i absolute values, these coefficients are equalized tol a considerable “degree for materials equally yielding to conversion into a bling lay "Application of wibration i aleo used for compaction of moulding and core sands when preparing. casting moulds. ‘The principal quality criteria of compaction when preparing casting hroulde are the density of the mixture and its ges permeability Determination of the optimum regimes of vibration Is guided Experimental investigations were conducted to determine mechanism of compaction of sodium sileate core sand (00 parts sand and 6 parts sodium slllate) at humidity of 5 ~ 6% ‘Avmixeure ins standard measuring. beaker was. subjected to Sibration in the vertical direction. the height of the mixture yor being equal to 150 mm. Investigations were conducted In the Frequency range from 10 to 110 Hz ad amplitude range From 1 to 8 mm under harmonic excitations. The duration of Mibration treatment was varied from 1 to 10 mln. ‘Observations of behavior of the mixture in the process of vibratory treetment enabled revealing @ number of physical laws At an oscillation frequency of the measuring beaker of 10, He and. amplitude. ttm the’ mistare settles only alightly ‘within | "2 sec following commencement of vibrations, but the degree of misture compaction ix insignificant. After placing the sample Into the device for” determination of gas Dermerblty, che mixture might even crumble. With increasing Frequency from 10 to 40 Ha, effective compaction ix detected at amplitudes of 12 mm, with the most intensive compaction ‘Sccurring. in the amplitude range 3 t mm. Furthermore, ometimes mixture stratification into two unequal parte Is Shecrved: the lower (70 90% of thickness) ts wall. compacted, Sand the upper disintegrates into separate lumps of size 1 ~ 10 mim which are continuously moving and rotating without yg Parameters So iz mm m/sec m/sec g/em? arbitrary i unite Wt 003 395 Lt not ‘ Setined for2 ome 79 149200 “o.s 0282 58 120 250 2 0m eu x0 3 0283 27 128 300 201 OR 158 113 400 202 025 ste 122300 ay 6 Denatty and Gas Permeability of Sodlum Silicate ~ $29%,Humlalty at Various Frequencies and Amplitudes of ‘of the Molding Cylinder and Vibration Duration of Sand Mixture ‘Characteristic of mistare Setting of mixture with: tfective 20% of volun ts loosened the formation of lumps of 2S mm sie Settling of small lamp the surface Analogous t teatsTable (continued 20 20 2s 2s 40 “0 40 3 088 + os 1 o1s7 2 oa 3 ow 08 ons 1 0489 2 028 05 0.0628 os 0.16 26 i 128 124 as uw ua iar 20 28 Analogous to tent 3 Eftective lets of size =o mm formed on the srt Analogous to test $ Analogous to cent 3 50% of volume loosened with the formation of pellets of fae 5-10 mm Analogous to Analogous to fest 10 [Analogous to Analogous te Analogous to nysical Principles of Vibratory technology ee fering to the main mass of the mixture. It should be noted that In all vibration regimes the upper boundary of the sample ‘Becsmés smooth. The volume of sand which disintegrates end is continuously moving is strongly dependent nS atbpitude of the vibratory velocity of the measuring ‘ample, at 2 Frequency 20 He, 15 25% loosening lute occurs In the upper part of the beaker with the fof lumps for amplitudes, sbove 3 mm. At frequency the oscillation amplitude to ulteneous rise In Frequency leads tiation when the mixture compaction. practically does place. “Obviously, at smell amplitudes of motion in the mixture ts decaying "After a prolonged vibration compaction longer than 5 Iain), some migration of sand and sodium allicate ir detected, Wottom of the beaker is always covered by a sticky moist ofthe" mixture. Furthermore, some ity ‘and density of the sodium silicate sandy mixeure quantities are Inversely related, F"The main resulte of the experiments are presented in the ibe.'“At_an oscillation frequency 15 He ‘of the beaker pacton of the mixture starts at an amplitude of 2 mm ih the most Intensive compaction occurring in the amplitude tage 3 £ mm. In this tange the specific weight of the fifkture does not undergo. significant changes. At amplitudes ceeding 4mm, mixture stratification into (wo. parts. ie wer Ie well compacted, and the upper moves "the minture taking part in the circular motion Is dependent on Whe Intensity of owcllations. For each frequency there ie eorresponding acceleration at which minture stratification takes place "At a frequency 20 Hz, compaction starts at an amplitude of 1 mm: in the amplitude range 2-3. mim the specific weight fand ‘gas permeability “do not undergo. significant changes: Compaction in this range Is uniform slong the entire. height When the amplitude "Is increased in excess of 3m, ompaction on the average is increasing. but It fs not uniform,‘along. the height of the specimen, and at amplitudes higher than 4'mm mixture stratification is observed, [At a frequency 25 Hz there also exists an amplitude range 2 => mm within which ges permeability and. the specific ‘weight do not change, but if at an amplitude of 1 mm there Is practically no compection. then at an amplitude of 2. mm Stratification of the mixture sleeady "evident, although An times less, The aifference. In ‘ates of strain lx Increasing with decreasing. viscous resistance Sand increasing application frequency of the straining Loed. The Dhase shift Is increasing with Increasing coelTeient of vacous elatance and decreasing frequency. ‘When a plastoinertlat body ie strained, the resistances to train are combined from the force of reslatance to plastic Shear and the inertial force (Fig. 210. In a plastoinertial body, Which Is. characterized by the resistance to plastic shear Fr the relation between strain and’ the straining loed 1s given by. an approximate expression = FI =P ain (oe * he where FP F'/P. Strain has « phase shift y with the straining load, 7 = resin C9, ‘The presented dependence Indicates that to ensure the deformation of a plastoinrtial body by a periodic force it is necessary for the amplitude value of this force to exceed the resistance force to. plastic. shear. To obtain sufficiently Significant strain this excess mnist be considerable, The phase ‘fit between the strain and the atesiing force is defined by the relation between the magnitudes of resistance to plastic ‘shear and the straining force and can be within 0-90" interval "The dependence between the periodic straining force and Aisplacement can be assumed harmonic "only as a fiat Approximation. In realty, thls dependence hes a more complex polyharmonic character In each special case which requires > Specified accuracy of solution, the limit of plastic Flow must be expanded ina Fourier” series having. the number of ‘exponsion terms that would enable one to obtain a result with ‘Dy walng fundamental inertial chological bodies, one can construct. more complex phenomenological models such as WViscoclastic inertial models, slastoplatie inertial models, and soon, which more accurately reproduce the properties of the processed: medium. Characteristics of the elastoinertil, viscoinertial, and plastoinertial bodies are natural frequency p for the ‘lastolnertal body, effective coefficient of vacous resistances Yor * dnt, for the slacoinertial body, and affective coefficient ances £* for the plastoinertal body. Ia" the slonce of ‘deforming. = body by" periodic fonds. les fundamental feature is the consideration of the inertial properties of the processed body. 212 Combined Inertial Phenomenological Modele The propertics of some dispersed products in vibratory processing can be adequately described by viscoolastl Slastoplasic, or viscoelartoplactc rheological models. For Fellable description of the deformation features of various Iedla, special phenomenological models have been developed These) models were obtained ‘on the basis of various combinations of Inertial fundemestal theological bodiey. ‘The fain method of arrangement is the series, parallel, oFagure 22 Standard inevtal vinconleeic shealagtel bodies. «! combined serieparallel_ combination of the fundamental heological bodies In a specific order. Utilization of these ‘models enables one to solve some important special problems. ‘The properties of @ large group of products which are ubjected to vibratory processing can be described by diferent combinations of elastoinerdal and viecoinertil "rheological bodies: Products combining elastic and viscous properties are Known as viscoelastic. ‘The nomenclature of auch products. Is so large and important for ‘the induatty that. an Independent Important trend has developed In rheology devoted to. the study of their properties, namely the theory of veo Viscoelastic materials occupy an Intermediate position between lastic bodies and viscous fluid, ‘Among these models, the so-called standard inerti viscoelastic. rheological solld and” Wid models. ca be entified. The standard viscoelestic inertial sald. rheological model is comprised from ‘an inertial element, two elaste and fone viscous bodies. “The slastic. and. viscous bodies are Connected in parallel and one more elastic body. Is connected. with them in series (Fg. 22a), ‘A standard inertial viscoelastic Fuld cheotogieal body includes two viscous and one elastic bodies (Fig. 228). One viscous and one elastic bodies are Connected In parallel and another viacous rheological body ix Connected to them. And finally, a standard inertial viscoelastic lnlversal rheological body combines the properties of two previously ‘considered viscoelastic rheological bodies (Fg. 220). ‘A standard. inertial viscoelastic universal rheological body comprises two elastic and two viscous theological bodies, The Tm a standard inertial viscoelastic solid body the inertiel clement’ ia inserted between the slastic bot), and the Viscoelastic bodies connected in par Th a standard inertial vlacoelastic universal body two Inertial “elements are used” which are. inserted. between viscoelastic bodies connected in parallel and clastic and scour bodies, respectively, ‘Tet ua consider the laws of deformation by force of, for example, 4 standard inertial viscoelastic Under deformation of the inertial viscoelastic model of a solld body by a force having a harmonic time history, the dependence between the amplitude values of deformation and the unit, deforming force is Ay = pt/vipt? = wi + tata? where p= K+ K/m The forte and deformation are shifted Felative to each other by angle p = arctg 2na/pt? wh. The amplitude value of deformation of the inertial viscoslatic solid Is proportional to the magnitude of the deforming. force per lune of the body mass. Te is also dependent on the magnitude ff ‘the viscous resistances and on the ratio of naturel and {orced vibration frequencies. Upon loading of the. inertial . periodic Force, just as in the case of the elastolnertal bod, fhe megaltade ‘of deformation is changing with =. constant force magnitude for diferent regimes (with varying frequency) However, Inthe case of inertial vacoslastie. body. the Amplification factor for the deformations is dependent not only ‘on the detuning factor, but slao on the magnitude of viscous resistances, I/W(p 2 = oF + taut. The magnitudes. of formation of the viscoelastic and inertial viscoelastic bodies tolncide only when they are boing deformed with «very. low frequency, ina practically static. regime. At very” high Frequencies they also are close ‘When the) frequency is increasing, the magnitude of Aeformation of the solld Viscoelastic’ body “ie invariablydecreasing. ‘The strain of the inertial viscoelastic body is Invariably” decreasing. "The strain of the inertial viscoelastic solld with increasing frequency ie increasing, reaching. a ‘maximum value at resonance, then it graduelly drops, agals. It should be moted that the defarmation magaitude we resonsnce egimes is limited by the values of sacous resistances, At tery large viscous resistances resonance growth of deformation tay not even take place. At resonance the phase shift between the Torce and deformation Is 90°. The process of deformation of the inertial viscoelastic solid is accompanied ty energy losses fsssoclated with hysteresis. Energy it mainly lost in the Fesonance regime. This is explained by the fact that deformation amplitude increases sharply at the resonance, regime Under periodic deformation of inertial viscoelastic rheological bodies, the stresses in the body might not coincide In magnitude and in phase with the deforming force. Thus, for example, In lastoinertal ‘body, ia which the stresses’ ore Proportional to. deformations, the defarmation emplieation Fector Is. also. the stross. amplification factor. “The. shift between the deforming force and the street ie the. same as between the force and the deformation. In an inertial viscoelastic alld the amplification factor of ‘he stresses Is equal to the gain factor of strain, However, the phase shift between the deforming force and the deformation In an inertial viscoelastic solid. body and. in a simple iscoclastic body are different. The fact of the matter ls that under periodic deformation ‘of common viscoelastic body the deforming force ls shifted In phase with reopect to deformation. Ins simple: viscoelastic body""the” same." phase shift” is cetablished. between the deforming force and the stress, Stress magnitude le equel to the deforming force In an inertial viscoelastic rolld stress magnitude coincides with ‘the deforming force only at very” low deformation frequencies. n this case, the same phase shift lu established 00 In deforming of a simple viscoelastic boxy ‘Specific stresses. In an inertial viscoelastic solid, Le. stresses por unit deformation of the body, ere proportional to the dynamic stiffness of vpt + 4a2 of the bouy reduced to. the Lt Us consider the laws of deformation of plastic mee The deformation of an elastoplastic medium begins. from lastic strains. The stresses at which the strains remain elastic Inoretical Mineiples of Vibratory’ Technology face limited by the pled strength. In reaching the yield strength plastic strains set in In ‘the zone of plastic deformation the loading anc! unloading develop in different patterns. Londng ts accompanies by an insignificant stress increse. ‘The Joa ie almost content and the deformation of the medium continues, Les 6 if luis flow is taking place. The total strain of an elestoplastic medium comprises both elastic and plastic componente, with the elastic strsin being reversible. When the loud i= removed from the elastoplastic medium the elaetlc strains disappear but the plastic strains remain Under repeated loading of the elastoplastic medium the process commences agein with laste strains; however, the Yield strength is reached now st higher stresoes then the First instance, This points to the fact that the clastoplastc medium has been hardened. In the marjority of cases, the resi sovcalled plastic’ materials are. essentially hardened stoplastic! media. In the region of plastic strains strence™ sce dependent on the previous history of loading. For the description of the propertiee "of elartoplastic ‘media in the regime of periodic loadings inertial slastoplastic Theological models are used (Fig. 22) ‘The lastoplastic phenomenological model with series connection of elastic and plastic rheological bodies under ‘quasistatic loading and under stresses not exceeding, the yield point a representing the elastic stesins (Wig. 2%). Upon fwaching the yield point, plastic deformation without herdening ie simulated. Such a attain af the elastoplastc phenomenological model "with rerier arrangement. ofthe fundamental bodies Is comprised of slastie and_plartc strains ‘The work done by the stresses up tothe yield point. is accumulated as elastic steein energy and Is given back’ without losses when loading. is removed. The work done by” the strerses above the limite of the elastic strain work is Aissipated as a result of internal fietion. Such an elastoplastic ‘model has’ residual strain after removal of loading. ‘They restored elastic strain Is equal to the inital elastic strain In an elastoplastlc phenomenological model with parallel connection of the rheological bodies the deformations of the ‘clastic and plastic bodies are the same (Fig. 26). The strain ‘of the model commences when the ress reaches the yield point. With incressing strain the stresses, which are made up from plastc Tlow stresses nd elastic stresees, ate Increasing, ‘When'the loading is removed from the model, the stresses de. K ce x ’ a es # Pp ‘ 7 : £ 5. 4 stuntoplartc body: K,) conffcient of, hardening: Fy) not completely disappear. The model remains in a stress state The residual strecr |e equal to the veld strength, Aaa result fof loading and unloading the model receiver residual” plastlc Strain” laste strain is parielly. restored under repeated loading, the strains set in after overcoming the yield. strength snd residual stres, The elastoplastic model. under consideration reproduces the process of hardening and residual “The standard phenomenological model of an elastoplastic material is comprised of two elastic and one plastic rheological Bodies. One elastic ard one plastic bodies are connected In Parallel and one more elartic rheological body is attached £0 them in seriee (Fig. 2c The standard elastoplastic model In the first loading cjcle reproduces elastic strains under stresser not exceeding the Yield point. In the second cycle el strains commence at higher stresses, taking into account the residual stresses Tollowing the first loading cycle. Upon euching the yield point In the first cycle, and residual stresses fnd yleld point in the second, plastic strains commence. As Strains are progressing, the stress Is rising aaa result. of flding Up the plastic flow stress and residual and clastic stresses. During unloading, the stresses completely dappeat in fone elastic theological body, and residual stresses which are aul to the yield strength are retained In the second body. As "result of loading and wnloading ‘the standard elastoplastic ‘model undergoes plastic. strain. The elastic. strain under multieycle loading i= completaly restored ‘Thus, the “standard elastoplastic. model reproduces the Iniial elastic strain. the hardening process, and’ the residual stresses. It enables one to. completely describe all the laws of deformation of real elastoplatie med "The laws of deformation of inertial elastoplastic. models Im the regime of periodic. loading are described by the ‘mathematical relations presented In section 4.323 ‘A more comprehensive description of real media is attained within "the framework of inertial viecoelastoplastic Phenomenology. The standard inertial viscoelartoplastlc Phenomenological model is comprised of an clastic, bods Connected in seri with an inertial eloment and a viscoelast ‘body (Fig. 28a). An inertial element and_a plastic. body are connected to the later in series. The laws of deformation of Inert viscoclaetoplaetc phenomenological madele. are ercrbed by the mathematical relations presented in. section $323, ‘When investigating « number of processes that are realized boy vibratory technology and accompanied by 3-D strane of the processed media, one has to take into account interaction oF ‘Stresses and strains in mutually perpendicular directions. This Is essential In those catea when it isnot possible to. consider the object in a unidirectional formulation and one has to solve planar or three-dimensional problems. Many Important vibration ‘ffecte cannot be simply explained within the framework of Unldiectional systems. For thelr solution planar or three-dimensional models ought to be solved. For solution of nich problems phenomenological models of Interaction of stresses and strains along the principal axes are if im unidirectional stress state the plastic strains commence when the stresses reach the yield plat, then underconditions of planar stress state the beginning of plastic Mleformation Ge dependent on the stressen acting In perpendicular directions, In accordance with the theory of Plasticity, ts assuimed thet plastic strains under conditions of Stress state commence when the difference of the stresses Scting In perpendicular directions reach the. yield) point. Tn Imore general statement if con be ssoumed that as, applied to the conditions of loading by wibratory forces, a more. complex plcture of strese Interaction is prosent se a result of periodical Interactions. These features can be taken into consideration by some transfer coefficient 1 This interaction is simulated In the ‘rodel by = wodge clement ‘Stress interaction in plastic material can be represented by 2 standard phenomenological model “comprising wedge tlement with two mutually perpendicular plastic rheological bodies (Fig. 246). The standard model of planar elestoplastic material reproduces elastic etaine under’ stresses" in. the ‘rection of deformation Wg. 2:4) mhich are not enceoding the “sum of the stress acting in @ perpendicular direction and the Hield strength. Upon reaching the indicated stross lt, platic ain seta in with hardening. With the pogressing stain, the stress 1s Increcsing, being comprised of the stress of plastic Flow and the hardening, stress, az simalated by 8 Wedge ‘Theoretical Principles of Vibratory Technology slement and a transverse elastic cheological body, When the Toad is removed, the clastic strain dlasppears end the model will have residual plastic strains. Ax already mentioned, the Tmodele can reproduce stress interactions in mutually perpendicular directions and by other lana. that are Characteried by the coefficient “The random values of the” model parameters canbe dequately cherecterized by two parameters, namely the probability distribution and the probability density. In addition fo the probablistic description, one can use the aggregate of Fandom ‘mumericel characteristics whlch might be taveriaat or Imight vary with time to characterlze the random parameters of the model, ‘This method of estimeting. the random parameters of the model is preferable, since the numerical characteristice fre simple and "easier to manipulete in the process of Computetions. As numeral characteristics of the random parameters of phenomenological models one can use: the mean Parameter value which is also Known as the expected. veluc, The icon veluc of its aquare {mean power), the varlance (the mean value of the square of deviations of parameter trom Ke mean value), the correlation function which characterizes the [Ratletical correlstion between the instantaneous values. taken St two arbitrary momente of time "The random paremeters of the phenomenologcal model are denoted at Pi) random natural Frequency), Ng trandom reduced viscosity) and Kyl) random reduced plasticity These parameters of the model can be exactly determined at any moment of time, The specific Form py, m0, kyglt) which in fssumed by the random parameters of the model" R(2, Ni. Kpol®) and established ae a result of experimental Investigations Iss realization of the corresponding random (A set of realizations of the parameters is obtained as result of repeated investigations of the model parameters by measuring the characteristics of reel rock mess extracted from mine. The random parameters of the model can be fully characterized by an infinite et of realisations forming 30 ‘ensemble. The random parameters can be estimated b), one more indicator, namely by s cross section Which is understood {to mean the aggregate of the instantaneous values of the parameters given by the ensemble For the croas section of the random process corresponding to moment one can calculate the probability distribution of random parameters PO. Ny, Kaete Theory of Vibratory Technology ‘by Pe) = him PE, Ola t) ‘by ‘py Ing: igs i4 the number of values of parameters POs NYO, Kyl) satisfies conditions Pyle) «Pot NGG) # ty. Kyl) # Kgs po Ing Ming 4 total number of realizations For practical computations for sufficiently large ipy: lay and gg Heat be seaumed that Oe 6) eT my 6 & ga 4) = ty density is represented by the derivatives of the random parameters of the model Py (t), Nylts and. Kye(e) with respect to the functions py, hy 8nd gg. reepectively ana 1s determined by the formulas ne) Rivas Tale) £ y+ My a, ine N KG) m4 + dy 2) = tm Stee E Stet a8) =D oo aa Hig 4) lim Olkigg < Ky) «gg * Aig Theoretical Principles of Vibratory Technology 8? In addition to the probabilistic characteristics Qi): v4): Qing) hag) ad QUyg gg) oF the random ® natural frequencies of the reduced viscosities and the reduced plasticity cosfficlents of the phenomenological model af the medivm the following numerical characteristics cam be used Mean values of the random parameters Boag» J ma 8) ey NG) = LP main «dy R(t) L° ke hg) Ang The bars above F(t) Myles Km) denote av ‘of the random parathetere over the'parameter eneembler, Mean values of the square of random parameters Fete) = LP ph atow 69 doy Bog ff ang oy 0+ [tates in Which characterize thelr Intensity. By subtracting from the random parameters Pt) No) Kyy(f) their mean values, we obtain the aligned "centered random parameters of the model PR Ue) = ley ~ ley NEG) = GID = MLE Kol) = Kgl) ~ Kyolt) One more characteratic of the random parameters of the ‘model, called variance, is obtained 8y taking’ the meon value of the square of the aligned random parametersoy ea = f° pha hs a) am Gay t= J" ma tats) ay Shyglt = J hE byt dhgy ‘The most important characteriatic of the random parameters of the model is the correlation function Pe eeigiee (lee (Por = Fos) Poa ~ Fos) Pox» Pos) des MPa a ot © Lf ta = Nha = Ne ea ed dae Fgttd = Lf tha Bah Ke! ha i Correlation functions cheracterize the rate of change of the ‘The cross correlation Function is a particularly importent Indicator characterizing the interrelation Of various. parameters of the model (natural Trequencies, viscosity, and plastic? Bosmltvtd © f° J 00a Bira Roan lA Mos tg ada totd J LB By lo ta Aes © J° Si ia i ay ‘Two parameters of the model are noncorrelated if thei cross correlation function te equal to zero for any values of the arguments, Noncorrelated parameters do not interact as fai ‘energy Iz concerned, 22, VIBRATORY CONVEYANCE OF BULK LOADS 224 Phenomenology of Conveying on « Rig, Vibrating, Load-carrying Element The methods of mechanorheological phenomenology enable onc to create phenomenological models for study af any types 1 vibratory conveyance of chunk and bulk loads: along rectilines! horizontal or inclined trough performing oscillations, fing ‘along helical trough or vibrating vertical tube, londs ‘bunkered in vibrating receptacle or discharged from receptacle, and 20 on Figure 25 shows 2 theee-dimensional (spatial) two-mase Imertial model for study of vibratory conveyance over a rough hich enables simulation of viscoelastoplasic. properties. of Bulk load along aes xy. ands Let us consider the general cease of vibratory conveyance of @ phenomenological model the transported load along the carrying element of a vibratory machine performing vibrations that are rected at angle 2 te the carrying element which, in turn, in inclined at angle & to the horizontal, Let us introduce # moving coordinate frame, A}e which ts linked rigidly with the carrying element and two ined coordinate frames: of whose axis colncider with the Airection of ‘vibrations of the carrying element In cave of Fectilnear ‘oscillations ‘or with direction of the major ans of the ellipse in case of slipteal oscillations, and. x32" whose ‘axes are parallel to the axes of the moving coordinate 3 ‘The careying clomont performs oscillations = fled) in the plane 10f (oyh hence, the projections of its displacement on the axis of the Mixed coordinate frame: will be colar fn yesinies pln 220 or, If It performs elliptical or nonharmonic oscillations along. wo. mutually perpendicular "axes, projections of its Alsplacement on axis x.y, and z' can be Witten aFigure 26 Two-mass viecoolasteplastic xO, yey, ee0 In the general case of vibratory conveyance there can develop the motion of the model In contact’ with the carrying ‘lement (combined motion) and a free motion. In the direction Of axis ox, the model is rogerded sea two-mass vibratory ‘stem with masses mand m, thet are linked together by two laste Glemente of stiffnesses ky, ky and two dampers. with Viscosity coefficlent cy Furthermore, forces of dry friction act In the dicection of axlz ox in the regime of combined mation, tnd in the regime of free motion, resatance forces are acting ‘which are ‘proportional to. the’ velocity magnitude (elastle dampers with the coeffielents of viscosity, cy cy and stiffnesses Ky. £9. [eae oe ee Sone nsae aaa amass pres tent verte funuion (el my va omeae Eee eee eeflermpogtealt dip rer ers ees er eee aes eee ees cane ee sei re Me ee ee eee re Hg ae hieng gtr platen eck Ee ee 2 PY ee ce Soe ee Sara ee coe feo aoe tft apemett ar ec Scuieic tances ceane thea creer Scoinadiscaete tects oot aegis Perera ed gad kg 2190" ini = mi "~ mg con a= tykyy #7 te a) em NP =n gh yy em NYP a-ighe (ertfare. the forces acting on the load during processes of viscoelastic and plastic strain, respectively. Force Nj") deforma the transported layer of the load (model), tendiig. to casse Irreversible strains (shifting the wedge). The transverse. strains ‘of the model will remain elastic up to the moment when the storming force Nf overcomes resistance to the shift of the wedge NE “The’ model is In contact with the carrying element until the normal reaction is reduced to 010 OY alee on At the stage of free motion masses m and my are displaced jointly a tne mye + mg" — Um + mig cos a eb + 5) es When the model is displaced slong axis ox, differentiat ‘equations for masses m and tip are compiled. ‘The motion of mass _m in the reine of joint and free motions is described by one equation mi + mg cos a ey li~ 8) ~ ky) 20) Force eit = %) - tyly - 5) acts Inthe plane of conveyance, it deforms the lnyer of the transported load, and acts on mass my For mass my, the following regimes are charscteletlc ia the stage of joint motion ve equilibrium 225) slip Forward oF backward mig © = mye + mye tn = Nac stent) Fe =) + hy le 226) if maguitide of the force which Io moving mass mp does ot tnceed theultimate force of sate fiction bay NEA there, tog ls coefficient of state fricton on the carrying element). The force of dry friction changes its direction depending. on the motion character of the load 1 when ig > 0 a0 0 = Cn oo ‘Additionally, the force of dry frietion also varies depending. on magnitude of the normal” resctlon -Ni®), Therefore, the ‘equation can be written as figs ey italy © 16 a eg =) hy be = x) am | on [At the stage of free motion the equation for mass my is mys 9 mye'+ mye sin a ey (ie + 8) + ey + hy tw = x) 28 If all the terms in the presented differential equations are vided “by the coefficent for the highest order derivate and foeffiient 2 Is Introduced which links masses m and my, then ms Amy a2 [At the stage of Joint motion in the absence of slip In the fiction poles = g cos 2m - phy Ho gain = Ang i= &) - oh Oe = 230. Reo In the presence of slip Feo F sg cos a= ayph Ooty te a) Syne Fe gsinas Bagh i= i) AAW mY = al[P50 + Any eee perry Wsehtas= 68 a At the stage of free motion FFs geos a> taps 2m Go 5 WF gin a= 9d bie Ia Hy) 2D) + PBR = Here. py py are natural frequencies of the model of load in the direction of axes ox and of. py = HRdth ty = TEM my fand_ny are damping factors resulting™ fram” the “internal sstahces to the motion of the model of the lond-layer tn fhe direction of axes ox and ey in the stage of joint motion, Bay = ean Bay = extn ys My, ay are. damping factors rebulting’ from the external résistances"te the mation of the model ‘of lond-layer atthe stage of free displacement inthe {ay and on directions, 2m, = c/n * my) 2ny sey Mm © im, anys eg oa ee To “determine the moment of transition from one regime ‘of motion to another, transcendental equations are uaed, which etermine the choice of the ‘required equation and” Inilat conditions for its solution, This lr duc to the fact thet both Analytical and computer-nided solutions are conducted by. the Fitting technique, Expression = eh etermines the static strain and is regarded as the inllat condition for solving the equations ‘The moment of eransition from an elastic viscous steain of {he model to. plastic deformetion typ and back toe. are Geterinined as 2 result of solution “St. the transceflental ‘equation obtained by equating Ni and Ny By gy = my ky Ow a bys + Gy tyky beso 7 48) ex ‘Transition from slip page of the model to stopping ¢ * 0 takes place at moment "=O provided that the static friction fiction forces at this moment are geeater or equal to the ferce tending to transfer the losd into the ali regime ay (MHD = ye ogg sine cy Og) + ky Or x) en “The reverse transition from stopping to slip takes place provided that the forces of static frletion do not exceed the Iragittude of the force tending to tronafer the model Ine the slip rexime fap INO C1 = mg © my an a+ cy US Sy) + by tx) t2as ‘The moment of transition from joint mation to. free ‘motion (moment of load separation f) ie. determined. age Fesule of solving the Following transcendental equation Nie ° 220 At moment ty the model of load drops onto the load-carrying elemedt and the collision phase commences, This moment tr determined from the transcendental equation yeo ean Analysis and solution of the differential equations of motion of en oscillatory system (anaog of bulk oad) are best Conducted with the aid of analog and digital computers. Use of Snalog computers enables one to obtain the main indicators charseterizing the load motion. Tet us study the physical mechaniom of the process and tablish correlations Of parameters of ibratory conveyance With parameters of the vibration regime. Comparative. analy, ‘howe that under plastic strains a more intensive rise of flight angles 4, 1s observed with increasing parameter I= (A oP so Bg, than in the presence of only” viscoelastic strains Correspondingly, lregwlar regimes of "motion are lac commencing eerlier (in the range 16 © [<2 a8 compared ‘with 18-< 22) This te reflected also in the correlation of the mean speed of the model motion end the flight angle. In the first case, maximum of the mean speed corresponds. toght angle 10-2007 tn she second, to angle 230-20" Ice, heaped of mde of teal te tae a vos ieee T= Kinuly parameters of the ptesoneanlotel mal fo bath Ide tee ere sud ease cae ell purtnste onan Resurnce deeper sie {a ateral Sanya, tr) oe the sets OF Soursuncr pacer Img mage, spac yeones of perl of Ge taped lsd and oo heal of she tle re congue oth an pesos te tage esl ere ems eeu eae ae Wer coltidence of the aad igh sopen nbas Belpre ar sel eos erates te eos eee ermeae fesse ceases or ae toe a te aoa Sues were Condctd onthe amlog machine EMUL0 to eine cs ofthe medal arenes othe nas events sce Ine ae aes oh pas ea, frou" 35 ta'S0'mn end tegen fran 68 ts aon ee {ir tpenance of ha ah sped OF ofan aera yane tocar Sag aad toy atattucee me epee ot the otal pf tnd SP ma ecerlncd was ante at AE coes of haar omens ps Sonn eet intra ng 2 20800 ee aed eral feques ge tostn Se atmping’ faces he a0 ae ae ‘model provides good correlation with the experiment within Tisite Tage of amps ane" hequrgans” Sheedy el hemes eee ot ar ee Sete Utica erecear seen Shangonaturalfeunney' proper of tate ba ous ie ode neal edieeoet a asl ia oe oa we can by conde tht at damping factors tun than + 105500 see = 100-40 0 woof th nad eee ences oe poneea tne) nee tmovon develop. Chungng the cutee or eae ote ee ue eae ne fase oe noe cha of the nen aprd at cates Sane of nearer ier comennce Ride tee ole rome fas ep nereeels oan 50 sec"! and py * 200 sec". Incroasing the mass ratio leads to an Increase of” the conveyance speed, ‘The model mass ratio 4 takes into account the thickness of the transported layer of the loud and the ratio of the marses directly participating and ‘not participating in vibrations. The load layer transported In a Small thickness can be simulated by a single mase model. With Increasing load thickness trensportabilty becomes, worse and coefficient % must be assigned & lesser value, ‘The friction coefficient on the ‘carmlng element has significant Influence ‘on the. speed. When this coefficient is Increasing. the speed Is also increasing: Viscoalty coefficients of the external dampers were found to be the determining factor for the process of vibratory conveyance of the model. Reduction of coefficient ny leads to Increase of speed: the more intensive is the regime, the more significant ie this change. Reduction of damping factors of the Internal dampers In the model at. low frequencies causes considerable increare of the conveyance speed, This I due to the fact that at small Internal viscous resistances of the model ny < pp Intensive separation already” takes place at low Frdquencies, and at frequencies higher than G00 osc/min Irregular motion sets in. Increasing the damping factors of the Interne! dempers shifts the region of Initiation of iregular regimes to higher frequencies of the order of 800-900 orc/min which is typlesl for real bulk loads. The model with natural Frequencies 'p, = 65-90 end damping. factors y= 200-500 correspond £6’ bulk losds. “The criterion of identical behavior of the model and the Iyer of bulk load, which is defined ae the equality of the mean speed of the model and the load, does “not always ‘express the Identity of the true characteristics of the medium land. the model. Therefore, ae. eleeody mentioned, additional ‘teria are required. The most convenient criterion is the close Similarity of the theoretical and experimental time histories of motion, le. the similarity of the trajectories of mation af oth the model and the particles of the transported bulk lond “Analyzing behavior of vibratory conveyance of a model of 4 load-layer on an anslog computer, the current characteristics fof the process can be obtained and. recorded on an oscillograph. Figure L12 shows oscillograms, obtained on the {analog computer EMU-IO, in which the displacement diggrems ‘of both the model and the real loud are presented “Analysis of « series of similar dlagram= encomparsing Both Aiscontinious and continuous regimes enabled one to draw the following conclusions. Time history of motion of the particles is changing. with Increasing distance from the bottom of therough as « renult of the wacocastic properties of he layer At relatively large layer height, attenuation ofthe: pulses aoe the phase shift an be 40 substan that the toner pork ot the “load! would wave sigcanty” slower or woul se ‘ogsto Insane’ ches, san a Fteaedsotion fe aber, uch Phenomenon Is largely due to the fort thet the lovee hes afferent characteristics in the longitudinal and tenses directlons, It ‘in confirmed by the fact thatthe oriental Components of vibration are attenuated with ietance feos the Yottom of the earyng element. more” intensely thoy he vertical componente ‘The motion of the load In the continuous regine becomes sendy rapidly. In the dacootiuous regime. the purities ee roupe in separate lnyers whose ze tay i the saree ay the time moments of beginning and end athe’ dropping aod separation phases. However. this aperndcty (x reativey eal ad the le of motion Ie repeated after several periods 20 thet ihe proces can be regarded az sendy. The sme puters is obsefved with vibratory comreynnce of the mee, ‘he ‘method. of” compering” model "motion teectores obtained with. the. ald of am anslog computer, aad the ‘perimental laws of motion of the paricles le sich that te der to reduce the amount of computations, one rete 1p italy” Computed to” determine the bousdares ete Characteristics of the medium tnodel) ging the’ law’ of Aisplacoment which ‘colncdes mare’ evacty athe. tke ‘xperimental law. Tis enabled the signiicnt lintation af the fangs of varation of the cotficents af clastic and sce, Teulttances of the elements ofthe model tor other eon ‘The obtsoed. characteristics af the, model ate. toparded ay relabe if relmively close coreation of the inleaed ee of Motion in the range af parameters observed In prestice (e 4:20) provided and" satnated ty” standard Seviaton Comparison of the experinentat and computational laws Indicate that to cetan combination ef elastic. nscous, et Plastic characteristics of the model Ko muse tatela denials with the” motton of the. Teal lond layers "The selec Patameters of the mode of load Tor one repime of oscilstions Of the caroing element” ate acceptable csc’ fur the sther oration regimes in a wide. range, The relly of Phenomenologeal models and thir lity to. reproduce the Dipscalpictire of the praceot also coraboratee, withthe Felmively lose correlation of the theoretical and experimental laws of varlalon of the normal pretsre and trlectory of tmotion ins rection perpendiuler to. the load-cartying Slemet ‘The conducted _ Investigations to dentty the phenomenological model and real bulk lds enele’ one to feeeain the following ‘Conveyance le significantly affected by the mass. ratio which taken Into scoune the thicness of the transported Toa liye, the damping factors ofthe external. vscae elements aiating serotynamic tesstnce, andthe ficon soe ‘The necessary condtion for tinilarty of conveyance of the model anda certain bulk load is the equality of the, meen Speeds of their vibratory placement. The mean speed Is an integral and necessary indicator which determines the silty oF ioraton “oplocement. of the. model tnd the land. The fincidence of the daplacement trajectory of fferent particles ff the fond and the model or the reactions of the Toad on Ue losdvearying clement tes sutfieot tinilary cordon For actual Oulk Toads damping Tecors “af the Internal viscous elements of the model of the order 200-500 sec are Saracteriatic. In this range the naturel, Traquencee af the Clase elements ofthe motel can change in the range (0-200 Sec" Increasing the natural frequency above. 200 sec" docs fet mae acmec Uertifiston of the phenomencloglsl model of finely inperecdlood eins withthe determisaion of the paremters of nuftnee K and vlacoty cof the loed ayer at the stage of joise motion ar expounded below” By” ploting the leafed Talus on an experimental curve of the angle of separation of the Toad layer v8 operating regine factor, the coodlione under hich the real Tayer of the real load ix separated fromthe Surface are determined Te has been established. that for materials with large content of finely” dispersed parucles at = 15,_ which corresponds to A+ 4 mm anda = 765 sec", the parameters of the model are eqial to py = 256 sec" n= 70 sec 25, which conesponds td) A + SS mm sed w the parameters of the model are equal to py = 270 sec” parameters of the model are equal to py = 0 sec"* and my, ‘70 sec" for quartz sand at [= 19, wich corresponds to A 50 mm and w= M6 gee", the parameters of the model ace ‘qual to py = 250 eec"t and ay = 470 soe for fier = 2.1, which corresponds to A= 6.0 mm and parameters of the model are equal py = 260 sec‘= 310 sec"! Comparison of the curves was made with respect to the standard deviation ‘The parameters of viscous resistance at the flight stage of the load were found” by. comparing, the" sxpertaratel Aependences of ‘the angles of fall an the vibratory velocty ith the data obtained from modeling on the analog. computer MN-I/M. Best correlation ia attained for the carver corresponding to the values ny = "70 sec"? at f= 13 for ‘materials with large content of finely dispersed particles, AUT 25, ay = 25 see"! for quartz and river sand, Mathematical ‘modeling on an analog ‘computer was, conducted. on the fsssummption that the resistances of load’ displacements, whieh fare proportional to the absolute speeds of layer motion, are ‘qual to zero. Such simplification in stipulated by the Fact thet the effect of these vesistances atthe stage of flight ae Insignificant Based on the physicomechanical_ conceptions about the character of vibratory conveyance of 2 load layer, TR wor sssumed that the stiffoese parameter py “py. The relation between the stiffness parameters in the vertical’ and horizontal rections was assumed proportional to vibration damping It the layer. Amore accurate value for py can be determined tn the process of Identification of the model” parameters under plastic strains slong a trajectory af the normal reaction of the toad layer Provided chat tan a (parameter of layer porosity) is equal to 05-05, sj (parameter of the intial elastic. strain whieh Is ‘commensurable vith the dimensions of perticles) Is equal ts 95-20 mm, 1 the coefficient of Internal resistance) cq to 6, quantity py. assumes e value in the range 100-150" sec" ‘The parameter of the model jy (coefficient of external fiction) { assumed equal to the valued for the actual granlar load. At these values of parameters py Sy tan a and iy Mentifeation of parameters. & and a was Carried out Tn the process of vibratory conveyance it ls necessary t0 provide such Kinematic parameters of the conveyor at, which the motion of the load layer ie securing. mainly In the light stage. The determining resistances In this exse. are. viscous Feslstances which are proportional to the absolute, speed. of bration conveying and are equal to the product of parameters A ng. By matching. the experimental plots of the speed of conveying, vs. the oscilation speed. with the similar plots ‘obtained: by ‘means of mathematical. modeling on an analog computer the product 2 can be found, For materials mith Theoretical Principles of Vibratory Technology Wt large content of finely dlapersed particles this product assumes the following values: at T= 15 hay = 5, at Pe 25 2 ne 19-15, for quartz and river sand 2 ng are equal to 12-19 end’, respectively. “The determination of the Individual values of parameters > and ng Is carried out by using the same plysial Imcrpretation for parameters A and for criterion Sh. by representing, ia Sh we determine that for the studied materials the value of the parameter of energy’ pulse transmission la equal respectively, to 0.76, Lil, by 133. “The parameters of viscous resistances my under these conditions become equal to 6-7, 12-1), 10-8, "and 2-1, Feepectvely. ‘As analysis of the diagrams shows, che displacement of the identified model of the load layer in the Tegimes of motion With one flight stage over a period “of otillations of the carrying. element is determined by. Its displacement. atthe Flight stage. The displacement of the model at the stege of Joint. motion in forward direction Ie compensated for by the Aisplacement in the reverse direction causing only weet of the carrying. surface In the selection process of ehe Kinematic parameters of vibratory conveying machines for the movement of abrasive granular materiale, it iz Important to account for br fetlon of the loud. For wear assessment, conveying of the model over the slippage sections during the stage of the joint. motion wes fnayzed. As a” reoult, tis established. that with Increasing ‘oscillation amplitude at constant value of the frequency the total path of the granular loads on the slip sections over a Period. of the carryigg plane oscillations. ie decreasing, for ‘example, 120, 108, 104° at orcillation amplitude of 5. 6. and 7 ‘mm, respectively) aad, consequently, abrasion le reduced. Thus, from the standpoint of wear, the regimes with large amplitudes are more beneficial, 222 Phenomenology of Conveying on « Carrying Element Performing Were Oscillations A flexible carrying element can perform oscillations with the purpose of load conveying. In this care the cucillations ate transmitted by special drive devices. or such owcillation can ‘rise Independently, for example, during the motion of thecarrying clement of a belt conveyor slong the supporting lalers. In both cases the transported load! ie subjected to the faction of wave perturbations, Devices of the first category are wave action conveyors land conveyors with « Flexible carrying clement belong. to the Second eategory. Wave conveying. The wave conveying principle Is realized most often in devices that are clastic. resonators in which longitudinal” “and” transverse travelling. weves are eteted, Usually, these are minlature devices in which the resonator is made in the form of steel elements, whose configuration. te selected in accordance with the operating requirements of the wave ‘device mlcrodisplacement, orientation, and. soon. (6, Oscillations in the resonator are excited by piczoelements oF other exciters, Longitudinal tnd transverse waves, ean, be ‘excited in mutually” perpendicular directions “which enables dlaplacement of the transported piece in the same. direction Such devices are used for the purpose of accurate. orentation of various parts, Excitation of the resonator is effected either kinematically or by Impact. For those branches of industry where It is necessary to move large masses of loads over considerable distances, wave conveying devices of different design are being developed. The principal feature of such « wave conveyor is In the fact that Tt isan elastic belt {of the type used In ordinary conveyors) without any supports, across which longitudinal and Liansverse waves are. propagating. It is placed divectly on the mine. ‘The Toad on the belt moves, just_as onan. ordinary vibratory conveyor but on fundamentally difereat principles, se ‘result of the vibrations of the surface ef the belts The conveyance speed is close to the speed of wave propagation, If necessary vibration parameters are maintained The second operating regime of the wave conveyor is realized in a more complex manner; however, it facilitates, the significant Increase of output up to. the’ velocity ef the {tavelling wave (71. Hydrovibrators, magnetosticton elements snd bullt-in miniature electromagnetic vibrators are used. ae ‘drives for wave conveyors. More advanced principles. of ‘excitation are also being developed. The deive syotem con be Naleanized “directly into the belt, “The wave, comeyer Is ssentilly balanced, it does not requice special supports, and bllows bending in all directions. Erection of such « conveyor Theoretical Principles of Vibratory Technology 103 fon a mine face is extremely simple and is reduced to spreading the belt and connecting it to the power source, The configuration of the travelling waver on the conveying surface is determined by the parameters of the longitudinal and {ransverse travelling wates whose equations have the form FF Ay 608 (Wt = hd), 82 Ay 608 Lut = ky + vibrations; kia the wave number (0%) toy it the phase wave velocity (yyy = Aa/2xlr 2 is the wavbtlongeh, ‘The confighration of the longitudinal "and transverse travelling waves on the conveying surface depends ‘on the parameters of the transverse and longitudinal components of the oscillations ‘and. on the phase sift. between, them. By ‘changing parameters of those components, one can obtain the Imost diverse configurations of the travelling waves on. the Comeyor surface Not nly’ the parameters, but also the character of the process are substantially dependent on configuration of: waver fon the conveying surface. This can result In. vibratory conveyance regime, conveying with wave velocity and. so on ‘The character of the proceas ie affected by the parameters of both the transverse and longitdinal oscillations; the conveying speed is mainly affected by the magnitude and distribution of the velocity of longitudinal oscillations over the wave surface (of the conveying element. AAs follows from the loci of the speeds of the conveying wave urface In the absence of phase shift between the components of the oscillations, velocity of the longitudinal foscllations. om the outgoing, wave surface Ts directed in. the fection opposite to the direction of wave propagation, and on the Incoming wave surface che direction is towarde Propagation. At a phase shift of 90° between the componente Inthe. upper part of the wave, the longitudinal wioratory Velocity is directed towards wave’ propagation, and the lower pert is directed inthe opposite rection, The velocity oF Tongtuinal vibrations reaches maximum on the wave cre, Tn using suche regime ‘of longitudinal and. transverse oscillations of the travelling wave, when ite crest _mover with famplitude velocgy, Ie becomes possible. to. transport slongated objects with a speed equal to the velocityibeatory teennology Theoretical Principles of Vibratory Technology 105 Figure 26 continue. tude of the longitudinal oscilations of the travelling Generally, the speed of travel of elongated objects (in the presence of some slippage relative to the conveying surface) Is Aetermined by expression roa - ph where Is the speed of motion of the load relative to the conveying surf Tet us consider the general case of wave conveyance of = Viscoelastoplastic. inertial phenomenological model of a Imonolayer ‘of a transportable load over a carving. surface performing longitudinal and tranwerse oscillations (Fig. 2a) Let us "Introduce the “moving frame of the rectangular ‘coordinates ‘xoy which Is righly. linked with the conveying ‘Surfece of the carrying element. Along with the moving, frame Wwe use the stationary coordinate system xo" parallel to the moving axes The transported Toad is simulated by a ewormass viscotlastoplastic phenomenological model with » concentrated mass m*. The viscoclatic properties of the load are modeled106, Theory of Vibratory Technology sla chctogen! Bae, wh te stfonascefitenis B, cee eee cea shclegel alee aie the coat Sinkbat cen ot aby bie sheciteal ade ak stay coca Hea” Patents ee a ‘caused by displacements of the particles of the load in Scurruncssoenea ae imal ty het taco ‘Selopel Cer wich lney create he Ai Maly cous foe ef and mats ff nhs Til'mg. The sued int eeeee ie corel 1 Msc inaeed at dneel of U's vce cst fete acca eet cat Saar Nive Sige fie tin te Wo eae fooler rien a sae Sigman rheenclogcal model of ioad by assalng A * tn “the investigations conducted below a number of counts are true tobe oul te tr paar yt seat wath Sloe of duplacement of the lead by 4 mae ose er cateevanecale. eucs Ta Crees seca geen crepe STIR" Zine ct ine f nebnologlece abe ool Soi pats rant ee pou nip setae area oO role stone ad porter ret min righ 1a soniye Ake eke of mvetnicd convene, aur Shattaoe seta a ie “rimage Soe opemicte of the tine Mery of cvcitons af Oh carping lemons Acsutng What 02 aad cic cae oee re steatry vlog. to Chas we prs to te tow ot oveston Sf the naling weer aes ihe ching semen cos (1) oe x aco [O- A) oor] If the wave propagstes across che carrying clement with a then it can be assumed. without significant losses of accuracy, {at A/rph = 0. Then, from. the obtained expressions we Getermind the time history of oscillations of the caring clecent, Theoretical Principles of Vibratory Technology 107 ye Ay cor ot X°# Ay cos (ot + ‘Thus, when i/¥gh = 0. we obtain the usual harmonic oscillations which do tot take into account the presence of the travelling wave. In this case, the calculation of the wave conveying. installation is reduced to. the calculation of a oratory Installation and ean be conducted by the method ‘expounded in section 2221 of the present chapter. For approximate calculations it can be assumed that & ph: lm thie case the time history of oscilations. of the otking element can be written in the fellowing form Yi Ay con = we NF Ay cos = plot + vd where 9 Ia the coefficient of velocty ratio. 6 * Y/tp Coefficient p, depending om the signs of veloction vy atl thy, ‘can have both positive and negative values Uf the 1oed veloc) and wave travel are in diferent directions) ‘The obtained expressions show that the presence of the travelling wave over the surface of the carting element causes ‘change of the effective oscillation Frequency. If the wave and the load ere travelling in the same direction, the affective Frequency is decreasing. IF they travel In opposite directions, the effective frequency in Increasing. At commensurable speeds ‘of travel of the load and the wave, the effect of factor p can be substantia. For example, nthe case of the wave ead the load moving’ in opposite directions with close apecds at. low frequencies of ‘cecilations of the. caring lement, the frequencies seting on the load can be practically doubled. In some cases, such = conveying regime can be of practical significance Thus, if the carping element oscillates according to 2 lume history characterized by the last formulas, the calculation fof wave conveyance can be conducted Using’ the method of Section 221 of the present chapter Tet ur now develop an exact solution for the relationships of conveying load whlch le Kentified with the vecoslastoplastic Inerlal phenomenological model ‘The above enumerated characteristic regimes of strain and rotion of the load on a wave conveying plant are described by the following system of differential equationsViscoelastic strains of the load (1-4) oom mass in the phenomenological model of the load ‘During the process of the viscoelastic strain the following force sets on the carrying element from the displaced load a ast Sve wet 2400 Fae t= Rite) =e Juste eg! ae Viscoolastlc strain of the displaced load will continue until the following condition is satisfied Fe bey Fave ® Epxti Aft the frst condion Je complied with, the strains of the phenomenological model of the load set they are described by the differential equations Theoretical Principles of Vibratory Technology WH mam alt Jorg cone hey +8) ott 1] +mesinn mn) ea Ipc +2)—He = | Se oa During the process of laste stra ‘ts on the carrying clement from the dep Following force yy *~ hay 129) Foe ® Bye 010 9 The moment of transion from plastic. strain to siacotlle ans etermined by the Condon Fox * Frey Fox * Foon Te loa sin contact with the caring element until the following condition 1s stifled Five, ply" © After this condition Is satisfied, free motion (flight) of the load commences, whichis described by equationhy theory ot Vibratory Lechnology by The free motion of the load comes to an end and jot ‘motion commences when condition y= 0 Is satisfied. “The presented equations and the system of logh conditions enable one to investigate conveyance In the feplme of wave oscillations ean Conveying by flexible carrying. clement. In the process of Aansporting bulky loads by tans af a” flenble earring slement the load is continuously “atived” and’ dlplaced felative to the comeing sfoce. The ensrgy expended fa the Process of these motion is used up la abvedng, the, ele Erushing of the transported load, and In heating of both belt st lod Av the same time radatibutlon of the transported loed by fran size takes. place. It is established "by experimental Investigations that in the process of motion over the idler, the flexible carrying element performe transverse and longludinal ovations. The main Generating mechanism for there silations is interaction of the load snd the carting tlement when they move in wave trjecton formed os a rest Sf the fag. of the loaded ‘carrying’ clement between" ders “hus, the trajectory of motion of the load is the line of ag of the caring element on the ides to which oscillations of Sitforent forms are superimposed. These coileions are caused ty the interaction of the lond with the driving element bol the tates “The motion of the carving element con be represented as 4 translational laplacemend with onetant speedy te which longitudinal and. tranrverse porode esllatons "are superimposed, Their time histories are formed. from the fisplacements along wavy trajectory between the rollers tnd J" and oscillations “a and" resulting. from Inerectlon tetween the transported’ load with the carving” clement. Te ought to "be. mentioned that these Interactions are very Sigifican, since the muss ofthe load can exceed the asd of the carting clement. Assuming that in the” gen cove the principle of superposition le vail, we find that the carrying lement performs periodic oscilations a" = ato © wt and Je ST0'+ 910 where fanctlons ‘ct and yi) are Keown: Experiments indicate that a wile range of low- and relatively high-frequency harmonies fr contained In the vibration spectrum of the carrying slement. For the simplification of the solution of the problem, and taking into accoust that the mechanics of "the coneying process is of principal interest to us, the part of the carrying lement under consideration is modeled as a lumped parameter ‘mtem with mass M, clastic lomente ‘Ky, Ky ad. Viscous flements Cy Cy. The transported load Is slmulated. by a twormase vlscotlastoplastic model with masser mand. my laste elements Ky, ky ky and viscous elements cy. ty. The Fesistances to the lave? motion reeuling from the esesce of erodynamic elfects are modeled by viscous elements with the corfficlents cy and cy, In accordance with the above statement the differnt ‘equations of load motion along the section where viscoelastic strains occur, Ind eg + Oy + da = Kia? eps + hae mate ep OB Byte oy FDU + Boe ean mts t (nt Gta b ha eat thee = 6 1 is assumed hare that the near-wall layer of the load of mass m motes. jointly with the carrjing element in the rection of “conveying. However, according tthe method ‘expounded in section 221, the slip over the caring element an be considered ‘The dynamic equations of the load-carrying clement have the form (Fg. 260, 0 Mgt + Cit + Uy + Ky = Ry + i — i MES 4 (Cet edt (yt he) 2 = Cao Raat meth ean shai where" is the dlaplacement of the tower surface of the ‘arrging element determined by the location of the idlers and belt deflection (rag) lines between them: Ny is the pressure om the supporting idlers during the travel “along them of the caring element with a load: g, Is the effective coefficient of Fictlon of the tdlors. ‘The pressure on the Idlers lr determined from expressionNee GOED KO 99 the pressure of the load on the catrying element is equal to vy thy en ‘the pressure Inside the layer of the transported load is Gy Un Dy Od Gye ky Oy Energy expenditure on overcoming resatance in the ldlers when the loeded carrying element moves over” them can be determined fom expression Wie DK, (ta) (@—2)eat Energy expenditures on “atiring” the load in the process ‘of conveying are determined by expression yet (ru inarfrcn-nar {vce 2a] Je is also not dificult to determine energy losses ‘stoclated with the eerodynamic resistances of the transported bull foud. Te must be born In mind that these resistances, high-speed unies can be considerable ‘Thus, the developed computational method enables one to estimate energy expenditures on “atrring” the. load and. the level of its crushing during the conveying process. By analyzing the effect of various factors on their Intensity. one. cam sole the problem of selection of the optimum l(rom the standpoint ‘of the minimum energy losses) regime of conveying bulk toads by bele conveyor Install 223 Phenomenology of Conveying Using Combination ‘Transport Means, In order to expand the sphere of application and Increase the effiiency of Vibratory conveying, machines. while preserving Theoretical Principles of Vibratory Technology Nd such advantages as the absence of wear of the carrying flement and. crushing) (reduction of grin. las) of the transported loed, low resltances to ination, ands 0m « umber of combination transport means have been developed Tn combination conveying machines, among. which. the present ‘section will consider” vibropneumaticy vibvokydeaulic ibrotraction, and vibromagnetic ‘machines, vibrations are. used Inainly to reduce the resistance to conveying. Displacement Is performed by additional means, namely by aerodynamic, or Ihydrodyaamic jet pressure, special driving welght. or forces of magnetic attraction, In all such combination conveyors, a considerable increase of the conveyance speed is feasible, in excess of the attainable speed with purely vibratory techniques, due to the presence of considerable moving Forces ‘The specific feature of vibropneumatic conveying Is the Aependence of the aerodynamic head of the air jet an the speed fof motion of the transported oud. With vibromagnetc conveying the moving force ix Independent of the speed of loud ‘motion and Is determined by Its position relative. to. the lectromagnet andthe ‘operating regime of the latter. The traction force of vibrotraction plants is dependent on the speed and elasticity of the tractive element. In vibropneumatic conveying, the motion of the transported load is realized in the general case by the dynamic and state pressures of the air jet. In the process of motion over the load-carrying element the slr expande and the velocity ef the air Jot increases. However, due to. limited Yength’ of the ibratory” conveyors, the pressure drop is amall and. the Increase of ir jet velocity’ can, a= a first approximation, be laregarded along the length of the load-carrying element Thus, at low velocities of air motion, encountered in the process of vibropneumatic conveying, the life force of the sir Jet is negligible and ts static head (pressure) can be expressed terms: of the dynamic pressure In conditions of constrained ‘motion, In vibrohydreulic conveying the Jet velocity along the Tength of the load-carrying element remsine unchanged. the aforementioned Into account, let us consider ‘of ‘aeromand hydrodynamic conveying In the ence of vibration field, especially of vibropreumatic and Viorokjdraulie conveyance. "The phenomenological process of Dreumatic (hjdraulic) conveying Ina siration field iy precented In Fig 26d. Let the transported load te acted upon by the Flucttating flow of the carrying. medium moving with « speed of y= VU + OF (at » pit Col,im “Theory of Vibratory Technology ‘The equations of motion of the losd in the pulsating flow fof the medium In the presence of a vibration field heve the form ‘iscoelastlc stesing T+ As" Ma pity’ = =P pcos : f eas) FP anya WE + pity = P= gos a plastic strane 240 oF ro fp -geue fon the motion segments with Joss of contact Footage phy pcos a " ean Fo ma + phys Fe geo slippage E+ anes 2nyd¥ + pine Fe pve oftue + pie 4 2ngV UL + OF oe + pI sgn tS ady = g cos @ 48) Here, the following notations are adopted (Fig. 26h BB gk, mk ope, ang SE an [Ny ls the normal reaction of the load on the walle of the cirrying elements Y"and Y~ are the dlaplacement of the lower tnd upper walls of the carrying slement in the sirection of ‘vis Jr 4 [6 the displacement of the carrying. clement th the rection of axle Calculations carried out using presented equations when + Ay sint, Po Seay sin we X20 v= Ve a= 90° enable “Theoretical Principles of Vibratory Technology MS cme 6 betn a the chctacten af hn proses of Sot Tol conven canine be eft y the combination tat alg th "Sane She weno" oh sap are ev are ein a fc Sethu cheney th nose CofA aad cco cece eines 0 Nene oe wae fo sconce mice tral’ veer basing need cnc end" mh eermcty’r ihe muse ven e Gone Unecons wih wv surety Wer 260 cell ed eae SS Pipncmert cre with Cen seed asian t She eer cee, the caso jute cs lh SpvindTae ot tian wi the prin Ti en Se chine Is described by system of uifferential equations G+ The asterisk corresponds to the motion of the machine While separated from the ground SE Ingt + phe — sina + grtsin (at 0) FAP at) tno) no + ) Pte acai gretaintet 14 8a) Flatt) The following notations are adopted here: qy and gy are the rations of the rotating and the total mass ofthe machine, ‘by and pa aro the natural Frequencies of the vibratory machine ng aves Y and © Regie i and ny ore affective coefficients of viscous resistances of tie last like of the vibratory machinei Theory of Vibratory Technology temarete mare ng and af are effective coofficients of viscous resistances of the Wbratey machine 2¢ che free motion seginent, © is the phase shift between the components of the disturbing ibrator force in the direction of sven y and xy Hit the Cocfficient of filetion between the vibratory machine and the round. For the most characteristic regime of motion without separations from the ground, the dlaplacements and speeds are etermined by the following expressions aot) smerny tema meted senate Le oar +0 LL oat W Tidmarrejer ooo ere seartet one ne ee Viera write oO cos (t-F0) where ¢y and py are phase shifts between the componente of the distiebing force snd the displacements of the ibratory Imachine. The Torce on the pulling device ls equal to eee TE nt EE erg the displacements of the vibratory machine in the direction of Theoretical Principles of Vibratory Technology 7 ‘The power needed for the conveyance He tnctn bm feline + neosayo +a plat UE — oP naib ty FO me rama or ‘Tho combination vibretorypulling method of conveying, a8 shown “by computations and experimental investigations, Characterized by lower resiatances than the displacement by pure pulling drive. ‘The vibromegnetic conveyor Isa vibrating. losd-carsing clement along. which driving magnets are mounted. The Aisplaced “loads "are magnetie. In. wlbromagnetic conveying. Afferent regimes of motion of the load scan be realized flpending on the character af Operation of the electromagnet Let’ us consider the case of ‘bration ‘conveying of most practical Interest when the load moves in a discontinuous Or it {pulsating flow. The packaged load traffic is formed by virtse of the specific operating features of the magneto traction TF there is a continuous layer of magnetic load on the carsjing clement. then when the clectromagnets are switched fn, the load particles loceted in the domain of traction of the electromagnet’ are pulled inside the magnet. Since the lsctromagneta ere mounted slong the carrying element at such 1 stance that thelr domains of attraction were close each ther without overlapping, the” continuous load" Becomes Aiscontinuous and forms separate portions (packages) when the flectromangets are switchede on. The magnets are placed. in uch a wa) that the ale gaps between the individual portions of the Ioed would be minimum. thus excluding. the ‘elementary portions from ending up in the domain of traction of the Field directed against the direction af conveying. In order to ‘exclude the decelerating influence’ of the magnetic field, the Glsctromagnet operates’ in regime of interrupted power Supply, Le. the commutation system ie tuned as follows: when the core. of "the load element. It In the center of the lectromagaet, Le when the motive force becomes equal to sro, the elecromagnst is switched off. Another regina is also possible, in which the electromagnet Is switched off with some ‘elay, thus the load which falls on the carrying. slement. is Somewhat decelerated.” The electromagnet Is agen energized fren the loed reaches the domain of atrection of the ‘nextus Theory of Vibratory Techaology lectromagnet in the direction of motion. In such a regime of ‘operation the attractive force acts on the load only Inthe rection of conveying, Ths, the magnetic attractive force can be writen as ow when Mex e+ hy hg = Rl + by thy +k) when ibe Les OL Fyto when Us Yas xs V+ OL where, 1 1s the successive umber of the electromagnet: is the sphere of attraction of the electromagnetic field on. the load lnyer element under consideration, Ly is the distance from the beginning to the maximum of the function of the attractive force: fy andy are the characteriaticn of the eld of the slectromagnet, “The force of magnetic attraction as 4 function of the stance to the ‘center of the electromagnet le" curvilinear Function ‘which ‘can. be appronimated "by. a, nonequlatcrel srlangle. It has been established by experimental investigations that the attractive “force of the load "layer element. iz Aetermined by the ratio of the length of the loud package and the Tongth of the electromagnet. Within some ‘limits, the Imagnitude of the attractive force increases with the length Increase of the element of the transported load for’ a gen length of the electromagnet. The attractive force is considerably dependent also. on the. location af the loud flement with respect tothe electromagnet, At the Lond lement moves nto the electromagnet the. attractive fosce iz increasing. e reaches 4 manimuty when the load element. moves Into the clectromagnet by 05-07 of Its length; with further stlvance of the foad the attractive force drops, Becoming. eval {o zero at the moment when the center of the load element coincides with the center of the electromagnet and the loed is Situated symmetrically relative to electromagnet. Further Sdvance Ieads. to development of a force In the opposite firection, Le. against the direction of the motion of the load Let us consider the regime of vibromagnetic conveying In Which the section of ‘the magnetic and vibratory systems, are ‘ynchronized z0 that the force. of magnetic attraction acte on the element at the moment when Ie has no contact with, the carting element. Furthermopre, the equations of mation of the ‘Theoretical Principles of Vibratory Technology 1 Toad model In the direction of conveying. relative to the carrying element will have the form Be Angi ~ px = = 8 = Days gain a easy fon interval Ly #8 = 172 L Be angi s phe = 2ei + Uoh+ pDLy seein (252) On the interval of slippage along the carrjng element ‘equations of motion of the load are 6 Babee 8 = Daihen ae shen Ge Unf + ant as Here, m is the mass of the load clement; my, y are the feslatences tothe motion of ‘the loed element Which ere Proportional to the relative and absolute velocities of load ‘Motion im the direction of the ‘aMs: x, § are the components of bratory. velocity and. acceleration of” the load-earrjing lrnent nthe direction of axe male the angle of inclisation OF the ond. carying slements ye my, and. sevheologie parameters of the load and the coefccht of friction against the carrying. element: py. py are the parameters of the lectromagnet, pf = ky/m pi = ky/m. ‘Since. the Torce of the electromagnetic atraction Inthe case under “consideration acto only. in the direction of Conveying, the equations of motion of the load in the direction fof axis ) wil be determined only by vibration parameters of Whon investigating the laws of vibromagnatic conveying using. these equations, the moments of transition fromthe Joint’ motion to free motion, from free motion to Joint motion from elastic strain of the Tayer to slippage and vice veran are determined. from correlations obtained forthe regimes of ratory conveyance Energy expenditure on the displacement of the oad in the process of ibromagnetic convaying Is comprised from the expenditures of the vibratory end magnetic systems23 VIBRATORY PROCESSING OF DISPERSED MEDIA AND BULK LOADS: Processing large masses of small-chunk and dlopersed media Is carried “out” when execiting many technological operations with the use of vibration processing. in enrichment, Im conveying, and others Vibration processing of large masses of rocks in blocks or loose state is realized in vibration diocharge Of the ore from the blocks, massif working with the aim” of "weakening, vibration diagnostics and so. on “The features of the action of vibration on large messes of dispersed media or rocks are based. on general physical Processes and linked mainly with the damping of orcillations i the massif which occurs ae a result. of persion of she ‘energy of oscillations, filtering properties of the medi, and the formation of exponential waves The common physical basis of these processes calls for considering the laws of processing. of the massif and varus dispersed media in one section of the book. The ‘problem it reduced t0 developing phenomenological adele” that might take into account the fact that different parts of the massif ‘orate with lferent amplitudes changing from maximum near the source of vibration to zero at the boundary of the zone of bration propagation, 234. Phenomenology of Vibration Action on Dispersed Media When vibrations act on « dispersed media, «number of transformations take place whose apecifice “depend, on on intensity. AS the intensity increases with values OF the acceleration amplitudes not exceeding the free’ fall acceleration, the dispersed medium begins to. acquire mobility, Sand pscudoliquldty (atate of qiasiiguefactions In the, state fathesion between the particles becomes weak, they” approach sch other more closely, the number of pores decrenses, te ‘more dense arrangement of the particles taker place) and the Imedium is compacted. Maximum compaction Io. etained at Values of “acceleration amplitudes close’ to free’ fall ‘With Turther increase of ofcillation intensity the particles of the dispersed medium begin to. lose contact with. the vibrating working element, the links betwees the particles re reduced. and periodically destroyed, Le, the medium seems to Theoretical Principles of Vibratory Technology 12 ‘change into a state of boiling. This state, called vibration bolling, Is characterized by the loosening of the medium and by strong’ cleculstion of the patticles making. up. the medium Vibration boiling can be divided into two characteristic stages = a stage of segregation of the particles of the mediam and the stage of Intensive mining. ‘The second retime of vibration boiling i realized at more intensive vibration regimen Investigation of dispersed systems indcater that the transition Trom such characteristic states as quesliquefacion to vibratory boiling takes place either upon reaching # specified level “of vibratory acceleration by the medium, or upon, limparting 4 specific ‘energy level to the medium. the first criterion ie more applicable co coartely dispersed systems, the second is) applicable {0 microheterogeneous ystems. it is jertinent to. note that even in coaraaly disporeed systems ansition from the state of quasiliguefaction to the state. of vibratory bolling occurs, a2 a rule, at accelerations exceeding free fall acceleration, ‘The critical accelerations become close to the free fall acceleration only when processing very thin layers. of coarsely dispersed. sjstems” having low internal elatances. In the general case, critical accelerations are dependent on the properties of the medium, thickness af ite layer, adhesion forces between the particles, ands number ‘of other factors, ‘Similarly, the energy criterion ie also & function of many factors cherecterizing the medium. In thie care, since only part of the energy generated by the vibration excleer is Sbsorbed by the medium, the absorbed energy cught to be ‘adopted as the energy criterion of transition of the depersed ‘medium from one charecteritlc state to another, instead. of the energy dissipated by the vibration excitor as is currently the practice, Tels this part of energy that causes the transition of the mediam from one state to another “This section considers fundamental mechanics of vibration action on coarsely dispersed and microheterogencous media, The goal isto understand formation of the criteria of transition of the medium from the state af quasllqefaction to vibration bolling, both energy and acceleration criteria, The ‘nergy balance of the vibration eneiter-digperae medium system I specifically analyzed and’ the generated. energy. which le sbsorbed by the medium le determined ‘The real. dispersed medium comprsing an enormous ‘number of particles represents « volumetric multi-mass. system Depending on dlsperse composition of the medium and. them2 Theory of Vibratory Technology number of phases (presence, apart from the solid phase, also ff "gaseous and liquid! phases) it can be represented az ‘multicmare elastolnerlal system it which hyeterstic resistances Of different types are generated causing damping of ‘scllations applied to Ht Damping inthe considered ciepersed media ie 4 very complex phenomenon. It can are for vatlous reasons among which one should first note the friction of the surfaces, dry of wet, of the particles against each other; resistance to” the ‘motion of solid particles in the iguid or gaseous phase: passage of these phases through the pores of the solid phase, lereversible strains of insufficiently elastic phases, presence of various forces. of adhesion, ele. Generally. when energy Aissipation takes place, damping forces are presont in all cases Usually several of tts forme are in action simultaneously. The presence of damping forces causes the manifestation of Donlincar effects in the system which is subjected to vibratory processing. This. in itz turn, extremely complicates the verigetion of euch yeteme la practice, usualy” different rethods of approsimation of the real forms of damping by viscous damping are used. Such @ method enables one to Feduce complex nonlinear systems to simpler linear systems, It particular by using the method of toergy balance. which Ie to the effect that the dissipated energy during» cycle caused by Feal resistances, Ip equated 0 the disipation of energy from Viscous resistances, Comples. forms of reolstances ‘can be reduced t0 viscous and dry resistances with suffcent accuracy for proctcsl purposes, "Thus, for the solution of the mbjerty of practical problems, the dispersed medium can be represented by hree-dimensional tulti-maseviecoslastoplatotnerial system Wig, 27). Each theological cell” of uch = system ix characterized by. inertial properties (masses mend m, by Slastie properties felastic elements KK, and also by hysteresis properties ~ viscous c and plastic kp elements, The rheologicl cells interact via elastic elements Snd viscous and try frction connections. Thus, by using the developed standard With “special elements, all the versity of acting In real Sjsteme adhesion forces between the porticies, which Include Stomic coagulation and true phase contacts, can be reduced to fruivalent viscous nd dry resistances bythe techniques. of uivalent modeling. The mojority of dlapersed medi, including tmulthphate media, can be modeled with the aid of standard Niscoelastoplastolnertial phenomenological models. ‘Theoretical Principles of Vibratory Techaology 122 Figure 27 Menomanclogiea! madel of a three-din ‘The laws of behavior of dispersed media under the Influence of vibration and the characteristic properties of the mmats-tranafer processes are extremely complen, since they are dependent on a large number of various factors. The theory of there processce te built on the basie af = thorough study of the physical principles of the phenomenon. Certain successes In this lvection have been achieved by using the techniques of phenomenological rheology should be noted. that mass-transfer processes in the vibratory eld are changing somewhat upon’ transition from coarsely dispersed sjatems to ‘ighly concentrated Imleroheterogencous systems in Which the. decisive role played by surface phenomena on the interphase boundary and by the edhesion forces between the particles. This te caused by the fact that az a result of increase of concentration and degree of dlapersion of the solid phase in liquid and gaseous Siapereed media the ective Interphase surface increee ssiuatantlally, and ‘the Tree. surface ontray te incseating Sccordingly on the boundary of phase separation. Thevefore, the Tole of intermolecular forces of adhesion betweon the particles Mereases. Ae a result of the appearance of the molecular fdhesion forces, particle aggregates snd spatial structures a Formed in highly concentrated microheterogencous syetsins. It large dlapersed systems, in which there ia no adhesion Between the particles, only forces” of friction are acting. Spatalme ‘Theory of Vibratory Technology structures are not formed and, therefore, mass-tranafer processes take place, as a rule, under less Intensive vibrations The properties of spatial structures of highly concentrated Imicroheterogencous systems ate. determined by surface Phenomena on the Interphase boundary and’ by the typeof Eontacts between the particles of the” solid phase. All Structures are usually divided Into three types with respect to the strength of contacts between the particles of the solid phase (0. “Structures. with coagulation contacts are haracterized by the least simple contacts. Thess. are. formed botwaen particles of the solid” phase separated. by layers of liquid dispersion medium, Structures with direst point tatomie) Interactions which are” usually formed in highly” dispersed powders are charecteized by strong contacts, ‘The strongest Contacts are encountered in condensed (crystallized) structures With” true phase’ contacts that are. created following Solidification of the Inyer between the particles of the cold ‘phase. ‘The behavior ef finely dispersed. londe are largely Influenced. by sero- and. Rydodsnamic resistances of the {aseous and liquid phases ‘When operating vibratory plant its working element performs oscillatory motions as. result of which force pulses fre imparted onto the mediun ie ie carrying, thus deformation waves propagate through the medium. It Ie established thet uring the vibration processing of bulk media, the process is largely affected not only by the parameters of the source of ibeation, but algo by the festuree of interaction betmeen the Constituent monolayers. and. particle, When processing, poured ‘media, the monolayer coming. in contact ‘with the ibration Source receives force Impulses from it The impulses are franemitted from. the lower monolayer’ tothe upper monolayers, As a result of inertia, and the presence of Fnetional forces “and ireversble.strsing, the. impulses are radually attenuated as they are transmitted "from one ‘monolayer to another, The degree of attenuation ie determined by the properties of the medium and alao by the charactor and magnitude of the force pulses. The energy of the oscillatory Motion of the working ‘clement during the passage of the Waves is penton accelerating. the processed medium and. Inaking up for the losses during the irreversible strains, Investigations show that when, dealing. with, diopersed media, » phase shift ia observed in displacements of contgous monolayers. Also, if vibratory processing is combined with the Conveying process, the mean speed of motion le” decreasing “Theoretical Principles of Vibratory Technolongy 125 With increasing distance from the source of vibvation. ‘The Indicated trend (reduction of speed of the upper monolayers) le predominant; however, for some media, ler thicknesses, and ‘Sperating regimes, the upper layers ca led the lower layers, This is explained by the elastic properties of the medium, ‘Thus, travelling “altenuating wate” propagates in the dispersed’ medium. The presence ‘of a phise shift inthe fisplacoment of adjacent particles weakens the contacts, ‘between ther imparting "to. them the property of ‘quasilquetaction, and under intensive vibrations ‘the peticles ttre tranoferred to « state of preudobeiling ‘As a result of the different velocities of the upper and lower layers of the medium im magnitude and in some cates lso. In direction), periodic strains of the whole mats are Constantly created, In some regimes the upper monelayers ih their teavel_do not uniformly lag from the lower. but perform complex motions. There are also cases when same, monolayers lave stepwise phase shifts. This is witness tothe fact that complex spatial displacement of the constituent particles snd ‘monolayers takes place In the mass of the pracersed_ medium Such internal circulation in the layer defines the character af the process of mass transfer and energy losses associated with rk Im the steedy-atate regimes phase shift between the Aisplacement of a layer of the medium and the working organ ‘can be very slgnifcant, It must be born in mind that the phase Shift Ie Found In the motion of both the upper and the lower Surfaces of the layer. the latter being Im contact with. the Source of vibration. Energy consumption in the process of Vibratory working of the mare and the delay of the moments (of seperation of the medium from the vibrating surface are Getermined by the phase shift. ‘Tho process of interaction of the source of vibration with the medium Is accompanied by constant change of the value of the forces acting between them (eaction of the medium on the wibraion ncte. Under sufficiently Intensive orcilations, the normal reaction of the ‘medium becomes periodically equal to tero, the lower layer Toses contact withthe working element and, as a result of the sccumlated kinetic energy, performs free motion. In. such toss-up regime the lower monolayer efter imparting all ite Kinetic ergy to the layers lying on the top, in time beeline fs reverse motion, although the upper inonolayers cen continue to move upwards. At this moment looseting of the processed medium begins, Le, bolling. There could exist such «regimeWhen the upper monolayers are still na aspended state, and the lower, coming into contact with the vibration excter, again seceives an impulse upwards, This, the “upper and lower monolayers meet in the suspended state and- are. dlaplced ta the process. The upper monolayer receives an impulse from the lower layer in an upward direction and continues, Is. motion, snd the Lover “user up its Kinetic ‘energy and returns once ‘more £0 the surface of the vibration excite th mecing. With the surface the Tayer of the medium ie decelerated and ‘compacted. Upon dropping, the medium can partelly regain es Kinetic energy or, comersely, cause additional expenditure of ‘nergy by the source of the vibration. This energy wil be spent on crushing and reducing the grain size of the processed ‘medium and also on wear of the working organ ‘The described regime of “vibratory processing of a ‘lspersed medium, which te realized only at ulficent layer thickness, ie characterized By the Tact that two zones can be denified: In the zone closest to the vibration exciter, Intense oscillations of the medium take place. Inthe second. tome ‘oscillations are smoothed and the medium Ie as i iw state of levitation, Depending on the parsemters of the source of vibrato the medium can be displaced steady, reaching an Identical height with identical speed when being tossed in each cyele of the oacilations, or untesdily when large and. small tossings iterate. Unsteady regimes are tablished. when the Scceleration of the oscillation exciter asthe. medium falls it close £0 the values required by the conditions of tossing. ot exceeds them. In this case, the falling medium loses, contact “gain with the vibration exciter before it succeeds in sequiring the speed’ of motion. With this, @ small toss occurs andthe medium falls already at = more favorable time considering. the subsequent tossing. ‘Therefore, the “nest. event of medium Separation progresses normally, but the moment of drop te Sgtin unfavorable for the subsequent tossing, Such vibratory Processing regimes are quite Frequently encountered in proctice “The stochastic character of change of the dispersed ‘medim Droperties affects to a certain extent the character of vibratory brocessing Vibratory processing of finely dispersed loads Is largely formed under the Influence of the goaeous or liquid phases, ke ‘result of the poor air permeabily, the medium becomes Subject to large aerodynamic loads, The time af free, motion it) of finely dispersed media lz insignificant. even at. ver) Theoretical Principles of Vibratory Technology 27 ult of the Intensive oscillations of the working organ as a ction of the aerodynamic resistances ‘Aerodynamic resistances arise as a result of the phase shite between the pressure fctuations of the ges medium nd the motion of the solid particles. Therefore, seredynamic forces farise which hinder the motion of the solid’ phose. Thus, in the Space between the surface of the working orgen and the lower layer of the processed medium rarefaction Is created pon tossing up and the pressure rises relative to the atmospheric Bressure upon falling” The balancing of these periocke fucillations In the space between the layer tthe Imlcrodispersed medium and surface of the vibration excite ty ‘ttined due to the periodic outflow of the excess and inflow fof the defice amount of sir which paaues through the pores tt the layer of the medium, Therefore, the particles of the finely ispersed "medium are acted upon. by the fluctuating ‘erodynamic pressure (heed), oriented mainly with some shave ‘thift In a dlvection opposite to their dlplacement, The values (Of the aerodynamic’ forces acting on the particles of the medium ‘are cosentially functions, of the bulk weight. and Specific gus permeability, and are also dependent on the regime of vibrations When vibration acts on microheterogencous, highly filed Aispersed media with the sim of their quasiliguefacion of the seation of vibration boiling layer as a result of the presence fof substantial forces of adhesion between the particles, one has to apply significantly more intensive regimes of vibrations than when processing coarsely dispersed media. Thus, for the Ccomersion Of finely dispersed media to = boiling tate, the Mibratory accelerations must exceed the gravity acceleration by Several times, and. energy Influx tust alzo” be significantly Inereased. "When vibratory procersing media with considerable Signincant’ thatthe. realization of the tehnological process becomes Ineffective. In auch cases, a complex. combination of sueface-active substances and vibratory processing, In, se. Surfece-active “substances "‘creste the "conditions for ¢ substantial decrease. of the level of input energy by decreasing Contact interaction between the particles of the solid phase Many technological processes are realized in flow-line Installations with the simultaneous displacement of the processed medium. tn view of this, we are going to consider the main lama of the process of vibration conveyinges “Theory of Vibratory Techoology ‘The humility of the loads with tendency to. sticking has substantial Influence on the proces of nivatry conveyance ‘The dry fiction of hese lade on the surface of the coring Clement in replaced by siacounftlon, Furthermore, the Tmognitude of adhesion withthe carrying. element is) only slighty, if at “ally dependent on the” prescure agenst the Surface (Ghe ‘mepaie ofthe normal eeacton), Aes result the principle af ibratorycomeyance ft soated =the nue of the force moving the lost when the carping lement moves forwards. of backwards e found be the same, hence the ‘retinal tsplocement of the Toad Ie not realsed, Conveyance ‘touchy Tonds is tease” only by prodding. ayn: ‘vallations of the carrying element, which can be attained by Sing, for example, biharmonie ouclistlon. For the elueideon of the psics of the process of wiration comeying of mast lowdt, the stuly of the energy Aependencer le esvental The sesttances, reversible str, nd fiction of the particles during. compression snd Toon SF che load ayer rosie Ia energy consumption when the Camping clesient™ moves in “t nerteal direction” oergy txpendtures also take place inthe provers of colison of the toad with the canting element. ‘They are sueoratd with Irevorible strains, gratesite reductlon, and: Facton Wetween the potcles, and also with hysteresis lores, Inthe carting lement and slate sloments of the nbriory mectine Ghat a Saused by their deformation upon cision. A"certin amount St energy ts Tost Inthe proces of Trew motion, In paralar Shder the actlon of ale resotance, Compression tad rataction ff the ar cushion under the loed ler ico cause camping of Morations of the carrying slement. tiponasplecement inthe Rorzonal rection, energy ts spent on reson oF the loud during is sippege over the Canying element snd telatve_slpage between ayers The Inter eccure since the layer of the load coming Into contact with the convering surface move, as rule, more rap then the particles on the burface ofthe aye "the energy for the acceleration of the transported lad snd overcoming the resistances encountered In the, process of Mibratory conveyance iw imparted by the caryng.slementa: via the toon Torct,of the oud on the” conrying surface Eres tronfer tile cate frm tne carping clement tothe Tend ae place ‘onthe Interv of Jlnt mation In te abvenee cratnve slippage or under teat) slippage ofthe ted Ia the! diction opposite to comeing, Ley when the toad lage Theoretical Principles of Vibratory Technology 129 Leia the motion of the carrying element. Such « method of transfering energy #0 the transported loud is ensocated. with Unproductive energy expenditures whose measure ts the relative speed of the loed. The magnitude of energy imparted to the load in dependent on the ‘duration of the joint. mation. In particular, at identieal regimes of vibrations a load which i hot easily transportable moves for a longer time with the Carrying clement. Ie ix established that with Increasing duration fof the phase of the Joint motion the stability of the process {of vibration ‘conveying Increases Emerg) dissipation in the process of vibratory conveyance ‘ccure on all stages of motion of the load, namely in free motion, during collision, and in the period of joint mation with foment. However, the Intenst) of these processes is different and is characterized by diferent energy dissipation Factors. "The phase shift between dlaplacements of the load and the ‘count all the diferent factors of energy disipation, Tet us now consider the characteristic properties of the other processes xsociated with the vibratory handling, and Aisplacement of « medium, ‘The characteristic property of vibratory processing in large receptacles with simultaneous vibratory. dincharge ia the presence of large master of the medium on'the surface of the Worating element, Pulser created by the working element may tot reach the free surface of the bulk of the load, but rather tmay be damped Inside the core In this care, the monolayers of the. losd. coming Into ‘contact with the vibrating surface perform periodic motion with practically the same amplitude as Excitation Ae the distance from. the vibrating element Increases, the vibration amplitude of the monolayers decrees thd, Finally, becomes equal to zero. The layers ling at the toP fre’ not affected by vibration. Ara result of the constant Pressure from the mans above, itis sometimes not feasible to Fealize regimes involving tossing up. In such conditions of bration propagation, the motion of the medium does not take place over the entire mass but just near Uhe working organ Mixing of the processed medium occurs in vibratory mixers, vibratory mille, during the process of vibratory Dunkering, ete, as a result of the perodic contacts of the tedium with the walls of the container in which Ie is being handled. Vibratory processing with simultaneous mixing of the medium differs substantially from the process) of "ordinary0 Theory of Vibratory Technology vibratory processing. When the layer of the medium comes Into contact with the wall of the working organ, it comes to ret, and the constituent particles acqute high mobility as. result ‘of exposure to vibratory action and begin to rise upwards over the walls of the working orgen under pressure from the Remy delivered mass. Furthermore. the first monolayer forms.» small slope at the wall. As more of the medium is delivered, the lower monolayer forming’ slope remiaa, ax a rule. stctonsty and the newly delivered. portions of the medlum ere displaced ‘over the lower monolayer” Once sufficienty clove to the wall they begin to rise practically vertically, The medium located at some distance from the wall rises at an angle, The Turther from the wall, the larger the deviation of the moving. medium from the vertical. In the inital sager.of the. process, the angle of slope of the free surface af the messi Is usually larger than at the end of the process when the bunker Io full toa greater degree. In adition tothe translational motion the medium performs oscillatory motion with the oscillation frequency of ‘the working organ. In this cave, just 20 Inthe Processes of ordinary vibratory processing, the amplitude of the monolayers decreases ax the distance increases, from: the surface of the vibration exciter When the height of the layer reaches @ maximum at the wall of the working organ (lor a given operating regia), ht Addition to the main fast process = vibratory conveyance. ad Uibratory buakering ~ 2 number ef slowly flowing, processes fceur. The latter include down rolling, tmotion in ‘direction ‘opposite €0 the direction of conveying) of the particles along the upper” inclined surface of the ‘bunkered ‘medium: “Tait Phenomenon is explained by the fact. that ase reoule of {ttenuation vibration, the pressure forces in che upper. layers ‘re small or are altogether absent. Therefore, te particles on the free surface of the massif, whose mutual adhesion is amell ‘owing to the action of vibration, roll down the inclined. RurFace tinder the action of the gravitational force, Since part of the bunkered medium in ite, motion ‘over the free “autface is retarded on the slope, the free. surface is. gradually, moved away from the barrier forming @ horizontal sutface. onthe upper part of the pile. The particles rising. from the lower layers are dotalned On thls surface which leads oan Increase in the helght of the bunkered pile ‘A the eight of the ple increases and its inlined surface Js moved back, the process of arrival of new ‘tches the bunker" is "made more dificult and is finally terminated ‘Theoretical Principles of Vibratory Technology 12 altogether. Thus, upon reaching a specific height in the Dunkered mass, circulatory motion of the particles: commences ‘long elliptical trajectories, In the lower section of the trajectory the particles rise to the surface of the mass, shift back and. join the motion again In the direction of Tn the process of circulatory motion of the medium in the pile, eogregation of the ‘constituent particles by sizes takes place, Smell particles accumulate et the bottom, and the large partcles are” constantly cared away. to ite turface, The fecumulated small particles at the bottom form 4 layer which {impermeable to air. Therefore, In the process of vibrations Fluctuation of the air pressure under the layer taker place, ‘where the peak values can exceed the stmospheric pressure Occasionally, the compressed air breaks Uhrough the layer of the bunkered medium and I secompanied by local elections of the constituent perticles, ‘The accumulation of the. small Tractions at. the bottom of the working. organ” reduces efficiency of vibratory processing, It is interesting to note that In the process of vibratory. processing. the medium is in a laote state, and when vibrations are terminated, compaction of the medium takes place “The Indicated. laws of the behavior of dispersed media under the actlon of sibrations. can be. adequately reproduced With the ald of mulii-mass rheological models. However, in Inany cases simpler methods are required which simultaneously eld qualitatively reliable and. suflcently accurate description oF the’ Investigated processes. When "developing simplified ‘model of the medium, we shall proceed fom the fact that it must reproduce the elastodleslpative and Inertal properties of the medium. The above described experimental Investigations of the action of vibration on dispersed media. show that when handling” large “masses, the propagating. oscillations In he medium. are gradually disipated and" damped. Oscillation tude of ‘the particles of the medium decreases Wi Increasing distance from the vibration aouree and tends to zero ft some distance, farther than which the oscillations do not propagate. Thus, whea processing. large masses, the medium brates with different amplitudes and at « significant distance From the tibration source it might ot be excited at all. The phenomenon of attenuation of oacillations In dispersed media is Ssroclated. mainly with energy” slasipation af the’ wave ropeaiting In the credlum ueder the Influcace of hyeteresis Tossen. However, attenuation can also occur in the media withwe Theory of Vibratory Technology sol tystereis lonee a» cealt of ther tating propre iP crctaton takes place at feauene Tower ot hey thee the sytem: rantnsin range inthe ase eens epee he nem Foe thevietton teat castes Tenay" "wth ncesingpentetty “ne the bal ise ‘Tiered! yee ested ‘pon ih teatenes fee ha lower nit "of stamioen rh rahe ene upon ‘vee ropes int metun "Amped of tase Ses Secale Cponnuay te the Gata mcrae te Seurce of vreons. vader to prove Tors Seperation Peete cor dover aan cea et ce eck ecg ae eerie gre Trpecly etecve procsting of the masts achieved ston fein excited haying Truen iin the Sratemson ranger inthis cues tae fora eh coca sv ccoted nat mast ntl Roques Se neat ee elena a ae ee ie covdaccd "at traal "ogee uct 1 poivtcqweny nbnora wt" ied ich ee ne a Eiecing Sop unformwoking he nea aes pe ater anna tines ia cored oe cate at soe coe cas cere ee ee SSS wth a rate apivade tod Se sat Si aa fen partite sta nthe raion Such poses ae Seti oe an ce ee Tote However, itunes compactona chose at Sher acpe of tiie pace! sppcaton, Peemtct foe Hes Devamcolgi moe wii timfed, unter of ates SiSch nonehies les on to stato cope we Tire 2.8 depicts the rieleget model of « daprse ES alae pee te egreraiedpaid a ich lta forthe Ivetgan of he mechanant St vbraon prctsng "wien the viva soce oe he Sinan ofthe neBant tod ene ast’ te ta Pcie Toe toa ns of the aut equ ee ey Tha ints" the hclapent mot a dace 05 pate fiat gars the fone mane ging ony sondage th ottatone The aeend mane Tegan Yeast aes not peripate in the ovations but tert on the “echatog Barth tate reeee een Ce ha oe ne ‘Thooreteal Principles of Vibratory Technology 133 eure 28 rrenomensiogial mode) of « dered mein 0 f which te aubjected to oscillations Ie characterized by the wscoclastic. properties “yey and. hy cy The surrounding massif exerts on the otclllating mass "viscdus and 4S ee and slantsiytl = ggimye and seal, = admce The equations of motion of the dispersed medium which 1s subjected to sibration Aysinot in the diction of sNia Xd ‘Asin (ot + 7) In the direction of axis y has the form tnt — 2a cont Stet te annem 9) —e (tb Emagen et 9) 9-4 2m ha At prone cnlet +o the esoe ‘Theory of Vibratory Techaology wthere ng and mare the total damping factors due to inter! Tenttantée of fhe massif prtcpting Inthe oacltone end te externa resistance of the nondefrmable mail rent, mya ath = 7 a, onda are the damping coofficlents. due to internal Fitancer'ot ‘the deformable asl (has: fy and, are the damping cosfficients due to external retictances'of nondeformable mace Py and py are natural frequencies of the massif inthe = diy and qy ate the parts of the mass taking part in the SSaliiol! ne Gintctons of sees" and yrgee de and yy are ration between the masses of the medias Ps a In equations (250) and (250, the following eubetiutions are made for the purpose of their Haerization hn (2) oat mE se Uh Han ae tape ‘where (39 and {are dimensionless velocities of the medium ia the directions of axes x and» M8) = cos (or + ey), UII = cos Lot = 7+ ey) eq and ey are phase shift angles between the exciting force created by the vibratory machine and the dloplacements, of the processed medium, inthe direction of axea x andy, Feepectively: Fy and fy are factors defining the ratios of the ty friction forces and’ the exciting force (enti, nat) Theoretical Principles of Vibratory Technology 135 ie and are phase ahife angles Stone By solving equations (2.50) and (250, we determine time tory of strnin in the dispersed medium abet Fine ted rectpeeraneer tes — Where the amplitudes of forced oscillation are Ta 4, LETRA I TTT . Verret and the phase shifts between the dlaplacements of the Processed medium and oscilations of the exciter are re Expressions for ° and ey are similar. ‘hs follows from these expressions, the magnitude of the phase shifts Is dependent on the combined resistances acting In the. processed medium, namely dry friction f, and fy. viscour Friction in the ovcllating layers ny end ny. end vacois friction Inthe surrounding mass ni and’ Tet us analyze contributions” made by each of these “The amplitude and phase shift can be determined from the following formulas: Tn the presence of only viscous resstances of the deformable pare of the masa inthe presence of only viscous resistances in the rnondeformable part of the massié16 Theory of Vibratory Technology osm en ae osm tn he prvene of nly dy sean ven 4, ER 200) io pene eon damping coefficients of the deformable part of the massif simpy, oy" aiihs vg and wy are damping wonfete & «, ut Wg 252 whey) Resistances, exerted by a unit mass of the massif which Participates In the oxellations, to the mation of the vibratory fexciter are +o aes Poke Ga? X sin tuts og 80) e262 where the phase shifts between the dlsplacements of the ‘massif and the reactions on the vibratory exclter are 8, arcte eos) Vibratory processing transcends from a nonseperating Fogle "(quasi-iquefaction state) to separating regime (oibration bolting state) in ehe direction of ania. x when ot * Pe 7 8) = 1/2 Therefore, the conditions of commencing. of the Separating regime will be “Theoretical Principles of Vibratory Technology 137 66. we 260 ‘As is evident from expression (26, the vibration parameters at which the separating regime “commences ate flependent on the properties of the processed massif which are defined by parameters Wy wy Ue th tq, ty. fy fy and on the ratio of the masses pardcipating” ie’ the “Sscliattons and ‘reatng the static head ‘The work done by the vibratory machine per cycle of ‘oscillations on bringing a unit mess of the massif into an ‘sallatory motion te determined by Formulas or i = ~an/ Sele ‘The processed massif does not absorb all the energy spent by the vibratory machine but just part af Wt The other part af the energy Is unproductively dissipated “The energy received by the processed massif during » cycle of oscilations ‘and. spent on’ Imperting motion #0 it ‘etermined by formulae an ont Using selations (2.46), (2.60, we determine the efficiency of energy utilization in imparting oscillations to the massif (rime) cecum we THEME188 ‘Theory of Vibratory Technology 1 Is evident that the efficiency of energy transmission to the massif from the vibration source le determined mainly by 1s properties but It is alzo dependent on the tuning. of the system, Le, on the ratio of the natural nd forced frequencies, 1m particular, for given massif. its_pert. which Is eatin Into vibratory process (gy. qy) t= conaierably dependent on. the range of frequencies within which the vibratory exciter 232 Phenomenology of Vibration Action on Caved Ore During the Process of Vibratory Discharge The conducted investigations show the following character of Interaction of the working organ of the vibratory plant for the discharge of ore with caved rock mass.” Vibrations are Lransmitted from the load ‘carrying element to. the adjacent layer and) farther to the rock mast above. The vibration frequency of the vibrating ‘ore mast ts the same ond the amplitude “decreases with “increasing distance trom the load-carrying element, until it le damped altogether, Thus, the characteristic feature of operation af vibratory plants operating while busied under” tock mace le. thatthe coved ‘mast It subjected to vibration only in a limited tone near the ‘working organ, The dimensions of this zone ate defined by the regime ‘of vibrations and location of the vibratory plant and also By the properties of the caved mase For simulation of the characteristic features of the action of vibration on the caved mast a multile-mess Phenomenological model with non-restraining contacts, between the messes is ueed, The schematic diagram of a vibratory plant buried under a caved rock mass and represented by phenomenological mod is shown In Fig. 288, The exciting force crested by the Inertal self-blancing vibrator has the form Fy = 2 mrot ain soosut e270) 22 mira? sin foosut ew Theoretical Principles of Vibratory Technology 189 Where m is the unbalanced mass: r la the eccentricity of the Unblanced mass; is the vibration angle la the angular velocity of the unbalanced mas, ‘When all four masses" I} simulating the caved ore mass tnd the load-carrying element are in contact with each, other {the motion of the system: load-carrying slement = core mans Ts described by the system of equations!” MP, mun =<") e Ga ahs — mal Ailes) —e 99) Alm) am dam — hi W)— 259) Ma Pyle gate) where Af is the mass of the load-carrying element and vibrator Nya is the normal resction of the moving load on the cerning sletents ON, 40 = yy + CFs my mye my are masses of the first, second’ and third load. layers, c* is the equivalent Fesistance coefficient to” the displacement. “of the Phenomenological model in the direction ‘of axle Y during the Interval of joint motion, which is proportional to the relative velocity: , fs the equlvalont stiffness of the mace layers kis the stiffness of the elastc system of the vibratory convesing ‘machine: ys the coefflcont of dry friction af the load on the [1 when & > 0 lst when § =O ce wen +f The system of equstons (2.72 describes the motion of the tand-erring element. andthe. ore ats from the. telrcaee tmoment to's certan moment of tine which ir charctertcd by foam of contact between thy tno lyers” aut of Your under Consideration. Relative positions of these layers Jepend on the Mibraton parameters of the wibratory plant and preperios ef the caved mans: In the process of motion the layers cam be It the following eight sifernt porons relative to each ether tee Fig. 280) In the Initial stage (postion the tnyers with tnassee mt and the ondecanjing. element ernel, fontect with ‘eachother, In thie case the. motion atthe Iondccerring clement tase sytem is devribed ty cquniont 27. After postion th only postions 3, and. 4can be practically realed. In order to determine which af these tree Pip this case, for simplifieation it ie assumed that. = sign (shin; (0), and the relative motion of the ore layers in theHo Theory of Vibratory Technology positions will take place, one must find the smallest positive Foote of the equations Nal = yy + e520 (root 2) em Nigl® = hy Oy = 99) © eG = 5) = 0 te00t 3) es) Nfal0) = ky Og 9 + et Uy a) #0 (raat 4) 70 there N10) and Ny (0 are inital reactions of the first layer fon the Second and the second on the third) and sclect the smallest among them. The sign under the root indlates. the umber of the next’ position. Depending. on. whlch position comes efter the frst, the motions: of the layers. with masses my. my. my and the load-carrying element at the corresponding positions wil be desceibed by the Following equations Position 2 (masses 1, 2 and J are In contact, marece 2 and 4 do not come Into contact) am maf hil) —) Mam Fe Position 3 (masses 1, 4, and 2, J are in contact, masses 1 land 7do not come into contact) My Fb M0) f= — mg — hen fem — nad eI) he ¥)— MH) nfo a’ (a4 19) 0) Mam Fem + sige eNO em Position 4 (masses 4, J, and 2 are in contact, masses 4 and 3 do not come into contact) My= Fy Nt) minal hn thn eB) abe — iB eB) een) abe) am fem — led i) Mem By ht signe WTO) Theoretical Principles of Vibratory Technology 141 here cis the equivalent resistance coefficient to the placement of the Toad in the direction of the janis In the Interval ‘of free motion, which is proportional to. the rel Position 5 ‘root §) can practically develop only. from positions 2 of 3 If position develope following. position. 2 ‘hen Ie happens when’ Niel =0 here Jip 2 J Jp are obtained From the solution of system am, Tf position § develops from position 3. then it happens when for system (278) Mylo ‘The equations of motion to the aystem “carrying ty /Uk'gs cone + Ky snal/ (2108) ‘The equations of slippage of the rock mass along the jaw sustace at the stages of both viscoelastic and plastic straing (eitte Fracture! are Fi 6 ego gn smi! = 6S = Kya! = sgn (UU os a bp sin coe ao yt 2.100 Gril + ey + Ky > Sig = signi eA 06 a+ jy sin ad xan es Fy a0 Equations (2.106) and (2107) are nonlinear since they Include a dry fretlon fores, Depending on the sign of velocity ff the rock mass relative to the Jow the feietion Toree changes ite divection, The lz taken Into account by the dependences fr t when & > 0 | 1 when ¥ <0 + then £0, sentir = { Theoretical Principles of Vibratory Technology 18 “The diy friction force also varies depending on the value fof the rock mass reaction on the crushing juw- Therefore, the ‘alues of resctions Fy and Fy of the rock mass In the direction Of anes and ) in the. presented equations must be used in Grcordance mith the character of the trains taking. place at the moment of lip, namely viscoelastic or plastic. strains (brittle fracture) The crushed rock mass will be i contact with the jaw nti its reaction on the jaw Becomes equal to 260; Bet y=0 2108 I thie condition Is satisfied, the crushed rock mass loses contact with the jaw and begios to fall. im conditions of ‘constrained motion In the crushing. chamber. Tet ue consider the laws of motion of the rock mass in the direction of the yvanle (from the feed receptacle tothe {lscharge opening). In thir case, Interaction of the rock mass in the crushing chamber with the mess in the feed hopper is ff conshlerable significance. Since we are mainly interested in he phenomenology of the” crushing process and. the Aisplacemente, of the ‘rock mass must be known only to fstabish the moments of stare of the rock deformation. the ‘Hfect of the rack mass In the feed hopper is accounted for by the force of the pressure acting on the rock in the crushing chamber F, "Thus,’the differential equation of the constrained motion of rock mast in the working. chamber of the crusher In the Girection of the y-axis without contact with the crushing’ jaws mayb ley 0 cao ee mes oye BS 2109) “The free fall of the plece In the crushing. chamber comes to an end at the moment of coincidence of the coordinates of the rock mass andthe jaw which takes place when the following condition is satisfied wee ote eno) “The second term on the right-hand side of the presented ‘expression takes into account descending” of the rock mass in the working chamber end angle of inclination of the crushing150 “Theory of Vibritory Technology uring the crushing process forces from the rock mass being re to he je Mey ew Meek oun Ny = sien GOW co8 a+ Ky sin od cos a eu Ny Bien le tie cot a+ yy sin od in ene Equal in magnitude but opposed in sign, forces act on the rock mass during the process of slippage. ‘Tho described wacoslastoplartle stains (britle Fracture) rock by the jaw of the vibratory crusher” As aleeedy mentioned hove. in cach low troke the rock receives » specific amount ‘of energy which Ir spent on viscoelastic and plastic strains, the oration of new surfaces (development. of cracks and fracture! overcoming the internal and external Trcton, and #0 fom Usually, the energy imparted to the crushed rock per a Hw troke due’ to. limited amplitude of the jaw oscillations Insufficient for a” total” fracture. Rock chunks “undergo. an Incresse of the number and evpension of the existing cracks herp protuberances are chipped, end. residual stfalns are overated, Only after the rock receives the energy which It Feauired for the formation of new free surfacee corresponding torthe necessery degree of grain-size reduction does I ‘rushing to the specified grain sine commence Wien investigating the procese of crushing in a vibratory crusher according to the phenomenological dependences oveloped above, the ‘completion of the crushing process. ix Sefined either by the moment the stresses in the Fock reach the ultinate. strength or by the magnitude of the specific ‘nergy linparted t0.the rock during the process of irreveraible raining. The first criterion te aged. when investigating the rushing process of a single rock chunk. In thls case, the force Siterion a. more. applicable, since the obtained Phenomenological "dependences enable “determinetion of the rowth of the internal stresses inthe chunks during Unelopment of the crushing. process. Therefore, when ‘computations are carried out with the ald of analog oF digital ‘Theoretical Principles of Vibratory Technology 159 computers, comparison is conducted between the internal Stresses in the model of rock mass chunk snd the ultimate strength of the Investigated rock Matching of theae values indenter conclusion of the crushing proce ‘When investigating the crushing of rock mass the energy criterion is adopted. In crushing large volumes of rock mast Fling the chamber, different chunks are at diferent stages of fractire. Therefore, the criterion of attainment of a speifed stress lovel Is found to be unacceptable. ‘The energy criterion Is more accurate, since it Is easly appilcable and simple to determine’ from the experimental data, When conducting computations using the energy criterion, the program provides for comparison of the veluce of the ireveritle. expenditures pon crushing of the rock mass with the reference, velucs Matching of these Indexes Indicates the conclusion of the ‘rushing process of the studied volume of the rack mass ‘The energy criterion of the crushing process war adopted ‘on the basis of the Improved Kipichet-Kick energy. oluine hypothesis which’ iver the best. correlation with. the ‘experimental data, Also used were studies of the” crushing proceso In jaw crushers which were conducted by V. A, Bauman fand then by other Investigators. According to” these studies the crushing work is proportional so the. magnitude ofthe laste strain in the “crushed rock and “depends on te Properties, volume, and the degres of grain-sie reduction. Ia the method developed the crushing process is. considered at dependent on the ireversible viscopletic strains and’ britle fracture. Such an approach enables more fully reflecting the physical laws of the crushing process; however, its application {s. possible only on. the basis of the phenomenological Viscoelastoplastc Inertial models of the crushed rock mass Which are developed In the present method and also enable Simulating the brittle Fracture oF the rock during the crushing process 2.44 Rbeologlel Bquatlons for Rock Mase Deformetion tn (Crushers with Inertal-eccentric Drive In the process of crushing in the Inertal-eccentric crusher, the rock is subjected to a complex Force action of the crushing jaw comprising two components. one of low frequency and large amplitde, and another of ‘hgh frequency and small mplitude, In this caso, the crushing takes place mainly underwo Theory of Vibratory Technology the action of the low-frequency forces, and the high-frequency component of the pressure change between the jaw and the rock mainly causes. decrease In the friction on the ‘contact Surface, The presence of the high-frequency componente of the Crushing force also leeds to opening of cracks end weakening ‘of the Internal bonds in the rock muse Tat us consider the vibration crushing. pracess of the rock under bibarmanie.‘oncllations of the nw. To. study. this process, the phenomenological model of the crushed rock Geveloped in section 2.42 ls supplemented by introducing the compaction ‘core and. consideing Itz wedging. action on the rushed chunk Gf rock. The improved model of the fock-erusher’ jaw system Is shown in Fig. 296. The Phenomenological model of the system is comprised of the Crashing jw of mass M and the rock which te represented ‘by Stwrorcomponent inertial vocoelsstie system characterizedin the direction of the sais (jaw stroke) by the reduced ase dm aulfocss hy. and wacosity cq, inthe dvsction of the yrlnte by mate" my. affness ky" and visconty cy Inthe presence of compaction wedge, interaction of deforisations. in fhe direction of axes)" and. x taker. place, The interaction coefficient of deformations along these axes is denoted by the letter @ The mechaniam of this interaction can be pictured as follows: when the rock Is compressed by the crushing. jaw (rock strain n the direction of the axis), a compaction core 1s formed, which under the actlon of the Jaw Implanted deep Into the rock chunk and tending to cleave I. The implantation of the core and. frecture of the chunk are hindered by” the Internal bonds in the rock and by the force of rock Friction on the jaw surface. The presence of the latter force calls for the hed’ to Increase the crushing forces, thie causing. Increasing Unproductive energy ‘expenditures associated with the crushing process, and Increasing jaw. wear. In further Investigation the Possibility of reducing the Forces of friction of the rock on the Erushing Jaw ‘by appijing high-frequency vibrations willbe ‘considered, which "faclitates the ‘crushing. process. tis Sszumed thatthe dlaplacement, velocity, and acceleration of the crushing jaw are generlly ‘described. by the laws. of Mibration x1 $1 2" By aauming specific time stories Gescribing jaw motion, "we determine’ the most effective “The force of resistance to the penetration of the ‘Theoretical Principles of Vibratory Technology 1st forces of the rock in the directions of exes x and Jat the place of core penetration and to the frictional forces along on Kis surface. Moreover, the principal forces are associated. with the wedging of the piece and moving ite halves In the direction of the yraxis. Taking into account the Interaction of ‘etormations along axex x and y by coefficient & the forces of ore, penctration into. the rock can be weitten as Fy = Ky ee Te total deforming force of the rock in the direction of the svaxis (force of resietance. to. Jaw motion) is comprised from the force of resistance to penetration of the compaction ore and the strain force of the rock In the direction of the Sale. The latter force, taking. Into consideration that jaw tmase M ir several mes larger than the oscillating mass of Fock chunk being crushed (comprising only a part of Ite total fnass), ls expreased in terms of ite inertial properties in the flection of the axle. Taking this Into account, the Force of feolstance. tothe strain of the rock In the direction of the ‘Tanlo can be expressed in tarma of dieplacement and velocity Grew motion, Fy. = hx’ * ek Since the parameters of law motion ‘are Known, it isnot dificult to determine the Interaction force between Uhe Jaw and the rock yt ky Be oe ay ge ‘To determine strain of the rock in a direction y parallel 2o the plane of the Jsw, differential equations are written. The Ersine of the rock along the Jvasie are described by. three ‘Equations for the casce of absence and presence of alippege Song the jaw. "rhe Force crested by the compaction core F's ky (E'= 9) which is tending to cleave the rock chunk, Io opposed by the Fiction farce of the rock on the jaw surface pr Ukge’ + Cx) thd by forces of internal bonds Fy = Uhyy" + 63" ‘Accordingly, the generalized equation “of rock strain considering the compaction core can be written ax follows yg #6 + Uy’ + hy) y= hy Ee = sign Ung + 6g es) ot when 9 > 0 where sign G) = [0 when F = 0 when 7 <0we Theory of Vibratory Technology Equation (2115) ig a nonlinear equition which is. broken down into three Independent equations for the cases = 0 tne Sliphy-> 0 talip during crack development), and. < 0 (slip uring crack compression). The third equation (for cate yO) Inthe case under consideration, with the positive Jaw velocity (> 0) te not practically realized, Therefore, two regimes are Considered: elastic strain and lip. The condition of transition of the process. from the elastic strain ie. the quality of Shearing elastic forces to frictional forces “and forces of Internal resetances KEE = 12 Uhyy + Gad # kya © 6p enw (ven the oxcillation time history of the jaw of the lnvestigated inersal-eecentre crusher as x" © Alsinwt + Va intod the equation of rock strsin can be written, after transformations, in dimensionless. variables in form mare convenient to solve and Here £ is the proportionality coafficient between viscous resistances and rock stiffness (c = gil zy and are detuning factors of the crusher; i is the frequency ratio of the eccentric and unbalanced mass of the crusher, a ls the ratio of the Smplitudes of low-Trequency and high-frequency oscllations, Invthe amplitude of low-frequency oxcllations of the wi X, St, and A" are the dimensionless deformation velocity, and Acceleration of the rock deformation, x" = A/A, X= 874A) FP E/taltat, x and ¥ are the dimensionless daplacement tnd velocity of jaw wissin we +b ain due, cos wt + 1 cos ioe [Az a result of solving equation (2:17) on a computer, ecermined ‘were the dimensionless strain x" velocit) and By. Ryo Fy crested In the process of rock crushing. 7° ‘The evaluation of the efficiency of the crushing process is carried “out on the bals of mean. energy expenditures on Crushing which are determined from the expression } ‘Thooretial Principles of Vibratory Technology 163 or 1 wed fT nse eon) and energy expenditures on overcoming the forces of friction fon the Jaw 1 pr Won oe fT t+ yi 5 dee eu) Wwith the superposition of high-frequency oscillations or Without it. Here, Tis the interval Uin time) of the realization OF the crushing process 25 CASTING AND WORKING OF METALS IN VIBRATORY [ENVIRONMENT 251 Formulation of the Problem. The Basic Laws of (Crystallization of Metals under Vibrations Casting-rolling aggregates create real prospects for the transition to in-line production in metallurgy and for the sharp Increase in productivity and. quality of castings and. rolled products. The msin elements of casting-rollig assemblies are Continuous-casting machines (CCM). Continuous casting Shortens the metallurgical production cycle and sharply Inereases the rolling quality. The most versatile currently ere tail chines which bare’ nimaber of sdrantages, tecloding ‘aller dimensions and cost, an well as product high-qually ‘The technology of continuous casting is widely applied in the developed industrial countries. VNllmetmarh has developed v4 successfully applied. various CCM. modifications In = umber of metallurgical plants. Te must be noted that. despite the very high production efficiency of the existing CCM there fre needs for their further development. In particular, i would be important to Increase the rate of casting, improve structure fd surface. of the ingot for ® number of fficult-to-rell Steels and others. Work ls being carried out for application of Wbratory technology with the aim of increasing the efficiency DP operation of the individual its, of casting. rolling Sssemblles and increasing the product quality. The accumulated fxperience shows that the combination of the techniques ofwes Theory of Vibratory Technology continuous casting with vibratory technology can be ery fruleful. tn particular, imparting” high-frequency mecha ‘oscillations. to the mold of » radial CCM atthe Rustayy Imetallurgical works enabled ineressing the casting. speed and Improving. the quality of the ingot. In the meantime, the ‘obtained results” show that” the continuous casting-alling technology in metallurgy can be significantly improved with the proper Use of the methods of vibration engineering Careful anaiyais of the available. albeit uncoordinated, experiences of application ofthe methods of vibration ‘engineering, In continuous-casting. technology enables one. &0 Systematically survey the achievements in this area (101 ‘The following. main aspects of application of vibratory technology’ In casting rolling assemblies “can be noted, When the casting passer through the crystallier, fairy. significant Feslstences to motion are encountered which are caused by the Friction between ite surface and the mold walle. Consequently, in the relatively thin crystallized section af the ingot, Significant stresses are created by the tractive system which Frequently cause rupture of the crust of the casting. and” spill fout of the liquid. metal contained inside it. The. significant Feslstances. to. motion impose = limitation on the rate of fasting which limits the output and makes matching of the fasting machine” with the” rolling mill more. difficult Consequently. fficultios arise In the realization of advanced Incline operations in metallurgical production. Thus, one of the probleme that needs vo be solved te the increase of casting Speed which tx Inked ‘with the decrease of the resiatancer to ingot motion through the crystallizer (mold) and. the acting sreases In ft “The Second problom which can be simultaneously solved by the developed vibratory mold is the acceleration of hest= and. mass-transfer processes and equalization of vemperature isubation inthe ingot. The consequence of thi must be intensification of the process and more uniform coaling of the Ingot in the mold, improvement of the structure of the metal both with respect to decreasing the grain size and in ensuring ‘more uniform dstribution of inclusions “The process of crystallization begins with the formation ta the liquid’ phase of solid-phase. Inclusions, which are called ntallization centers, their subsequent. development, and Increase tn volume. ‘The process of formation of a new phase Im this case Is linked with the expenditure of energy of the Creation of Interphase Boundaries, The kinetics of conversion Theoretical Principles of Vibratory Technology 6S from the liquid to solid phase is determined by two main factors: the number of crystallization centers developing per nit time per unit volume, and the speed of costal growth With the increasing vate of initiation of crystallization centers land decreasing rate of their growth, the grain tzes decresse, CCrjatllization centers are formed sither in the volume. of the lig’ phase or on foreign slid. particles. present ln: the ligui. "The most effective catalytic action is displayed by the id particles in the melt, which heve physical, stractaral, and ‘imensional affinity ‘with “the crystallizing subotance. The reduction ‘of the work required for the embryo formation is Feciieted by a decresse In surface tension at the erystalliuld ‘boundary and by a reduction of the edge wetting angle, I the Final analysis, the indicated factors cause an increase it) the speed of initiation of eryatallizetion and the formation of Amall-graln structure of the casting nthe absence of vibratory action inthe crystallizing ‘metal contained in the mold, exyatalllation centers are formed hear the walls as a result of overcooling. In the frst stage Crystal growth “occurs mainly st the surface in different ‘rections, with time the exstals growing from varous. centers come close to each ther. Furthermore, a. region ef fine fgulaniel erystels are formed near the wall of the cating. ‘Then the crystals begin to. grow deep Into. che melt and longated column-shaped crystals are formed. The crystals are friented in the direction of heat transfer and. develop. in the ‘opposite direction to the hest flux, With time the developing cpstale come into contact. with each other, Thue, the Column-shaped structure of the ingot le erected. Usually, 1 te composed of an external layer of fine equlesal crystal, Feglons of columa-shaped crystals, anda central zone of ‘aulandl crystals Tn castings with the column-shaped structure, che central part of the Ingot is usually enriched by contaminants which ‘Cause dsteroration of ite mechanical properties. The region of ‘columa-shaped cryetale la aleo characterized by low strength From the viewpoint of raising the mechanical properties of the metal the qulaxial structure ix desirable with, the graine having. equal dimensions In afferent directions and. random ‘The role of vibratory (atthe present time main ultrasound) excitation on the, canting ust. be, in the feahancement of the factors which lead to obtalning Fine-gein, fandomly. oriented metal” structure. Generalization af the166 Theory of Vibratory Technology vallable experience of treating melts by oscillations in the Ultrasound range (II) enabled one to ledtfy the. following Changes of the ingot structure: decrease of the average grain Size; replacement of the columm-shaped structare with equal brains; Increase "of ingot homogenelty; more uniform distribution of nonmetallic icleslone ‘According to. exiting krowledge, the obtained Improvement of the ingot structure Is attened asa result of the following phenomena being Introduced Into the melt: Cavitation, fluctuations of viscous friction forces; Increase of Frequency of initiation of crystallization centers, and dispersion of the formed crystals. The effectiveness of the process of Ultrasound treatment is largely affected by the conditions. of tyetallization and by the nature of the etal, Te has been fstablished that the effectiveness of the vibratory trestment Increases in conjunction with other treatments, for example, by the introduction of inclusions into the melt which serve. a centera of crytallization. ‘Under’ the joimt action. of these Factors the specified. level of grain-size reduction of the structure is ceached at lower intensities of the exciter. ‘The. accumulated experience and conducted investigations fon the exystalization of tretala under vibrations (mainly In the ange of ultrasound frequencies) donot adequately reveal the physical laws of the processes involved. ‘This maker fe afficult fo develop a phenomenology of the crystallization process of metals in conditions of vibratory actions. tis. cavently feasible to develop a preliminary phenomenological approsch end rheological modele of the melt Inelte and the laws of motion of the latter for. specified parameters of the extemal vibration actions 252 Continuous Casting of Metale with Vibrating CCrytalizer 1k is pertinent to note that current CCM, despite their general technological effectiveness, suffer from. a number of (epeed of passage of the workpiece through the mold The tltimate pulling speed increase ta limited by the strength of the skin ‘which in formed during. passage through the mold. ‘The quicker the ingot passes through a mold. of specified length, the thinner the skin as a result of inadequate heat ‘Theoretical Principles of Vibratory Technology 167 transfer. Increasing the mold length does sot quite solve the problem, since the resistances to the displacement of the ingot find, consequently, stresses In the ingot are Increasing In this ‘ase inthe outlet region from the mold. Under large pulling Forces skin rupture Is possible with the resulting spill out of the liquid meta. ‘Work is under way on Impartng vibration co the mold of 4 COM with the im of reducing the pulling Forces and ‘limination of sticking and skin rupture, The cast metal Inside the mold is a. phsicochemical” structure “having complex Theological properties ~ part of the metal isin liquid state and pare in various crystallization phases. In order to reproduce the Findemental properties of the metal in the mold in ite ‘complex two-phave S~ L state, a viscoclastoplastic Inertial tmodel has beon developed. The parameters of the model are determined by means of klentification of the characteristics of ‘motion and deformations of the model with the actual =)stem Figure 2ita shows = section of the model in the plane 3, the fection in plane 2 is analogous (pot shown in the figure) All Possible motions and deformations “of the model in the ibrating ‘mold. are described by a. acolincer system of Aiferential equations ‘Axis y colnlder with the direction of ingot motion, and ‘axes x aid are perpendicular. Henceforth, we shall” Knit ‘urselves to considering the model parameter along axis. x Since the parameters slong axis z are essential) analogous, “The clastic properties of the model in the direction of ‘canis are simulated by elements with stffoess coefficients ky Gnd, viscous elements ~ by dampers with coefficients oF iscoslly ey, plastic elements by s wedge pair of dey friction With coufitient py: mass of the skin is slmulated by inertial Slements my. ThE walla of the mold are under Ferrostatc Pressure Fy Irom the contained mete. “The model In the direction of axis y in characterized by the elastic properties ky and y> viscous properties ey and <> the ingot mss taking pert in the osilations in the’ direction fof axle ys denoted The gravitational force of the metal In the mold. mg acte “downwards along axiz The pulling peed of the ingot Ia In the general care, the following. strains and motions of the ingot are fetible: viscoelastic and plastic strains, and also free'motion In the direction of axis x; viscoelastic and plastic traine, and also free motion or motion with dry friction In the Giection of axle 9Theory of Vibratory Technology q i Theoretical Principles of Vibratory Technology 1 ‘The viscoelastic strains of the ingot in the direction of nis ware described by the system of differential equations s+ cgi Ug k= = m+ Fp exo ngs Fe em angie og hg hg where and X* are the wbetory scelertons of the mold Walle; Fy isthe ferrostatic presure on the mold wall Vistoclestic rane of the ingot continue unt the eld point Ia exceeded Upon compliance withthe conditions [hg 6 Bo eg 6 Ro] a A conn ee Ore So eg re Os By enn lscoslaste strane are transformed into plastic straine whi ‘escribed by the equations = mo een = ag S6 A eons the force corresponding £0 the onset of the load is removed, the plate deformations (trains) can be traneformed into tscoelastic strains ‘When the following conditions are stifled Reeeo e.0 de wreo ew plastic strains are transformed Into viscoelastic strains, which fre described by the equations "presented abore at Corresponding intial conditions, In the general cas, when the Toad is removed (tensile strains), the conticients characterizing the viscoelastic propert Cdferent values from thooe Under compression strains, Ay Ky’, and cy. The skin may periodically” lowe ‘with the" walle of the mold under Conditions of high-intensity oscillations170 ‘Theory of Vibratory Technology ‘The conditions of loss of contact of the skin with the mold wall ara writen as follows wre ex ‘The motion of the skin during the Interval of contact loss with the mold walls ie described by equations Ing oh 8 yas = any + Fp eno agi r6 egh6 gta = ty ‘The conditions of contact reestablishment have the form wr0 con ‘The motion of the ingot in the direction of axis y 1s described ty the nonlinear differential equations Het pt hye wey Fe Gye ky rt = sing) Fig © est ewe where Pls the vibratory acceleration of the mold inthe pulling direction taxis 3 Shen J > 0 Swen ¥ <0 oo sign G) Mageitude of the fretion force Fig featured in the bove Presented equation can be assumed elther independent from the peed of ingot Fig oN 218 for dependent on the speed of Fig # Oien 9 = ag + ayS10N jenn ‘Theoretical Principles of Vibratory Technology 17h where 4, and 4, are postive constants, The ingot presstre on the mold walls ie determined from Neuer + kx ene As a result of solving the system of equations 2180-214, (2.148)-(2.149), 2150180 and 2150, one can determine deformations of the ingot and displacements of ite ‘Sin. x7 ¥, and their velocities ad accelerations Ws 5. 2B: Fat all the characteratc stages of the process ‘The tractive force Fy, required for pulling the ingot through the mold ie determined from exprestion Ry t kit Weel 29) Energy expenditures are fm ingot broaching: otal Wy a eno seta Wyun = S Red ae aun fon vibratory treatment of the ingot ‘ota, Wee Sw Os vane frees Rae ea) useful absorbed by eh ingot) Wag, [ Wiede « f Nide eu Festures of vibratory treatment of the ingot under various time stories of mold) oscillations both in. the direction of perpendicular to ingot motion are considered Tn the merjority of cases, direct solution is preceded by a reduction of the given sjetem of equations into form which convenient for modeling onan anelog computer. Furthermore, this Torm takes into account the method of ‘olution, selected from known methods or specially developed, ‘the imposed limitations and additional conditions; the charsctervm “Theory of Vibratory Technology of external excitations: and also the methods of read-out and recording to information, whichis obtoined os result of the “The equations which need to be realized on the analog computer, Le, the so-called machine equations, are compiled Gnd” scaled with respect tothe specific typeof analog Computer Furthermore, the techslal characteristics of the folve the equations given only In an explicit or implicit form, the methods of approximation of nonlinear dependences, th capability” of solving. equations” with. constant and. arlable coefficients, logical capabilities of the analog computer, and 20 fon The formulated problem was rolved on an ac analog Computer A-10 ‘Since the equations from which the coordinates X" and X" are sought have similar structure, all discussions henceforward till be based on one of them ‘The equations of ingot motion through the mold corresponding tothe forms of ‘trains indicated above” are ng De om Fe ewe Here Ss, 9) Is nonlinear function characerizing. the Force under" viscoelastic "or plast{e strains. vs, displacement and elocity of the ingot, and. X le. scceleration of the external harmonic excitation (X +4 sin 0, From the standpoiat of the pectic features of modeling, only the realization of function Fron the computer i of interest Let us cofsider ehree possible cases of representing function(s, a. which can characterize the process of training the ingot in diferent degrecs of approxiation Fiesty, we assume the basic piece-wise linear cheracter of E(x, a) as shown In Fig. 212m, Sections 1 ll 1V, VI generally ‘correspond tothe viscoelastic streins, and il and V to. the plastic strains; moreover, the value of during. their entire Shration remaine unchanged If in the range of variation of correeponding to laste straing the recilinnr ‘sections are. replaced by. curvilinear Sections, we arrive at the case of representation of the Functions 3-depleted in Fig. 2125. And, Cell. if magnitude of the force Sion the sections of plastic strains is rising. by linear lr, we artive at a thid case whose. qualitative. pattern is depicted in Fig. 22e by the oli line Theoretical Principles of Vibratory Technology 173 [As the figures show, the inclination angles of the characteristics in the negative region of the values of strain Forces aiffer from the angles of inclination Inthe positive region. Thereby, the different characteristics are accounted for Ander tensile and compressions strains of the workpiece, ‘Since the load-deflection characteristics of the types presented above are often encountered inthe practice of Computer-aided modeling when investigating physically diverse Processes, we shall dwell on ther realization In more deta “The expression for function (x, x) for the frst case is Sete ay bs ad ous) where x are current values of coordinate x on the interval Corresponding to the start and end of plastic strain; ‘a lot actor ecquring values O or I depending om whether the system I operating wider tension (a= 0) or compression (a= 1), tnd fare the stiffness coefficients determining. the inclination Sngle of the ‘charecteristic J telative to. the sbeciesa on Intervals of viscocletic straina. Switching over from one value of to. another is effected by an instruction from the comparator with applied to one Input and zero ~ to the ‘Quantity ax Is operated upon by the Integration block with as an Input. The block operates in the following regimes. on Segment [of characteristic J tece Fg. 212) location of zero Inia values, on segment Il integration, on segments ill and IV location of the attained values on segment Il, on segment V ‘agen Integration and, finally. om VI-~ location of the values ‘Stsined on segment’ V. It has to be noted. thatthe. lest tegiment of the characteristic does net terminate atthe origin ‘Of the coordinates O as shown in the figure, but at some oth point on the abeciass ar a result of the occurred strana The Closure of the loop. st the origin’ Is done to shorten flscussions of the descriptive cheracter without violating the ‘gencrality of the picture Tet us dwell briefly on the operation of the scheme which provides automatic solution of the equations with, minimum Interference by the operator of the analog computer. Such = regime of computer operation Iz obtained by supplying. the teceseary logical conditions and thelr” ealcation cncury When f+ O'all integrators, with the enception of the one ‘operating on x, are changed over on Instruction from them Theory of Vibratory Technology Mure 212 Loading diagrams of vieconlatoplaatic strain of a rezime of assigning intial conditions to the integration regime The external harmonic excitation causes change of and §. and value. of SIs simultaneously “computed. On the first Segment continuously vises (S = Xk) since ax = 0 and a= 0 when 3 * 0, Just as "reaches the value Fy the dx integrator is witching over Into the integration reginfe of x. Due to the fact that x © Jade and dx'= /¥de, the difference (x ~ 03) = const lincrement in i= equal to the increment in 4s) and 5 Will retain constant value equal to Fy wail the sigh of speed SV ehanges from plus to minus “The moment the sign of = chenges, the comparator (Y and 0) receives an instruction to index the value of dss with thi begina to decrease and, therefore, = I~ dslk will decrease wrth the same angle of inclination of the characteristic aso” the first segment. At the moment when = dx becomes equal to ane (and 20), cosffcient aon instruction fromthe comparator (Sand 0) changes ite value from 0 to 1, the angle of inclination ofthe eharacterrstle would. Increase, and the fquation of the viscoelastic straing acquires the form Seta = digg h(R + ete When J in the process of decreasing ceaches the level Fy the iniegrator operating on dx. on instruction from th cofiparator (Sp = Fp). changes over to the integrating regime During this prOcess.°by vireue of the reasons considered above Swill retain a constant value equal to Fy until the sign of Theoretical Principles of Vibratory Technology 175, velocity changes (from minus to plusl. from this moment on the value of the integrator dN. is again. Indexed snd computed from (2.16), will decrease in magnitude. Following the passage of the characteristic through ero, the angle of Inclination of the next segment “would decrease (w becomes equal to zero). Further on, operation of the scheme will be (halogous to that described above, Realization of ‘the second case (Fig. 2126 on on analog computer isnot fundamentally different, although the texpression for the function will have snother form Se tx = sik 6 ahd + aun By introducing into the equation another term eX, curvilineaity of the viscoslatic and plastic segmente la achieved In modeling of the third ‘case of variation of the strain forces ‘3. ally the logical constructions and. algerthme ‘considered for the first case are valid, However, the equation for function 3 becomes more complex. Let us. derive. this squation using the notations adopted earler” For the sake of Clarity and elucidation of the dlecussion we shall make vse of We assume as a basis that on sogient OA (S'< Fl Ee ten ay ke ak) =e ens ay = 0, since integrator dv is on segment OA in the regime of tssignment of zero intial conditions, @ = O since SO), Had the computation of 5, after it becomes greater than Fp: taken place using. (2148), the value of would have equstied BL after am interval of change of x equal £0 dx. But, on. the Segment of plastic strain AD = dy, the Inclination angie of the ys which reflects the inertial properties, are Inodeled’ in the process. of vibration compaction by elastic Dodies with stffneas coelficients Ky. Ky Kye kp. ENTRY lasipation (hysteresis losses) in the “deformation process Is ‘Theoretical Principles of Vibratory Technology 1 reproduced by viscous bodies with viscosity coefficients cy), Gq plastic straing are modeled "by wedge elements “with cbefficients kyy- Kyy- pat interaction of raina and stressee In ‘mutually perpendiGuler” directions can be accounted for” by Coefficient Ip Is lag Let us Consider the process of free vibroimpact upsetting as the most general case, due to occurrence of perlodie losses2 Theory of Vibratory Technology of contact between the worked element and the punch. In this face the Following forms of stains and motions of the worked Sloment are possible: viscoelastic train, plastic strsin and also free viscoelastic unloading (when the punch lowses contact with the element) and slippage over the surfaces In contact. Without “specitying. the character of motion, we assume that the punch tavela according to some prescribed time History and projections of it motion on the coordinate axes are J 8, 21 For example, in the direction of axis the punch can” perform a translational motion with the superposed ‘calletions and in the direction of axes x, 2 ~ vibrations, The Miscoslastic and plastic strains of the worked clement are ‘eseribed in this case by the equations eaaft ea [i wer Fy Fy Hy are the rections of the worked medion in Tedeelon offre ap. Tervaccordage wih tke ctaracer of sri and topacnent of the wortplece the cules ae vesles SESE" ctavaee nara "se faltering, wet fr ices enn oy (hes Ey by he or ane Sete Ody Oe Byes hn ptt oe ‘tc momenls of wanton from seconlanc sina to planers hog in the Gvctions OF ropectve ota {Ncmiced om rele 6 Lite! 3° ep!) * hy LY rei) #2 veg!) = Fab ee yep Ket Weg! Fob exe G2 Myep) * hed yep! = Fob where Fup are forces at the betinning of plastic deformation of the specimen “Theoretical Principles of Vibratory Technology 193 ‘The moments of transition from plastle strains to viscoelastic strains are Found from equations 2 lggig = 0 en 2 Gap 2 0 Tae moment of the punch separation from the worked part & and the moment when It comes back into contact with the pare & are determined from the relations yey #0 eve) lip) 20 ‘The forces. of specimen strain under viscoelastic and plastic deformetions are, respectively, ax Fe = Fo t hyy? Figure 2.14b and c show the schematic diagrams of the processes of vibratory rolling and vibratory drawing, as well wovcomponent and three-component viscoclastoplastic ‘phenomenological models of a rolled strip and's drawn rod. In this case, more complex phenomenological models of the ‘worked parts are used which enable adequately reproduc Properties of the worked metal. ‘The methodical sppronch to the investigation of the process of vibratory rolling and vibratory drawing Is similar £0 the approsch discussed above 255 Vibratory Hardening Figure 218d shows the schematic diagram and the mechanorbeological model of the process of ibratory Iardening, In this process, the worked clements are placed In & ibreting: container filled with hard-alloy Balls. Ax a result of Container vibration, the worked slemente are subjected. to Figh-frequency impacts of the hatdvalloy balls which causesrn ‘Theory of Vibeatry Technology en oe cea cool ne The weed plce a rpeented by « multptermats to amy my aoasatentute pononvlel ose? Sa ace ik dees ewe agnceet aay etsy aa cnet he AS clined eda? Tate ob Se tna vacoeBaeotem wheat tee che ead Sh Winton he pe abe Seated Fl The melon of the weed ‘edu I ese by the cous eee a ae the particles“of the medium in the bulky w Ie the dacontinaty factor (z= 1 when moving in contact with the piece t= 0 when’ moving separately from the plecel, Sand are the Gisplacemente of the container The motions and strains of the worked piece in the direction of axis = ere described by the equations wr s|Sfere oe] fereransy [sheen : e280 where ds; are the residual plastic strain in the piece. In the direction of axle» the formulas are analogous, In accordance with the farm of the displacements and with ‘the character of the strains, the cooficente atthe Yariables and. their derivatives have” the following values: Tor Miscoelastic strains ky cy Kye cy for plastic straing fy, O: ‘when moring tx coniilt Sith the working medhfe’ ks ABE when moving separately from 10, 0. “Analysis of the process. of vibratory hardening. of the workpiece Is conducted using methods discussed above with the Uulizatlon of the presented equations, Theoretical Principles af Vibratory Technology 15 26 PARAMETER IDENTIFICATION OF THE RHEOLOGICAL MODELS 2.64 Fundamentals of the Identification Method For identification of the parameters of phenomenotoglcal models. and real media which are processed In. vibratory ‘machines, one can” use’ the results of experimental Invertigetions on actual installations and analog and. digital models for studying the effect of model parameters (natural Frequencies, resistance coefficients of the model itself and the surrounding medium, limits of commencing of plertic strsna, ste. fracture, ratio of the osclllating end stationary masses ste) on parameters of the beginning and end of collision, Aisplacements, velocities, and accelerations of deformations and fmoticas of "the medium, forces crested. In. the proces {fajectorie of motion, energy expenditure, and so on. The ‘ach other. The” model "parameters determined in the course of this comparison reader the mode ss an analog. of the real medium with specific physical Properties which are exhibited in the process of its vibratory working. “The developed method of identification of calculated and ‘experimental data and determination of parameters of the Theological models” of =the worked “media is based on Information theory and on the method of dynamic testing of ‘objects, The essence of the identification proces Is se follows: Feaction of the medium on the working element of the Vibratory machine, determined experimentally by dynamic teste, Ia "represented. in accordance with the adopted rheological model asa. mulliple-valued function of displacement and Velocity. Accuracy (credibility) of the adopted rheologiel model I estimated “by the whith of the graph-layer of the Iultiplewralued function of the medium reaction on the Working element of the vibratory machine. AS a working. value ‘Of the reaction, one can assume the graphesurface, which Is ‘cqudistant from the upper and lower surfaces of the eraph-layer of the multiple-valued function of the constraint Feaction. The reaction of the medium which is obtained ‘Srperimentally compared with the calculated reaction, namely the function of displacement” and velocity of che working tlement of the vibratory machine; the values ylelding the best ‘correlation are elected. Parameters of the rheological model ‘of the medium are assumed according "to" this cate.” For1% Theory of Vibratory Technology verification of the characteristic features of the vibratory process, one can make comparison between the computational find experimental velues of such parameters as phase angles of the motion stones, travel veloces, energy expenditure in the 26.2 Theoretical Background of the Dynamic Test Method Let us consider the dynamic test method which underwrites ‘entification of heologial models on the example of simple ratory machine ‘The “dynamic equation of the working element of a ratory machine of mass M set into oscillating motion by limited external Toree Rs Me = Rss) + Fee (2102 ere x and x are displacement and velocity of the working loment (ase My Rx. x) ie the function characterizing. the epondence of the reaction of the. worked medium (crushed oF the working element of the sibratory machine Let the dlaplecement of the working clement of the brary machine under s piven disturbance Fl) be described by fonction xe. The mesns that function x0) Kdentially ‘sitiafiee (forall the moments of tive # equation (2182), We introduce notation » = Mi FU, then equation (2182) can be Y= Rw) (e183) Geometrically, the presented equation in three-dimensional space. with coordinates), x, canbe Fepresented by the graph of function which iz a nonlinear trface, For solution of equation (2189) and determination of function M(, let us consider the three-dimensional trajectory S00 defined as 1 (0) = (ttl, M0, 810, Inverigations show that the graph of trejectory G4) for ll moments of time t will belong. to. the graph of Function Bx. s) i only function tt) ie computed for solution sof equation (2.18 Theoretical Principles of Vibratory Technology 197 Let us now fx some moment In tie fy fy oy y= and fa ty note at these moments polnts ott) * (st). ep, Ep) of the three dimensional space throught which trajctory @ 4) Ia passing. The coordinates of points (gare arranged in a table Which is called the dynamic test table. This teble enables one to’ present function fx. | In a tabular form, Using the obtained dynamic test table, the function of the dependence of the constraint reaction R on the displacement © land velocity of the vibratory machine working element mass 40 can be restored, Le. the dynamic equation deserbing. the ‘observed motion of the vibratory machine is restored. ‘Thus. having che experimental data on the dependences of x8, Sand Fon time f the model of dynamic syotem can be ‘constricted nthe form of equation (2183, Tels particulary important that the Knowledge of the ependence of the external force Fon time tla absolutely necessary. This in due tothe fact that in the absence of such Information there i an arbitrariness In selection of function Thus. for any bounded function Rts, x) under arbitrarily observed law of motion x7(2) the Bounded function FP can be selected for which the dynamic equation will be Mntically sitlsfied. In this cate, funetion P(e) tz computed ar Fo Mie (0) ~ RE UNtIO, 8) In this cate the problem of constricting the dynamic mode inthe form of equation (2180) becomes Indetermieste ince a. model with an arhitrary bounded functlon R has, been snined Within the framework of the presented geometrical constractions we shall arsune the rertraion or (eaten) Of the dependance of the constraat earlon ot the, worked feedlum cn daplecement 5 end velo of the ratory Sachine working clement of rst Wf to be the slsion of he problem of constricting the dynamic mado Ae Intl Gata we {dopt the information on the experimental data which ie lsted in the dyoamic test table, Furthermore, s snefactry solution of the probiem would be one in which fonction Rta, 2) is festored with a apecied sceuracy and: the accurcy ln weakly dependent ‘on the change of the ila dat it information is fled ‘into the dymamic text table, for cxampte, about thee pointe ste). st), and ak then ie ie Sikctt thet one ‘pane “alinited number “oP onleeat Sisfacee can be deonn through theme thre poles°8 “Theory of Vibratory Technology By flag inte the table information on all pointe «At! where 1 * h 2, ny m= and also on all the intermediate points between points cke)) and olf) and 30 forth, the volume of the tabulated information can be Increased Infinitely. However, this does not lead tothe desired result, since an Infinite umber of nonlinear surfaces can be drawn through the curve etined on the time Interval ty fj The circumstance ia. an Indeation that the number of "bits" of Information, Le. the tmeteure of Information volune, camnet sirre ae mescure of Completeness” of information about the initial data of the problem. Conducted experiments show that Hf points lt) are tcattored” over the surface 40 that the distance betwesn all neighboring pines. is amall, then the shape of the. analyeed burface can ‘be traced in sufficient detall, Furthermore, the ‘more points are given and the les is the distance between the neighboring points, the more Information we obtain about the Sivface, “Thus, the problem iz reduced to the determination of the umber of polis and of the method of thie ervangcnent o” Home region of the analyzed surface 20 that ie would be Fovelble to determine the sirface atape with the "specified worked medium on the vibratory machine working. element, ramely function Rix, XI, at the possible region of Its location ‘D should have a limited rate of change. kes the function must belong to the Lipschite category In region D. in which the reactions on the worked medium of the vibratory machine can practically be located, points 5, fe defined (Ie ty 2, cs ab with coordinates ap tp, whch to be at least one for which the Gatance between it and point 1 will be. lose or equal tots The pointe possessing, this Property are called points of network of region D. It is Significant that if region D is bounded, as it is in our case, then the number of f-network points can be mode finite. This Finite set of network points of region D is denoted as (D) Wwe now enter into the dynamic teat table points i which, being’ projected on region D. yield e-network, the Function fs 3) being restored will be given by the table with fccuracy 5 The numbers © and’ are Hnked by inequality = Lg where Lis the Lipschitz constant characterizing, the ‘maximum rate of change of function Rix, x) in region D. ‘Thooretical Principles of Vibratory Technology 199 ‘Az a result the following scheme of the problem analysis ‘can be outlined, IF constant’ L is known, then from 3 (the ‘desired accuracy of the function restoration which Is specified In advance) value of can be aoaumed. The value of + for region D, in its curs, determines the number of network Clements which will” be denoted ae NID). This number ‘etermines the length of the dynamic test table lthe number ‘of columns) Le, Ie characterizes the "memory soluime” ceuired for the Initia data of the problem ‘This scheme of the snalysle of the problem of dynamic model construction which is based an the geometrical propertice of a finite number of evnetwork points formulates the quantitative requirements For organization, planning. nd accuracy of dynamic experimentation with the analyzed system. iF now. using inequality #1, we assume ¢ = 4 then the number NAD) inthe represestation ND) = NE IME ‘would determine both quantitative and qualitative content of the initial data. required for the determination of «reliable ‘value of the reaction of the worked medium on th working ‘loment of the vibratory machine “Thus the number NjiD) when ¢ = SL ts the main charseterstc of the problem of determination of the reaction ‘of the worked medium on the machine. working “organ. It ‘should be noted that for further estimates and analysie it it {more convenient to use the number log ND) = HD). The ‘umber HAD) is called e-entropy of region B. Test important to note that the model cannot be constructed with accuracy J by using polnts of the region Dif they donot form an enetwork (e = SI) and if their number is lege than NID. Thin io explained by the fact that what iz Known about the restored function AUX, x) is only that it is bounded in the region and thet the rate of ite change fa this region does not exceed L However, with auch properties ne fan construct in Fegion D a continuum of various Tunetions of {wo variables, Therefore, in order to localize the true functlon From this set with accuracy 4, one must consider all parts of region D. Using the fundamental concept of analysis associated tvth the compactness of the metric space, it wax established that there Io's possiblity to construct a Finite set of elements in'them forming a finite enetwork "The above considered acheme of reducing the problem of constructing the dynamic model of the process. of vibratory Techine operation tothe task of tabulating of the unknown Feection of the worked medium on the ‘sibratory machine200 Theory of Vi tory Technology Working orgen Als, ), with the subsequent restoration of this function using the dynamic test table is the dynamic test inethod, “The Information on the initial parameters of the process for which the restored model tisier the specified. accuse) condition 5,"ie regarded az complote information for. the onstrction of the dynamic model of "the process oft Vibratory machine operation. The measure of thie completeness Is expedient to. estimate by the Introduced above number Nj (Dy oF by any appropriate function of this number, ‘Tho analytical representation of the reaction of the worked medium on the operating organ of the ibraters. machine. As Sls which Is given by the dysemie test table, x Formulated as 4n approsimation problem. “The construction of the dynamic model of the process of «+ vibratory machine aperation for complete Taformation ‘nthe Character” of ite operation hasbeen considered. above. Practically, itis important” that” the "concept of complete Information Indicates the content and volume of the. Ila experimental “date Tor which the dynamic’ model can be Fepresented by ordinary differential equations. In the problem under conslderation, it was assumed that the vibratory machine-load syatem can be completely described by the dynamic equation of a single-mass oacillatory system tn which the reaction of the worked medium ta introduced, namely the function of dleplacement and velocky of the working. organ of the vibratory machine. Furthermore, the worked medium lz a Pheological” system which is completely” characterized By iscoelastie properties ‘When banding lerge masses of the process medium such an approach isnot sufficiently accurate, for “the reliable description of the behaslor of the worked medium s goverating Mncoclastic rheological system mist be used.” Then the ‘oratory machine-load=)stem acquires an sdutional degree of Imobilty and one must know the coordinates of displacement of the worked medium to describe Its motion. However, im the Process of the esperiments one connot always measure Aisplacement of the medium and thus the experiments can be limited by recording of the motion paremeters of the working organ. This constitutes the problem of sletermination of the Fesction of the medium with, incomplete Information on the ‘operating regine of the sibrators machine ‘With Incomplete Information om the operating regime of the vibratory machine, 18 Becomes impractical to represent the ‘Theoretical Principles of Vibratory Technology 201 dynamic model in the form of ordinary alfferetial equations Tet us illustrate this by the example of vibratory machine under load, which is modeled by a mechanical system with two ‘dogrees of freedom of the following particular form Mio mk, = Rb XS 8D em whee A and mare the oviliing mates of the working Tens ot ste orary thine and she worked medi, in thn cae the fet eqson Secor the mon af the wecting ones and she tenon deeb deformations ofthe ented mnt Mayry ay the yumi seein et Tie orted med Ra ae toc sng atthe meking orn inc in he courts of the experiment aly the paramore of mation ofthe worting ngen re fecrdd che faa St "he pabiom, "ats the ence art fed Srelutely trom the pots of tnjetry 5 Gye stds sh Shore 990 mets Ro, he nce fo ery whe iT pela, wih thee ial ae te rcterefeneon Rsy we eng’ ohh the mcuragy spaed vance un Everlaety tne number Ee ut conmdr the Iformaien wich cin be oalned fom fonction My se ith Tint ini dat tet ue perfor tw folodng Conduction Tanction Rn ef) deere in eon Dad is graph pla raion of the graph af the ncn {ned ae‘ pleted on lee ym tthe poketon te ‘Enoad by Mal The'goomewcal retga hots repented ao 9 Saptliger of Mone "muiirtaed ance Rd Tie fed nan‘ wpement chi Ticion an Seu’ eat tales el te tae) of mation £0 = (4, (8) of em Cates telong to open” and dvs titi Then the tact = Gt0 yt, nh wl Sonely cover the raion Gon the grph af Hetty Ry a Panton nh i Senown, therefore st moment fof te pont att in the ‘Shecdmenson spec “tnnec| semua though the roleilon of thle pole on pave Gy 5) can be mared. By Sorting al the ‘Temataing” peokeont” ofthe ‘pants of jcc 0 the grape of the mieten WT thse pants ne crete he202 “Theory of Vibratory Technology dynamic test table, we obtsin the tabular method of representation of the multicalued function yeFtx) We constructs cplindrcal,graph-layer yePlxy, x. We Identify Lipschite function Ry) whose grep onthe points of region D belongs to the, graph of the cylindrical layer, and the projection of region G* on plane (yx) coincides with the region filled by che multivalued function As). It is ‘evident that unlimited number of similar functions Rt tay) ‘an be constructed. For each of functions Rf, one cin select Sch an unobservable function x2(0) for which the following MEO ® REGGIO, 8 SEK FO ‘The noted circumstances lead to the fact that the dynamic model of the vibratory machine operation under toad can be Fepresented as 2 sifferetial equation, also called alfforentiat Inclusion, with 4 multi-valued rightchand side of the following form Miz = Fix) + Fw The differential inclusion i the form of representation of| the dynamic” model with Incomplete Information about the Initia experimental date, 263 Rheological Equations of the Dynamic System: Vibratory Crusher Jew-Rock Mase Let us consider the computational model of a vibratory crusher Under load (Fig. 29). As was shown above, one can limit fnesell to the consideration of the operation of one jaw of the fbratory crusher without loss of generality. A jaw of mass M Is driven with oscillatory motion by am inertial vibrator with 2 Unbalanced masser my. ‘The rotations of the unbalanced massee With angular velocities pj cause the jow to oscillate in the Airection of axis © Jaw oscillations excite complex motions of the rock chunks Inside the crushing. chamber. Motion of each chunk with tase imp tk = 1, 2. sora) in determined ‘by three linear “components “ayy. djs ty Inthe general casey palttarmonic, secitatitta GP" the ratory ‘cruther, Jew are [enerated, which are described by the following. different ‘auation Theoretical Principles of Vibratory Technology 208 (ue # a)aerans rane Emr; coe 9p canst Function Tix, x) in the equation characterizes the nonlinear restoring forces of the. elastic system and. the fracture Fiction generated due to Interaction of the jw with the other elements of the structure. Function Ax. 3 determines the dynamic reaction of the crushed rock ‘on|the Jw arlcng nder the. iran ted. the loplacamene. of the Chunks with. masses mg Vector 2 is. determined by the {eneralized. coordinates, Welocides, and. accelerations of the Tock, chunka which intaract with the Jew, Les we can, write PU a DN" tue vector takes Into! nocoune the change. of phystconechanical properties fo the rock from the moment of Gelivery to" the moment of discharge from the crushing Chamber. The acton of, the sirating Jaw on the rock mass Inside the chomber is accompanied by changes in its physlcomechanical properties, such as grandlometric Thala” changan are’ eflecud” onthe” Gourtar "of Ayaan Interaction of the elements of the Jew-rock mare system. The latter in expressed tn the change ofthe reaction of the rock mast on the jew. namely in the function In equaton (2485) Thus, “the vector” of the parametere characterizes the Juiclently slow change of the physicomechasical properties of the rock tse tlds the crashing chamber Tor complete description off the dbnemics of the system: crushing jaw-rock masa equation (2185) mast be supglemented ty equations charctering. changes of vectors i a and of elle coordinates gj U = Ie 2, 3y ns Te must be born in mind. that in the steady operation regime of wfbratory crusher with the uniform filling. of the {shing chamber with rock mass, the rack chunks at different Singer of crushing Interact with he Jow at 4 given gine, Thus ieean be assumed that. the ‘change of veclor "for the fveraged rack mass which ts subjected. to the action of the ‘leilstng jew i iaignfcant. When considering” the Pushing Droceas ef” single chinks or” small batches of ‘rock, it Ie ecessary to take Into account the change of te properties oo the interval of motion bewoen the feeding and lacharge208 Theory of Vibratory Technology openings. Ax a first approximation, the behavior of vector = fan be characterized by rheological equations of the strain of the rock mass (ace section 14), which can be writen as mie Ries RDO 2100) Thus, the behavior of the vibratory crusher under load is described, asa frst approximation, bj equation (283). In a ‘more accurate formulation (second approximation), It canbe described by the system of equations (2188). However, In both the first and second formulations adequate information on the bbelavior of the system ig not obtainable. In both case, one must uae the methods of the dynamic model with Incomplete Information on the parameters of the syrtem; however, im the ficond care the accuracy in higher than inthe first. The Accuracy of determination of the reaction of the rock mass Considerably Increases when the equation of Jaw motion is Supplemented by @ rheological strain equation of the rock Tet us consider the method of determination of the main heological tends of the rock mass reaction Rls, 8, Z)@) on the basis of experimental Investigations, We rewrite equatlon (2188) ae follows (me Fm) + rem 0 F myey teow oy RW SEA : e wn ‘The situation Is handled as follows: without analytically investigating the laws of change of vector we assume that ‘ome region Trom which vector 2 adopts ies values, be ek. We introduce the multivalued function which reflects the fact that for some fixed values of x, 8, 2 can assume arbitrary values from the region of (namie states A and, therefore, the function can also. assume the corresponding ast of values. Ar a result, equation (2187) Is Feplaced by multi-valued sifferential equation of the type Theoretical Principles of Vibratory Technology 205 whee rec £ mygiom of ent 2) 2300) The differential inclusion (2188) is a first approximation fal model of the. Jaw-rock mass sytem, The multivalued function Ris, x 8) ought to. be determined ‘experimentally. ‘The second approximation of the rheological model of the system ie obtained by using an addtional rheological “train equation of the rock masz. The differential Inclusion of the {scond approximation has the form led e+ ree 0 Emr feos 0" i Information on the motions of the Jaw of a vibratory crusher unctions af time f can be obtained in the experiment. X0 NU, 2. Furthermore, from the design date the following Constant parameters are known: mags of the working organ M, master and eccentricities of the unbalance vibrators my and 1 nd from the "preliminary. experiment function Tlx. Characterising the force of structural friction has been determined. Let us turun to equation (2188). In accordance with the foresad, we introduce the notation poled mee rea Z maton then the differential inclusion (2.188) can be replaced by tealar multi-valued function206 “Theory of Vibratory Technology YERW YD 2100) Since the multi-valued relation (2190) ix obtained from ‘squaton (2188), then any observed motion of the jaw of the Uibratory crusher, which Iz characterized by Functions, No, x0, 90) will satisfy relation (2190. This means that For ach moment of time the following condition will be satafied (0 © ROO, S00, @ Further, we select the moments of tne fy. fy of and compile « dynamic test lable of the form Po FU) FUG on Ue Nb WE oe NUE 8A which elds « tabular coprsentation of the reaction of the Tock muss, on the ‘crushing. hw which iss mulel-valued faetion Bx a, 2 ‘One of the decisive condltlons for achleving the necessary accuracy of determination of the, worked medium reaction ot the working organ by the dynamic test method te the dense Filing of the region of the phase tealectory ¥(0) = MO. X00 In whlch can be practically located values of che medium fesctions on. the. working orgon. In @ number of ‘caves, to provide’ dense. filng, off the, phase teajectory the use of fmattdetalance vibrotor with "flexible links between the Unbalanced massee or tisdebalance vibrator “with fractional Cransmission ratios between the shafts can be. recommended Tho ibravor generatce” an exciting force, which Iz changing dlong'a mult-lebe trajectory ‘hen Investigating brary crushers there is no need to se a apecal drive, since the phase trajectory densely fila the hese plane even when s standard vibrator ia used. Figure 218 hows, az an example, the phase Brjectories of jaw oscillations of e vibratory crusher. ‘The rogion of the phase plane (%, ¥, which is deneely tated wth the phate saeony 3102 Ml eo Fectangular cells with sider dx ond’ 3¢ se scen in fig. 216. The (Qumtttes dy and Sy charecterang the division steps of 1 and Tee specified from the condition of accuracy of the analyte thd are in accordance with the accuracy of the experiment. ‘Theoretical Principles of Vibratory Technology 207 igure 235 Phase trajectories of the Jaw of & vbemory crusher Further, the data entered Into the dynamic test table are rouped on the basis of their belonging to the rectangular cell Sf region D with the center at point (xp )- Coordinates of the central point. (xy 47) are ascribed ta all the experimental points ending up in the’ cell with number Jj Subseripes / and here are defined a8208 Theory of Vibratory Technology “Thus, all experimental ponte corresponding to region D and which are filed Into the dynamic tert table are described 1 the coordinates, 8 with an accuracy upto. qusnles 3X ana bs 3 Due to the ambiguity of function Ra x. 3) witch reoresente reaction of the rock mass on the crushing” hw Severs values of function tty) which conrespond tothe moments of time fy hen the raeetory intersected the Fectanguler cal with tnbor fill correnpond to each peat he construction of the multivalued function Ms, &; 3) for some fined value of the vector, of parameters le performed as follows. All the plats with coordantes Ry sy Xj. are identified and surfaces ‘are drawn through them ‘hich fephically specify the Upper and lower bounds sf function > = Is. & 2), lew of the function which bounds the multi-valued funtion fom above and from below tate Fg. 210. ‘The thcological function ‘of the reaction force of the crushed rock mets on the low of the vibratory crusher il Be ‘characterized, on the average, 8s Pe Ros 8 8 Which corresponds geometrically to the graph of the suface Which is equidistant from the upper and lower surfaces ounding the graph-layer. The computation of function Ain. 8 2) te performed according to the rule Ye RMS Be MEG 8H) + RUw BD These constructions can be conducted graphically, Should there be a need for obtaining” an analytical dependence, the Spproximation probiems must be solved. With thie in mind: the Festored reaction Rly, Ny a) 18 Fepresented as a finite sm in the form ROG SBE aye ah Oo So aghy aF i + any 8D “Theoretical Principles of Vibratory Technology 209 lavertgsted system and satisfy a number of mathematical conditions at which “the sum Ca, Fls, 61. would replace function R(x, x, @) with accuracy & For the determination of the unknown coefficients the Toast equares method must be teed ‘The accuracy (credbilty) of the obtained rheological function of the resction of the rock mass on the jaw ofthe ibratory machine will be characterized by the width of the ued function which is computed a a= R(x, ¥, @). By employing various approximations in the solution of the. problem with respect to. the width of the raphrlayer of the multi-valued function, the credibility of the ‘Adopted model can be estimated 265 Methods of Organization, Planning, end Conducting ‘Automated Experimenta for Identification of Dynamice (Of the System: Jaw of Vibratory Crusherrock Mass 1. Recording of the dynamic variables. For the realization of the aboverstated methods of analjsls of dynamics of the system. jaw of vibratory crusher-rock mass, one MUS, as 2 first approximation. conduct. simultancous recording. of the following, variables: sccelorations of the jaw 0) and pheses (70 of the unbalanced masses of the vibrator. The permissible hor in measuring momentary acceleration magnitude of the Jaw ls. ertimated et SH of its maximum value, ‘The phase Fecording must be performed by a discrete method, using 100 Positions per revolution of the rotating unbatanced mate. The Frtegral accuracy of the experiment In th case will not exceed {08 2, Invewtgation of function Rx, 2, Z, 2) in the second ‘proximation. In this case, information must be obtained. on the motion of the jaw. and of the” rock masa. Two. fecelerometers are used one Ie mounted on the jaw and the ‘other in the rock mass. Recording of angular velocity of the Unbalanced mars inthis case is ot required. It is assumed here thet function Tlx, X) bes been determined in preliminary 1. Scheme of formation processing. Processing the experimental Information is carried out using standard techniques ‘Automation of the scheme is carried out either by using Inicroprocessors intended” for’ execution of specified210 Theory of Vibratory Technology operations, or by automatic imput of information on the functions St0, 94(0) Into a computer and the subsequent processing according to the deserbed algorithms. The Information on the dynamic test tables must be stored in the sxternal memory of the computer 4, Determination of friction forces In the vibratory crusher. The determination of the fiction force Tox, ) acting. Inthe structural elements of the vibratory crusher must be carried fue using equation of motion of the Jew (we 8) ee rao e£ mypton rok mn torr -(u-$ ms Thus, to determine function Tl, 8), simultaneous recording. of, the jw acceleration J and) af gy of the Unbalanced vibrator must be made. ‘The required function = Tix, a) cam be obtained By using the automated experiment chore considered above 5. Investigation of function Bix, x 2, 2) In the absence of Information on phase y(t In this’ case, the vibrator Is Connected with the jaw through an elastic system (for example, by mounting on rubber’ pads). The dynamic equations of the faction of the rock mass on the jaw then are (we m)ere ro: 0 = Z myn ton a Mes Tin De Rw LEA =0 where M's he mast of the vibrator with the elements Gesociated with it x; 0% and S” are dlaplacement, velocity, and Scceloration of the vibrator les of Vibratory Technology 21 Phase variables pj do not enter In the second equation For devermination of reaction of the rock mast on the jaw UX, 4X, 3) ie suffices to obtain information on motions of masse 1M and MF by simultaneously recording their acceleration” Te Is sasumed here thet function TUx, x) ls determined beforehand 6. Control of filling of the phase trajectory of the region. The Visual monitoring of the time when the trajectory A= tah (0) of region D of the phase plane with coordinates x, 5 ie Sufficienty densely filled must "be — performed using ‘bro-cecrdinate secllographs 7. Monitoring of ynamice of the vibratory crusher when physlcomechanlcal properties of the rock mass are changing. Fluctuations of the physicomechanical properties of the crustal rock mass causes a change of the vector of parameters. ‘This is reflected ip Function R(x, x, 2, ), which determines the dynamic rection of the rock mass on the jw. Vector # le changing slightly se compared with the change of the phase variables x,y. Therefore, che experiment must be planned so ‘hat vector @ would be changing only slightly during the time of collection of the necessary Information for construction of function Mx, x, 2). Implementation of this condition must be verified experimentally. Asa result of this step-by-step experiment the dependence of function Mix, , 2) on the vector of parameters d can be established, In reallty such « ‘spondence will be determined by the time during which the‘CHAPTER THREE BASIC SCHEMATICS AND DESIGN OF VIBRATORY MACHINES 34 PRINCIPAL TYPES OF VIBRATORY MACHINES Vibration technology i relatively new and rapidly developing Aisciptine, and. vibratory machines are successfully used in ‘various Branches of industry. The design of these machines. was preceded by thorough analysis of the theory and computation fechniques along with experimental Investigations. Tt ls pertinent to. mention thet despite the” relative structural Simplicity of vibratory conveying machines, their theory” Is complex and its development requires application of the techniques of nonlinear mechanics and the use of modern analog and computer technology. “The Following operations performed by these machines re ‘of the same type with respect to the character of the external Fesiatences encountered. by the working organ imperting vibration onto various bulk media and diapersed systems in loose conditions, penetration of the vibrating clemente into soll fo rock; bratory cutting and vibratory fracture of rocks, bounded fol, metals; vibratory crushing and grain-size reduction of various materia, Vibratory machines with respect to their intended Industrial use can be divided into conveying, process conveying, loading, bunkering, as well as machines for crushing, reducing drain size, separation of bulk and multi-phase media (screens, entrfages, sloves, ahd 0 08), for transporting multi-phase inedia stich as cement, Food products, and so on machines for metal “cutting and. rock. Fracture, devices for Increasinga “Theory of Vibratory Technology, ‘ffeceiveness of pressure metal working. and improving cast Structares, and algo auxiliary equlpment Vibratory conveying, machines include conveyors, feeders land screen feeders, elevators, and hoppers = orators Conveyors. and feeders of universal design forthe transportation of poured and lump loads are the most widely sed. They differ by the diversity of ther fundamental and Structural design and are produced for different. productiviies, For the dlaplacement of the louds In the vertical direction convejers with screwlike load-carrying elements are used. For the delivery of ‘small single workploces and. parte in transfer lines of metalworking machines, vibratory machines and hoppera-dosstors, ae used. Vibratory devices are widely uaed In the mining Indust. ‘On the basis. of conveying machines a number of process-conveying machines have, been developed such as Screens, dryers, dehumiifiers, granulators, classifiers, dosators, hopper-dosetors, and many” others. To. provide continuous ‘operation of powerful conveying. installations comprising belt onveyers, high-output screen-feedera are successfully used a loading and losd transfer devices. which ensure. the optiniim conditions of load transfer from one conveyer to another When "handling underground ore deposits vibratory conveying. machines are used for automating of such basic operations as unloading (discharge) of the ore, and delivery and Toading of ‘the blasted ore. As a result, efficlency of these processes increases considerably, operation becomes safer, Guality,improven, and the “disiotegration of oversize ore (hunks) Is made easier. "The group of loading machines comprises continuous-operation machines with vibratory working organ, ‘machines with ausilary vibrating devices auch s= bucket-type Gevices” with heaping arms Celawsl, combers, and also ouding/delivering muchlnee and grefere (clamshell) Devices "used in metallurgy and. in metal working are relatively new. They are used to improve quality of castings In pressure metal working. (vibratory upsetting drawing and Folling) and in cold-work hardening, uring. welding, ¢o relleve ‘Auslley sibratory devices include dosators (batches cexciters for bunkers and troughs (chutes), compactors of bulk foods” and. various process mixtures, unloaders of allway freight cars, devices Tor cleaning castings from the molding sand, rippers. of Trozen or compressed louds, cleaners of Basic Schematics and Design of Vibratory Machines 215, froight cars and mine cars and devices for cleaning. conveyer belts. The use of aunllry vibratory equipment yields certaln ‘operational and economic effects, since it increases the level of mechanization of labor-intensive suxllay operations "Among the atxilary “devices one ust, first of all, lunderine an entire class of equipment’ for’ unloading and leaning. the conveying means and compaction of transported foods In them Intensification of unloediog and cleaning of the railway rolling stock and truck bodies, and also compaction of the” Toads In them leads to. an” increase of transport productivity, Thus, when compacting some transported granular foods the useful capacity of the rolling stock can be Increased by IS ~ 20% in the process of loading and subsequent vibratory cleaning following ‘uploading. ‘The use of vibratory ‘leaning fevices’ In conveyors. increases their” operational reliably particularly In conditions of transportation of ticking and Freeting loade and this enables the increase of the turnover of the transportation hardware ‘Vibratory unlosding, cleaning, and compacting devices have ‘5 gret deal In common with respect to” thelr fundamental esign; unloaders and cleaners are usually” arranged In one “The essence of the vibratory method of intensification of lunlosding of poured Toads Iz application of vibration from special exciter to the body of the car (buggy). By using special devices, vibrations can also be imparted directly to the poured load and. not to the body. Under the action of vibration the forces of adhesion between the stuck Toad and the walls of the body, and also the internal friction and adhesion of Indvidea!’ particles ofthe poured load become significantly ‘weaker, its flow ia facilitated, and the load Ie dlacharged by Trarty, Inthe cave of « monolithic frozen Toad, it breaks Slane the'(reezing. planes ndor the acton of the vibratory Tipper. The unloading of Ivozen materials requires, asa rule, powerful equipment’ and intensive oscillations. The most tfectve here are vbrovimpsct devices, “Another” typeof auxiliary equipment 1s vibratory ‘compactors, Under thelr Influence poured. loads in cargo ehicles, casting molds, etc, are compacted a+ result of eduction of the forcer of Intersa friction under vibration and the simultaneous ection of the force of gravity. Due to presence in the transported load. of aiferent chunks in both fine and shape and due to thelr arbitrary” arrangement, the Yolume of the carrying body is not fully utilized. When26 “Theory of Vibeatory Technology vibratory compactors are used, the fine particle fil the apace between the large chunks, the load is arranged more uniformly nd” Is) compacted, and. hence, the volume ilzation is Increasing. Thus, the possibility of reducing the sae of the rolling stock or increasing the carrying capacity of the vehicle created. At the present tims, vibratory compactors ate aed In some cases in underground Loading mine stations: however, there are no fundamental difficulties for thelr implementation In railway teansportation. 32 VIBRATORY MILLS AND CRUSHERS Preliminary fine grinding of the product is « prerequisite for fective realization of many production processes In a number ‘of industries. Fine grinding contributes to increasing the rate ‘oF interphave_proceseee and to bettering the structure of the fend product. The ts due to the fact that with fine grinding of the product, the sizer of its particles decrease, their specific the reactions ‘are accelerated, the temperatures requlred to tarry out the production process afe usually decreased, the Consumption of rare clements, ond In meny cases, the Consumption of energy, are reduced ‘The most effective and currently used method Is vibratory ining. Vibration grinding Is carcied out in vibratory mills tn 1 grinding, medium. Figure St shows the basie errangement of the simplest single-drum vibratory mill with unbalanced Inerdal ‘rive. The vibratory mill Is comprised from a container 1 filed With the. grinding. slements (balls are often used) and an Inertial wbrator which iz made as an eccentric Container by means of bearing blocks. The shaft of the inertil Mibrator ls rotated through an elastic coupling J by an electric Thotor and the container is mounted on plate ¥ by means of laste mounts $ in the form of helical springs or rubber pada The capacity of one container of modern sibratory mill cap range from fractions of a cubic decameter to 1000 dm’ Callorated sleves 4 are mounted inside the working, chamber The processed product is fed into. the mill through the feed ‘opening A and dlacharged through opening Rotation of the shaft of the inertial vibrator generates centrfugel forces Trom the unbalanced masses, which bring the Working chamber into oscillatory motion. The form of the Basic Schematics and Desiga of Vibratory Machines 217 trajectory of container oscillation Is conskerably dependent tn this case on parameters of the elastic system, and ie varying from an elongated ellipe to a circle. The elliptical form is the most typical trajectory. Under the influence of oscillations ‘ich grinding element in the working chamber iz brought into apid oscllatory motion. repeating. the form of chamber trajectory and, simultaneously, all the masses of the grinding ments and the product’ belng ground perform slow SGreulatery “motions, ‘The motion of the mass filling the ‘working chamber of the vibratory mill waually takes place in a ection opposite to. the direction of rotation of the Unbalanced abeft Fracturing the processed product "during ‘bration grinding is achieved due to the relative displacement Of the grinding. elements and the medium asa result of nin parameters of the ibratory mill ate the frequency and amplitude of osilations orm, dimensions, material of the grinding elements, and parameters. of tho container. The quality of grinding in the Mibratory mil dependent on the degree of fling. by the Product, relation between the amounts of the grinding ments and the ground product, type of the worked product nd Rte granulometric composition, and the required grain size St the ond. The effectiveness of the grinding process Is also ‘pendent on the design features and dimensions of the container, the se, form. and density of the grinding elements, the conditions of delivery and discharge of the product from ‘the mill, The determining factors of the intensity of operation of the woratory. mill, are the parameters of container ftcilations (shape of teajector), frequency and amplitude of ‘ncilations) Depending on the type of the product, ts. granulometric composition, end the desfed degree of grinding, three principal8 ‘Theory of Vibratory Technology, operating schematics of vibratory mills are used and, correspondingly three design Tayouts of the arrangement of the working chambers of the containers; for very finer fine, and medium grinding For ‘very fine product grain size the working chamber is quipped ‘atthe ends by two calibrated sleves. The ground product Is loaded from above through one loading door in the Senter of the container nd discharged from the sides of the Conteinee through two. discharge’ doors. With sich an frrengement of the working chamber of the container, ‘maximum path of travel of the product to the discharge doors In achieved For ¢ coarser product grain size, the working chamber has calibrated slever at the ends and at the bottom. The rapidly round part of the product In this case spills through. the Seve at the bottom of the chamber and the less fragmented pare aplle through the end sieves. after travelling & longer path in the working chamber. Loading is also carried out through one central" door and diacharged’ through two. side For an even coarser grinding, the working, chember is brovlded witha calibrated. sleve only. at. the. bottom, The particles, In thie arrangement, rapidly cross the layer of the Grinding elements ‘reaching. the discharge door without being Subjected’ to" sufficiently Intensive. rubbing. Loading of "the working. chamber is carried out from the top through two floors atthe sides and the product's dscharged through three ‘doors at the bottom of the chamber. The directions of motion fof the ground product. are clearly seen In. the schematic ‘lagram (Fig. 3. “The high efficacy of using vibratory mills for five grinding land homogenization of @ wide range of products has led to evelopment of a large variety "of designe snd zea of Vibratory sills both ia the USSR and abrowd Vibratory” grinders of other” designs have also been developed for the handling of special problems. More uniform istribution of the ground product amongst the mass of the Urinding elements and, hence, an increase of grinding. quality fan be achieved Ina vbvatory mill with a rotating chamber ‘The chambor 7 of such mills cjindrical. The conical onde of the chamber rest on pneumatic cylindrical rollers B and the jlindrieal part on the driving eccentric roller % The diameter of the roller te significantly less than the diameter of the Basic Schematics and Design of Vibratory Machines 219 ‘olindrical part of the chamber: therefore, it provides high fvcllation frequency together with slow rotation (Fg. 318. ‘The fundamental arrengements of traditional vibratory nills of variour modifications are depicted in Fig. 32. Figure, 3.22. shows a vibratory mill with one working chamber I which rests by means of bracket 2 om frame through rubber-metal elastic elements Loading of the mil ‘fected through door Sand” discharge through “door. 4. Oscillations of the working clement are excited by vibrator 7. whose” axis coincides with the center” of gravity of the sallating mass of the vibratory mil Figure 325 and 3.2c depiet two versions of a two-chamber ibratory mill with working chambers arranged. at the same level and at fferent levels. The second version requires leas ‘operating atea for the installation, The wbratory mille with the Contsiners arranged et the seme level have the working Chambers and 9 which are joined by a common bracket 10 with the inertial “vibrator IL The” osdllatory system. Is {upported on frame 2 by rubbersmetel elastic elements (2 Loading of the working. chambers Ie elfected through doors 14 land 1 and discharge through doors 16 and 17. In the second Yersion, container 18 is mounted higher than container 1, and the unbalanced vibrator 21 la mounted on a common bracket 20 between the two. Loading of the upper” working chamber is ffected through door 2% andthe lower through the same ‘door and ducting 23; dlecharge takes place through ductings 24 land 25. The oscllatory system Is supported on peds 27 and 28 ty means of rubber-metal elastic elements 25 "The three-chamber wbratory mil Is. shown in Fig. 32d ‘Chambers 2, 30, and are connected by a common bracket 22 With the inertial vibratory 30. The chambers are londed through Aoore 34, 35, and 36 and unloaded through doors, 37, 38, and ‘39. The oscillatory system is supported on frame él by means Of rubber-metal elastic elements 40. “The achematic diagram of a fve-chamber vibratory ell ie chown in Fig. 326 The mill has two containers 42 and 42 mounted above, bwo containers #4 and 45 mounted below, and ‘one chamber a in between. All five containers are linked with tro inertial vibrators’ 48 and 49 by bracket 47. The two Ieftchand side working chambers are loaded through door SL the righthand. side chambers are loaded through door 52, and the ‘middle ‘chamber through door Si. The chambers are Unlosded through doors 54, SS, and S6 respectively, The220 ‘Theory of Vibratory Technology. sos Aa A Z oscillatory system Is supported on frame 8 through the rubbersmetal elastic lemente 87 1h the described types of vibratory mill, the chambers are sssembled ia one motile frame, However, there are designs In Construct. balanced “dynamic ayatems; however, these” are ' Basic Schematics and Design of Vibratory Machines 221 Aistingulshed by their greater complextty, A system of Tour-chember vibratory mill has been developed in which the Containers aremounted in pairs on two independent. frames that are connected with cach other by eccenteic vibrator The frames are supported on the carrying structure by means of laste elements The working chambers of the wibratory mill can _be arranged not only horizontally, but) also. vericlly. The ‘ecilations of auch chambers ‘usually ‘take place Ia the Horizontal plane, while rocking of the. vertical otis is simultaneously excited. There are also vibratory mills in which the chamber Is made az a torus. Combined. torsional” and transletional osciletions” ate imparted to the chamber “causing the filler to perform circular motions in the cross section of the torus and. simultaneously ‘move slowly in the horizontal plane along the ring. Tin order to Improve traditional solutions, fundamentally new "tysteme have been designed, In all. the designs of ‘ibratory mille under consideration the oscillations are Ingparted directly 0 the worklng chamber. This poses certain inconveniences: ‘on the one hand, one has to. bring. into tibration heavy componente, on the other hand, to. protect eructuralelemente of the building from vibration. This Problem is not encountered in a vibratory mill with. loaded Siorator. This mill comprises a high cylindrical verteal chamber Ineide. which a tube of «significantly. smaller diameter ls stspended on elastic elements, The unbalanced vibrator Inside the tibe generater circular oucillations along. the Tongitudlnal {kis of the chamber. The free zpace In the chamber is filled Wvith the product being ground. Grinding occurs under the Sction oF ouelllations of the Inner tube. In. auch = vibratory till, there are significantly less oscillating masses. The frame, Which ie mounted on the carving. structures by means of {pringe, practically “does not oscillate. However, ln some Gesigne both the frame and the inner tube are oscillating ‘There. also. exit. balanced vibratory mills with vertical ‘working chambers, Vertical vibratory mille oF this type consist Cf two. dential, mutually Interchengeable.geinding chambers ‘mounted one above the other and on a frame by means of hock absorbers, The drive Is a two-shaft eccentric vibration fexcter mounted on the frame symmetrically with respect to the anie of the mill between the grinding chambers Grinding chambers are. divided helghtwive by perforated partitions into’ «number of sections, each of whlch containemm Theory of Vibratory Technology the grinding slements with a clearance between the upper layer and the perforated partition located above. During the ‘Sheraton of the mill the grinding elements Interact with the Perforated partitions twice per cycle: once With the lower and then with the upper partitons. The frame is mounted on the Foundation with the aid of shock absorbers. When the mill is working, the grinding chambers perform rectilinear oscillations In sotiphase, and the inertsl forces generated during motion are mutually balanced The rectilinear ‘iajectory of oscillations of the grinding chamber in the vertical plane and the double impact interaction fof the grinding. elements with the perforated paritions et ‘optimum. height of thelr layer enable ensuring high power Imeensty andy hence, effectively carrying out the grinding of hard materials ‘The initial material Is fed Into. the crushing chamber at the top, is uniformly distributed ver the tea of te cross fection, and fragmented ae a result of their collisions ae It passes progsessively through the layers of the grinding lements of the working sectlons of the rinding chamber ‘There are vibratory mills with one grinding element. Such 1 vibratory mill le # cylindrical chamber In which there Ie @ Slinder of somewhat analler diameter. Product frogmentation {kes place between the chamber wall ahd the surface of the {plinder whose rotation is imparted by the oscillations of the frame on which the entire rystem is mounted. Inertial Unbalanced vibrators are mounted on the Frame on both sides of the working chamber, The frame. is mounted on elastic Slements” The synchronous rotation of both vibrators, which Is needed to ensure. the specified law of motion of the working Chamber, ln provided by the action of the vibratory momeat of the vencited oscillations. of the common frame onthe "jaw vibratory crushere are mechanical systems with Incomplete constraints, ‘Therefore, the laws of motion of the Crushing laws are not determined by the Kinematic paremeters Of the crusher but ate formulated ag ¢ result of Interacton of the drive and operating resistances (forces crested during rock Crushing). A substantial role in the formulation of the law of tmotion of the crushing Jaws is played by the tuning of the ‘rusher oscilating system (aaturel frequency, ratio. of the fatural and) forced frequencies, resistances in the elastic Satem. In vibratory Jaw crushers, unlike "ordinary jaw Glushers, crushing Ix not effected by static breaking, but by Basie Schematics and Design of Vibratory Machines 223, vibration impact. Vibratory impact crushing is realized af a Consequence of periodic generation of 2 clearance between the jaw and the rock, The clearence. is generated during, the ‘rushing process as a consequence of the fact that at high-frequency Jaw oscillations, the rock does aot have the time 0 fall with the required speed In the working space oF the crusher and loses contact with the crushing law Presently existing vibratory aw crushers can be dlvided with respect to the fundamental arrangement Into two main Categories with a kinematic link of the Jaw with the Trame and with an elastic lik ofthe jaw with the frame (Fig. 23), The nematic connection of the jaw with the frame ix by means of suspending It on a knuckle pin and also by using 6 crank or fccentric drive, ‘The clastic connection ‘of the jw” with, the frame ie used with the inertial drive. When the Kinematic attachment of the jaw is used, prectially all the forces Generated during crushing of the rock mare are tranemitted ¢0 the frame. With the use of elastic suspention, tranemesion of these Forces to the Frame of the ctusher can be considersbly reduced “The single-jaw vibratory crusher with inertial deve (Fig 5330) has moving U and stationary 2 java. The stationary Jaw ts Figidly mounted ia the Irame 3 and the moving fw is Hiepended en a pivot The moving. Jow ie" driven ty_on Inertial vibration exciter of the unbalanced-mass ype 5) The free end of the moving Jaw ie supported by the elastic system ‘ Daring rotation of the unbalanced mass, che moving Jw performs oscillations relative to the pivot with « sufficently le af scilation the ‘exe to the end of the Jaw. The rock mass is crushed between the moving and find. the forces created. in the process of ‘rushing are transmitted from the jaw to the Teame of the ‘crisher mainly through the stationary jaw and partially through the joints Magaitudes and dlrections of the Forces, transmitted to the frame by the stationary and oecllating jaws, are Aifferent and do not balance each other, Crushers of this type are simple in design and relisble in ‘operation. However, due to the fact that the forces generated Inthe process of ‘crushing are transmitted othe frame, the latter must be made heavier in order to reduce oscillations oF the structure, Nonetheless, as 8 result of the Imbalance of the22 “Thoory of Vibratory Technology: he ae Ag Gr AN: “ERE ART eS ay : (gar Basic Schematics and Design of Vibratory Machines 225 forces the frame vibeates during the crushing process and thus har to be mounted on # Foundation, Double-jaw vibratory crushers (Fig. 338) have moving jaws 7 suspended by meane of pivots 8 and clastic elements 9 in frame 10, The pws are driven by unbslanced vibration exciters in a crusher with two moving jaws, the crushing forces are also transmitted to « signfieant degree to the frame; however, fue to the symmetry of construction, the horiontal ‘components are belanced to a certain degree which reduces the vibration of the frame during the crushing process. The crusher Is unually rigidly mounted on the Foundation "To redce transmission of vertical components of the load to the carrying structure, the tworjaw crusher le mounted sometimes on the foundation by means of clastic mounts 12 Inerensed vertical ovcillations of the suspended frame Contribute to the Increase of crusher output The process of Seceleration of the rock-mass develops as follows. At the Sppermort location the rock ls in a compressed state between the Jawe anda motion Ir imparted to it downwards. with the ‘elocity of the frame, since there le no rock motion relative to the lam. By an appropriate adjustment, the Jaw starts opening at the moment when the dowaward speed of frame motion. and hance of the rock miss, acquires maximum value. ‘Therefore the free motion of the material begins with an initial speed ‘corresponding to the frame velocity at the moment the Jaws ae tree. "The slngle-jaw vibratory crusher with parametric eccentric drive (Fig. 220) consists of moving Jaw 13 suspended in frame 4 op ante 15 and elastic connections Ht The crusher is driven ty ‘an eccentric wbration exciter whose. shaft. is mounted in bearings 17 in frame {f, Mounted on the shaft la an elastic cccentric 18 whoae yoke 19 is Installed in the moving. jaw 1 When the elastic. clement x rotated, both parametric and Kinematic excitation of oscillations i occurring simultaneously Since the aw isnot only displaced by the amount of coventry, but stiffness of the clastic element in the drive Is Slso changing simultaneously in the direction of oscillations ‘The stffoces le changing due to eccentricity im the elastic sloment. “The combined kineinatic and parametric oxcillations of the Jaw are Brought about by the Inertial exciter whose drive shalt [s"natalled inthe bearinge of tho jaw by. means of rotating laste woventric bushingas The single-jaw crusher with such « Grive (igs 23D consiste of « frame 21 In which « moving, 2026 Theory of Vibratory Technology land stationary 25 Jaws are mounted on axis 22 and on the Glastic system 23. It's driven by an unbalanced mast whose. shaft Is Installed in the Jaw In bearings 26 and in frame 21 by means of elastic bushings 27 of variable atffness and bearings 28. When the unbalanced mast is rotating » rotary exciting Toree is created and the stiffness of the clastic system Taking the jaw with the frame is simultaneously changing ‘The most heavily loaded elements of vibratory crushers are the bearing supports of the vibrators, These are acted upon by the centrifugal forces of the rotating unbalanced masors, and Also by impact impulses from the crushed rock. The vibratory ‘rusher with shock-absorbing bearings (Fig. 3) consists of ‘moving Jaws 29 suspended on axes 2! in frame 20. Inertial ‘fbvation ‘excters 32 of the snbulanced-mass type are, in thelr urn, mounted on levers 39 that are suspended with pint 31 00 the crusher frame 30 and connected with the’ jaw 6) slastic links. 35. The frame ofthe crusher Is mounted on the Foundation on shock-absorbing elattic comnectors 36 nthe considered design, the crushing forces are transmitted from the Jaw to the vibrator via elastic elements, fs'a result of which the loade on the beurings of the elements tre significantly reduced, However, in this case, the crushing ‘Tiectiveness becomes dependent on the tuning of the system land can decrease If the crushed material is fed nonuniform. Th vibratory crushers with hinged suspension and rocking motions” of the jawe, the amplitude of oscillations. is small particularly inthe upper section of the jaws. Because of this, tome materiale are not eficenty crushed ‘Vibratory crushers with two-frequeacy jaw oscillations have been developed: high Frequency trotation frequency of the Unbalanced mass of the vibration exciter! with stall amplitude, find low frequency with large amplitude. Such oscilletions are Generated using only one inertia! vibration exciter of the Self-balanced type by suspending the jaw on an eccentric roller Fed with overrunning etch, ‘A vibratory” crusher with one moving jaw and tworFrequency oscillatory motion driven by an Inertlalseccentric system with overrunning clutch (Fig. 3.29 consists of » frame 37 in which @ stationary jw 8 Is mounted, and a moving jw 4G te ‘suspended on an eceentic roller 29 with, overrunning Glutch “40. The lower section of the moving jaw ie connected With the frame by an elastic system 42. The high-frequency ‘scilagory motions are transmitted to the jaw by an inertial bration exciter 4 of the unbelanced-mass type. When the jaw Basic Schematice and Design of Vibratory Machines 227 oscillates, the overrunning clutch turns the eccentric roller 3%, fs result of which the upper end of the jaw performs ‘ow-speed cecillation of sufficiently large amplitude. slong ‘Greular trajectories, The action of ‘tre-frequency ecilatons fon the crushed rock mass reduces the durstion of crushing, ‘Shain a autmber of canes it contributes to redaction of energy ‘consumption on the crushing process ‘Vibratory crushers with three and four moving jaws have ‘been designed, though not, used, in Which the jaws are mounted at an angle of 120% or 90° relative to each other. In thre jm Crushers the moving jaws are suspended by pivote In the frame ‘by means of axes, the lower ends of the jaws being supported fon elastic elements. The oscillatory motion ls lmparted tothe Jaws by hydraule’ vibration exciters. During’ the crushing process the rock Is subjected to three-slded compression, Tt is ‘Assumed that this leads to an increare inefficiency and quality (Of crushing. The crushing forces are transmitted to the feame Since the jaws are mounted on the sides of strangle, these forces. murt be balanced to = significant degree. Since such ‘rushers have not been tested in practice, they cannot be given ‘comprehensive evaluetion. However, it can be conjectured that thelr design would be characterized by significant comple ‘Tworlew vibratory crusher (Fig. 33g) can be of Interest. ‘The moving jane #4 In these crushers are flned with frame, 4S by elastic elements 46. The Jaws are driven by aelf-balanced vibration exelters 47. The crusher frame is isolated from the load-carrying structure "by shock absorbers 18. Vibration ‘cucters tective aynchronoue rotation in opporite directions ee ‘result of which the jw oscillate in entphese, thus crushing the rock that is fed between them, ‘The synchronous, jaw fotation is obtained either by « Kinematic connection of the bration excites shafts or by eatablishing «dynamic tynchronization regime, “The. merit of the conskdered vibratory crusher with ‘wo moving, jaws isthe closure of the crushing forces on the ‘ushed materiel, Connecting the jews with the frame by the iste system provente the direct transmission of the crushing forces to the frame, The horizontal components of the reaction forces from the elastic xyatem to the frame are small en ¢ fesule of trenaresonant tuning of the ayatem and are directed From. each jaw Into opposite. directions, which practically staures their total Balance, In order to prevent transmission of the vertical Torce components as well as of random28 Thoory of Vibratory Technology owcillations, the frame is iaolated from the load-carrying Structure by shock absorbers. The vertical components of the fraction forces in the vibratory crusher ander study) remain Unbalanced, az a reqult of which they ‘contribute to. the ‘sailations of the crusher frame and increase the speed of Inaterial passage (32, 33,34) ‘One of the deficiencies of this type of crusher is the large Jaw opening in some loading regimes. In this case excessive ‘overloading of the elastic system takes place, which causes its accelerated breakdown. To prevent inacceptable opening, © Pueumatic compensating elastic system iz installed between the Jaws and the frame. This system, which has low stiffness, is Capable, without practically” changing the total stffaess of he risher elastic system, of creating sgaicant static Forces that compensate for the constant component of the crushing forces. The pneumatic compensating. system can be equipped with. system of automatic pressure control in. the pneumatic Slinders depending on the magnitude of the outward thrust. I this case. optimum jaw opening is maintained, which provider formal opertting conditions of the cletic system, ‘A vibratory crusher of slmllar design (Fig. 3.8) can be brought into action by « hyéraulie Vibration excter 49 located botweon the moving jaws which are mounted in frame SO by means of elastic elements Si. An advantage of the vibratory Crusher with hydrvulic drive isthe possibilty of «simple Adjustment of frequency ond amplitude of oxcillations of the Crushing jews which enables making adjustments for optimum ‘peretion when the propertics of the “crushed rock change, Furthermore, the absence of Bearings increases the reliability of the vibrator. Thie arrangement, just az the previous one, is characterized by high degree of equllrium ‘of the. dynamic 'A number of modifications of the vibratory crushers with two moving jawe has been developed. In vibratory. crushers with wo moving Jaws and. inertial vibration exciters of the Telfebelanced type ig. 230, the vibration exciters 52 are inked with the crusher jas ia the elastic slemente 53 unlike the bac design ‘consilered above, In order ta. prevent the transmission of impact loads to” the bearings. ‘The. jaws are comected to the frame S¥ by additional elastic links 55. The ‘rusher is sPbratonlaolated from the. load-carrying. eructure by the elastic elements sé Ih a twovjew sibratory crusher of such a design (Fg. 33) impact buffers 40 are installed between the jawe. $7 andthe Basic Schematics and Design of Vibratory Mas vibration encters Si that are connected by the resonant elastic system 59, When crushing a materia of limited hardness, the resonant elastic. system is deformed insignificantly and the buffers do not come into comtact with eech other, Le, crushing fakes” place in the aormal regime. When « partlcwarly hard ‘material ie encountered the Jaws come to ¢ stop, and ar a esult of using an slastic system with resonant taning. the Smplitude of the orcilations of the vibrator increases uot the buffers. collie. Im. the process of buffer collision, large crushing Forces are generated and crushing of particularly hard ‘of the considered design can_be_ recommended for use in special conditions when rocks with sharply varying strength are crushed. Such design Is distinguished by its complenity- The bearing unite of the vibration vexciters are [bjected to conslderable impact load, 1m order to increase the oscilation amplitude of one of the crushing Jaws, to Increase effectiveness) of the. crushing process, and to provide symmetcical loading of the oscillatory iDatem, a tworjw crusher has been developed whereby an Inertial vibration eaciter of the aelf-balanced type is mounted Inthe crushing jw wich In stationary relative to. the fame {hig 3390. A stationary jaw 42 is installed on frame 6h and on Inertial vibration enciter” 63 of the self-balanced type ls mounted inside the stationary law. The moving jaw 6d ix Connected with the frame by elastic elements. 65 ‘The frame is Wibrationiaolated by elastic elements 6. When. the vibration ‘excter is started, the stationary Jw starts to. oscillate Together with the frame. The daplacements of the frame via the elastic elements 65 induce oscillations of the moving, ‘Stiffpenees of the elastic elements of the moving law are 0 flected that the jaws would oscilate in antiphase, In auch = System the amplitudes of jaw oscillation are distributed Inversely. proportionally to thelr mastes. Consequently, the fondrive movable jaw ‘which Is conederably lighter than the tyatem comprising, the’ frame, stationary” jaw, and. ‘vibration frciter would perform ocllstlons with subreanilly larger ‘The merit of this arrangement, In sddtion to the possibilty "of creating large oscillation amplitudes of the ‘movable jaw, i use of only one vibration exciter” which Considerably simplifies the design of the vibratory crusher.20 ‘Theory of Vibratory Technology. To create a possibilty of simultaneous crushing of several products or crushing of one product to afferent grain. sees, fand also ensuring the symmetrical loading of the orillatory system, jaw crushers with several crushing chambere have best developed. Inthe vibratory’ crusher” with two crusis ‘chambers, two stationary jews 67 are mounted on frame 66 (Fig. 3.30. One swinging jaw 69 with two crushing. surfaces It also. mounted om the same frame via the clastic system. 68 Oscillations. are imparted to the movable jaw by the inertial self-balanced vibration excler 70. Such a crusher “design eliminates idling stroke of the crushing Jaw. since with each stroke of che jaw in any direction the matoril in the corresponding working space of the crusher le crushed. However, this crusher design te unbalanced. x ult of which the frame performs significant oscillations. The ‘ommetrcal loading of the cruching Jaw increases the stability Gf the crushing process as well at more uniform losding. of the: drive and’ of the loid-bearing structural elements. The other advantage of the crusher is a aced for anly one vibration ‘excter Ar a result, It design le simplified, since there ie no longer a need for a'devie to ayachronize vibration excites, However, unbalance of the loads on the frame causes the transmission of the “dysamie loads to” the load-carrying structure of the inatelletion in which the crusher ia. Being ied ‘A reduction of the level of dynamic loads transmitted to the load-carrying structure ie. achieved in. vibration-looleed twovchamber crusher. The crusher (Fig. 2.bm) conste of bration. isolating frame 71 mounted on. a load-carrying Structure on shock-sbeorbing “elastic connectors 72. The Working frame of the crusher 74 iz mounted on the vibration Teolating frame by means of the clastic elements 7 Two thin Jie 76 (anda central jaw 78 between. them on "elastic Slomonts 77) are mounted on the working frame by teane of lactic elements 75. A self-balance type Inertial vibrator 7 imparts oscillations to the central jaw in the horizontal plane, Oscillations 0 the side paired jaws are transmitted from the working frame 74 sia elastic elements 75 Just as in the previous design, loads on the working frame are Found to. be asymmetrical “due to the presence of two Crushing chambers. However, due to the fact that the working Trame is connected with the vibration Isolating frame by elastic lements, only Insignificant dynamic forces are transmitted to the Tond-carrying structure Basic Schematics and Design of Vibratory Machines 231 ‘The vibratory crusher with three crushing. chambers (Fig 3.3m) has two movable jaws 80 mounted with the aid of elastic loments 81 in frame 82 and two stationary jaws i The jaws fre driven by self-balanced inertial vibrators 84. The Uhree-chamber vibrator) crusher is more stable than tworchamber crusher; however, structurally Wt is mich more "The crushers under consideration operate In the material crushing mode under vibration and vibro-impact actions with the exception of the vibratory crusher in Fig. 3d operating in the regime of two-frequency sciletions of the jews). The ‘quest for rationslization of the process of rock-mase crushing {ave birth to a series of fundamentally new approaches in the ‘evelopment of vibratory crusher designs, In the. already ‘mentioned two-frequenc) crusher, one cam reduce the Losses of overcoming fiction forces. Reduction of the frictional loses le liso goel in "crushers in which elastic materials are Incorporated In the design of the working surfaces. A design fof a wibratory crusher with segmented rt has been Gevetoped. in which bendlng stresses are. generated In the crushed rock mats ‘The Wibratory crusher jaw with elastic ayers consists of frame in which. layers’ from elastic material with metallic Yleanized “inserts are. fied. Oncillations of the crushing Surfaces of the jaws are effected. by means. of periodic pumping of the Working medium under them or appling Compressed lr with the aid of «regulator. ‘The ment of lactic jaws I their light weight and, hence, lower dynamic fonts, the, possibilty of executing large atvoken and. the replacement of the friction forces af the few agtinet_the rack se the site of formation of destructive cracks. by forces of Slastic strain in the elastic jay materiel. Elimination of the Tictional forote reduces the forces crested In the. process of fracture of the crushed caterial, thus increasing, in the foal analysis, the crushing effectiveness. rot the elimination of the friction Forces on the Jaw with the formation of destructive cracks, composite elastic coating of ordinary crushing Jews can be used. The coating comprises Glastic material In which spheres are vulcanized. The elastic outing is fixed tothe crushing surface of the jew. The Spheres can be vuleanized im suck « way thet either they come Into contact with the jaw surface or a gep remains between them. In the presence of a gap, the spheres impact on the jaw luring the process of crushing, the impact impulse ieom ‘Theory of Vibratory Technology Uransmitted to the material, and the effectiveness of the crashing process is Increased. ‘The proposed vibratory crusher designs are advanced designs; however, In order to inske elastic. jams and. clastic costings with the necessary” strength, formidable techalal problems must be overcome. The lack of experience door not fnable one to evaluate possibilities for application of this ‘design in the near Future Tn a number of designe of vibratory crushers there are various additional devices which are excited by the vibration of the main crusher elements, Such devices ensure, for emamples tniform supply of the crushed rock mars to the crushing chamber, delivery of fines and loading of the crushed material fonto conveyer belts, recirculation of uncrushed places, and screening out of the quality product. For the uniform delivery of the rock to the work crushing chamber, and also to provide preliminary screening of the fines, special designs of sbratory crushert have. been Proposed. A vibratory crusher with feed chutes for uniform faterial supply to the crushing chamber has been built using the basic model of Fig. 33. Loading chutes are mounted on the frame of the crusher” via elastic slements. Under the frame bration, the grates oucllate, thus facilitating the iform Gelivery of the material to the crushing chamber. By varying Inclination of the chutes, the loading capacity of the crusher can be regulated 1A single-jaw vibratory crusher-tcreen has been proposed which is Intended Yor crushing off side rocks and preliminary ereening of the fines upon lowding the crushed: material onto the conveyer belt. The Nbratory crusherscreen consate Of grate screen which Ie ‘mounted “with. elastic elements. The Enishing jaw with an inertiel vibration excter ia attached to the top of the grate screen by means of an elastic system. The frame of the vibratory crusher-sereen la mounted on the metal structure of = line conveyer by shock absorbers. Upon delivery Of « Toad of rock. mass to the grate screen, the fines seep through the openlags and. the oversize rocks’ are crushed by the jaw and loaded in crashed Form from the grate screen onto the conveyer belt. ’As a drive for jew vibratory crushers one can use inertial hydraulic, and. eccentric vibration excters, and alo vibration Cxclters of a new type for the generation of puremetic ‘eellaions of jaws, Basic Schematics and Design of Vibratory Machines 213 ‘The other types of vibratory crushers suitable for crushing In stationary) and mobile plants include rotary and. cone crushers "The rotary crusher with eccentric drive (Fig. 34a) consists of frame Ton which stationary or spring-supported with elastic ements 2 jave J are Installed. A rotor 4 Is mounted between the jaws on elastic ‘eccentrice & The cruthing element la a ‘lindcieal roller & which can, rotate freely on beings. Two ‘rushing chambers are formed between the color and side jews With the rotation of the driving eccentric shaft, the rotor performs circular oscillations” and crushes the rock mass Slternstely in one chamber then In the other. Since the tffnees of the elastic eccentrics ix different in aifferent Giections, parametric oscillations which are. distinguished by high stability under the action of substantial loads are induced In adation to forced ocilations. “The cone vibratory crusher with an inertial drive (Fig. 3.48) conslate of three main snts: bowls 7 rigidly connected to frame fj a crushing cone 9, and an unbalanced mass 10. An jectrical motor spins the unbalanced moss vie 4 drive shaft ‘with two Cardan Joints and a spline connection. The shaft of the unbalanced mass is mounted in two bearings. The cone Is Connected with the bowl by & spherical joint 1. The bow! and the frame are vibrationisolated with the aid of lerods oF ‘springs "The centrifugal force of the unbalanced mass presses the crushing cone to the surface of the bow imparting tit Totetional motion. With thie, the axis of the crushing cone Geviates from the ans of the frame and performs cicular ‘scilations ar a result of which Ineril forces are_genereted, {ifering from the inerual forces of the unbalanced. mass on the stationary axis, Under the action of the inertial forces, the ‘cone slowly rotates in the opposite direction around Its axis nd rolle slong the surface of the bow! crushing the products Inthe reglon of spprosch between the cone and the bowl. The Clearance between the cone and the bowl can be equal to zero Inthe case of direct contact (ling) and can reach a certal Yalue depending om the properties of the crushed rock mass The changes. in. the crushing force are larger the more substantial the deviation of the cone axis from the ‘crusher thls during rotation. Az e reoult of thls, the increase of the Initial clenrance toa certain value leads to. an. Increase of usher capacity and to a decrease in grain sine. of the final Product. However, ths Is true only up to a certain limit. Fora Theory of Vibratory Technology pag = 3 very large inital clearances the regime of spinning motion is Aistorted and crushing of the material might be halted ltogether. If the crushing force which is generated by the Unbalanced mass and the frame is not adequate for crushing, the cone is jammed and stops rolling. although the balanced mass will continue to. Treely rotate’ inside the cone Furthermore, the centrifugal force of the unbalanced mate will cause small oscillations of the cone az a result of which some Jamming chunks are ‘rushed, fresing the cone, During. this Deriod, crushing results in large grain-size product. A similar Phenomene is observed under excessive Tecding of the crusher, ‘Therefore. the crusher” must’ not be overloaded above the cidmissible capacity limit. otherwise the’ normal. regime of spinning operation is disrupted Vibratory cone crushers of diferent design concepts have been developed. They have elther rectilinear laplacements of the cones or cone oscillations slong 's helical line. The vibratory crusher” with inertial drive imparting rectilinear fntiphase oscillations in the vertical direction to. both conet (Fig. Sc) consists of external 12 and. internal 2 movin crushing cones. Am annular crushing chamber having. changing rose section along Ite height Ia formed between the cones ‘The internal and external cones are mounted on the frame by means of elastic cloments 14 and 1S The frame it supported Basic Schematics and Design of Vibratory Machines 255, fon the load-eaftying structure via amortizing mounts 16. Mounted om the internal and external cones are the unbalanced masses 17 and 18 connected to each other by the Cardan shafts 1 and operating. in antiphase, The crusher le equipped with Ioading bin and discharge hopper ‘When’ the unbalanced sibration excler rotates, the crushing cones oscillate In antiphase, crushing the material ‘eliveed between them from the londing bin. The crusher ls ‘sloquately balanced, since the reactions of the elastic element ‘of the moving cones on the frame are approximately equal In ‘agniade and opposite in direction ‘The ibratory jaw crusher” with eccentric drive which imparts oncillations to he internal tmoving cone in a hellcal line Is shown in Fig. 3d, Such oscillations of the crushing ‘cone increase the effectiveness of rushing az «result of formation of shear strane in the chunks of the crushed tnaterial. The crusher consists of a frame 20 on which an ‘external cone 2/ ls rigidly mounted. An internal moving cone 23 In mounted on the frame by means of elastic elements 22. The ‘laste elements 22 are arranged along. the perimeter of the Conee at an angle to their vertical” avs. Oscillations are lmparted to the moving cone by an eccentric vibration exciter 24 with driving slastic connection. The crusher can be mounted fon the carrying structure either rigidly or om elastic elements % Vibeatory conveying machines are widely used or the movement of bulk and. lump loads ia. various. industeies Process-conveying machines, which also execute load processing im the course of conveying, are also widely developed (ying. Gust removal, clasification, granulation, dewstering, and. 0 ‘on. Vibratory’ conveying. machines include vibratory conveyer feeders and. screen-feeders, and alzo elevators and. batching dosating hoppers. ‘Conveyers and feeders of standard designs for the movement of bulk and lump loads are the most widespread {sper of vibratory conveying, machines. They are datingutshed Dy the wide diversity of fundamental and” structural designs tnd are produced for different capacities. For the movement of20 Theory of Vibratory Technology loads in the vertical direction, elevators are used (conveyers With helical load-carrying element) In view of the fact that the principal design features of ibratory conveying machines are determined by the type of rive used in them, the schematic arrangements are considered with respect tothe following five types. electromagnetic, DProumati inertial, eccentric, and hydruli, The schematic diagrams of such machines are arranged In f sequence determined by = sumber characterizing. the number of actually used degrees of freedom lectromagnetic vibratory conveying machines are divided Into singleedrive and’ multicdrve machines, Single-drive ‘machines can be ones, wor, and. "threesmast machines ‘multipledrive machines can be one- or tuliple-mass machines (ig. 45). The structural layout of & one-mase,cleciromegnetic ‘machine Is shown in Fig. 332 [eis comprised of the following Clements: a load-carrying element 1 to which the active section Dot the electromagnetic vibrator Is attached and lastic Connections 3 connecting. the active section’ with the reactive Section which is fixed on the frame, Oscillations ofthe load-carrying element ate excited and meintained by the place ff the electromagnetic vibrator. The main components of the frovmare system (Fg. 3.56) are: & load-carying slement. 1, to which’ "the ‘electromagnetic Wbrator Is attacked, comprising Rete 2 and. reactive f ‘sections with builtin. elatie Connections. “The vibratory machine ia. iolated from the load-carrying structure by means of islating mounts 5 The aingle-drive three-mast clectromagnetic device consists of the following components (Fig. 3.50 load carrying lement T with active section 2 of vibrator and reactive section 6 of vibrator with elastic connections, reactive mass 7, auxiliary ‘working elastic conections J, #, and isolator 8 For reversing of the motion, special drive ie used comprising two vibrators oscillating in mutually. perpendicular frctions: The reversible ‘machine (Fig. 35d consists of the components: load-carrying element 1 with gill attached Sctive parts of the vibrators, reactive parts of two Wbrstore, 2 ‘with elastic commections J and vibration isolators Conveying machine with dynamic vibration absorber mounted on the reactive section of the vibrator belongs to, the troup of three-mass machines, Wibration abatement. of the Feactve section of the wibrator enables reduction of the Clearance between the poles of the electromagnets thereby Increasing. the output power of the drive. ‘The machine (ig. Baric Schomatica and Design of Vibratory Machines 237 Meus 25 Schematic diagrams of vibratory conveying and 35e) consists of « load-carrying clement 1 with the active Section of the Mibrator rigly attached to it, main clastic System 2 linking the active section of the vibrator with the Feactive section J, and dynamic vibration absorber ‘comprising the reactive: masa’ ¢ which iy linked with the reactive. section ‘of the vibrator by the elastic connections 5. The load-carrying ‘loment ig mounted on the supporting structures by means of Tnolators ‘The muliple-drive multiple-mass machine (Fig. 350 has & load-carrying element on which number of electromagnetic = 2 with elaatic connections 3 are mounted, the machine fd from the support structures by mounts 4 ‘Proumatic vibratory conveying. machines are characterized by the small number of types avilable and are ueually made 4s single-dsive, "since the existing designs of pneumatic ‘orators do not allow synchronization of their operation. "The single mass machine with an active pneumatic vibrator contains a loed-carrying clement, to which force impulses are Imparted bys pneumatic vibrator, mounted on the foundation tnd chustic connections, The two-mass, machine with piston Feactive pneumatic vibrator includes « load-carrying slement, imhich a piston pneumatic vibrator consiating. of active tectlon (Gytinder and reactive section (piston! is attached, and clastic2 ‘Theory of Vibratory Technology ‘connections. The piston under the action of compressed alr performs reciprocating motions. Due to. reactive force kenerated in this process periodic pulses are imparted tothe load-carrying element which induce and’ maintain ies osellations Eecentre conveying machines have an clastic element in the drive for developing the necessary mobility in the dynamic “The fundamental arrangements of machines with hydraulic Grives "are analogous “to machines with eccentric deve, The single mass machine (Fig. Sta) conelats of load-carrying flement 1 mounted on foundation 2 ty meant of elstic connections “4 oscillations are imparted to the. load-carrying ‘lement by en eccentric drive 4 with clastic connecting Fed Machines of this type are slatingushed ty their simple design; however, due to the fact tht the inertial forces of the foscillating messes are not balanced, ther drive ie subjected to the action of large dynamic Toads. The high energy. consumed In overcoming the harmful resistances acting in the system is nother daadvantage, in order to unload the drive and eliminate transmission of ynamie Toads to the supporting structures, ressnance,balenced oratory machines are used. The machine thown in Fig. 360 is Supported in a stationery point of the system, Eccentric drive Js mounted on an oscillating mass, The mechine consists of two Toad-carying elements or of one load-carrying, element Ganda” reactive, mass, eccentric drive 2 working clastic Connections J and support columas 4, which are affixed to the Statonary polot of the entire system. ‘The most widely used. presently are resonant. balanced two-mass system installations. The vibration isolated. machine with parallel arrangement of the ovcllating, masses (Fig. 2.60) Consists of » lond-eurryng clement J and. reactive. ase, 2 Imounted opposite each other, eccentric drive f with elastic Connecting rod, ‘working slastic.connectort and. vibration Isolators 5, with which the reactive mess is lolated from the Tn a two-mass machine with & series arrangement of the oscillating. masses (Fig. Se) the load-carrying elements are Srranged one after the other. The sccentric vibrator 2 imparts force pulses to them in opposite directions se. result of Which the losd carrying elements supported om the foundation ja elastic mounts 3 oscillate in antiphase. Such a design Basic Schematics and Design of Vibratory Machines i a i20 ‘Theory of Vibratory Technology ‘ensures balancing of the horizontal components of the inertial Forces ‘A more complete balancing is attained in machines with « series-parallel arrangement of the ocilating, masses” (Fg, 2ibe). Each is comprised from load-cartying. elements, 1 and uoilary beats 2 which are rigidly connected with each other by te-rode The oscillating. masa is so. arranged thatthe fila ‘beam of the second lond-aryng slemant would be tinder the fist Toadcarying element. The’ load-carrying slements and aunilary beems are supported on the. bedframe via the working elastic connections The unit is driven by an eccentric vibrator 5 whose connecting rods are linked ‘with Tn the three-mass machine (Fig. 369 with «series srrangement of the load-carrying elements I and with eccentric 2. the load-carrying elements are supported with the aid le connections) om the counter balancing, frame ibich Is Isolated from the supporting structures by isolators & Drive Is effected by an eccentric vibrator connected with one of the lond-carrying elements, In three-mass. machine with a parallel arrangement of the load-carying elements and eccentric drive (Fig. 3g), the load-carrying elements 1 ere supported by tlastic connections, 2 fon the counter balancing frame J which is isolated from the Supporting structures by vibration isolators, One of the load-carrying elements is driven by an eccentric sibrator S Oscillations are reactively imparted to the second load-car7ying sloment. Large vibrator) conveying machines are often designed fs four-mass systems comprising two twovmass sections (hi, 34h and 7h. The drive is installed on only one. section, while the second section is driven reactively, The four-mess, machine with “eccentric drive consist of two. sections. Each “section Consists of load-carrying eloment support columne. 2. 2 Feactive mass J Uamel mounted on ioolators hand. working ‘lastic connections 5 the frames of both sections are Joined together by a tie-rod; drive is sffocted by means of eccentric ibrator 6 mounted on one of the sections ‘An advantage of machines of this structural schematic is ‘he feasibility of making inatallations of « considerable length ‘The system allows a simple transmission of the exciting force vin connecting tera, ‘tm vibratory machines with inerua drives with directional rectilinear and rotational eeiting forces are used, in the Singlesdrive™ single mass machine with inertial drive the Basic Schematics and Design of Vibratory Machines 241 load-carrying element is mounted on the foundation with the sid of elastic connections. Oacllations are imparted tot by an inertial vibrator ‘The single-mass vibratory conveying machine with Inertial drive which le supported at 1 stationary point of the system consists of two load-carrying elements connected with each ther by elastic links and. by the housing of the inertial Mibrator’ with displaced “unbalanced masses. Support of the yatem at the stationary point om the loed-carying Trame cam be either direct or via tolator. ‘The two-mass Inertial vibratory conveping_ Installation consists of a load-carrying. element, vibrator, working elastic Connections, and vibration isolators: a special heaby frame or the vibrator Itself can serve as the reactive mass. The design fof vibratory conveying machines In accordance with the two-mass structural arrangement afford great opportunities for {rotting resonant. inatellations with. wbration leolation and ‘namie balancing of the oscillating masses, Th the three-mass. vibratory ‘conveying. Installation with Inertial drive, the load-carrying. elements are. supported by ‘means of elastic linke on a caring. frame. Which Is Isolated from the supporting. structures by. vibration isolators. ‘The machine Is driven by 4 vibrator which is rigidly attached to the carrying frame ‘The multimass machine has a carrying frame on which = load-carrying. element is mounted with the slastic links. The frame is vibration-isolated by shock absorbers, and the machine Is riven by relf-rynchronizing vibrators ‘The multi-mass machine consists of load-carrying ‘lement to which longitudinal oscillations are Imparted by an Inertia vibrator with rectilieariy directed ‘exciting. force. The tmachine iz supported on the foundation by means of Thock-sbsorbing elastic links, In order to impart oscillations to the load-carrying elemeat, reactive masses with elastic linke fae mounted along the element and at an angle to. its Tongitudinal axe "The working cloments of the vibratory process-conveying machines have different designs according to their destination, famely for conveying, batching, end processing operations. Conveying working elements are made as tubes and troughs (chutes) which can be either open of closed. The working ements intended for batching are. very dlverse: with wide ‘hte, diagonal slot which le cut at an angle by the dcherge finn, maltiple-trough, and #0 on20 Theory of Vibratory Technology The most diverse are the working elements for process ‘operations. Vibratory dryers use conductive and convective. heat ‘tansfer, drying In infrared rays, In electceal ield of industrial for high’ frequency: # combined drying method. ie. sleo used Incorporating several of these methods of heat tranafer. Dring inthe vibratory bolling layer It an extremely lffective process: the process of "cooling is “alzo equally ftfectve. In vibratory units with conductive action, in which heat input’ into the product or heat removal Is. effected through the surface ‘of the heat exchanger, the working lement is made in the Form of sealed unit having double walle between which flows the cooling or drying. medium, tn this respect. their design Is. similar to the structure of the Toad-carring elements of vibratory conveyors, which are Intended Tor the movement of hot products, The conductive method of fest tranafer has a number of vantages, since the Working chamber in this caso can be completely isolated from the heat carrier Drying can be ceried out et low velocities of the gaz flowing over the layer at low pressures and in vacuum, “The vaporizing” lguld can be recycled into the food process line. Comparative experimental investigations on drying ronuiated sugar in plate, drum, and vibratory dryers with conductive heating showed’ that drying ins vibratory boling layer is 2 ~ 3 times faster and, furthermore, lower final humidity of the product is attained. In convective. action units the processed product comes Into contact with the cooling or heating stream’ of alr oF gat ‘which simultaneously play roles of both « heat carrier and ¢ Gesiccants Accordingly the Working elements of vibratory dryers snd coolers of this tps" can be arranged without” special Iackets Since the materials must te spread in» thin. uniform Inver in order to provide high-quality drying, working. elements with very low side walls are used In vibeotory dryers the drying agent Ie. blown over the layer oF through the layer of the processed product. Inthe first case the agent is moved in a counter current to, with the ‘current, or perpendicular to the divection of the Flow of the product. In units of the second type the flow of the agent can be directed from bottom to top or from top to bottom: ‘Gas Flow over the layer Is mainly used for rapidly drying producte which are moved in vibratory dryers in a thin layer Drying of the products that give away molsture slowly Is carried out in-a thick layer through which the agent Is blown, Basic Schematics and Desiga of Vibratory Machines 243 In this care, hest-transfer processes and the structure of the vibratory boiling layer” are Improved (the oiling process Is Ineensiie. Im convective action vibratory dryers, in which the drying medium Is blown through the layer of the processed products in order to Increase the. process effectiveness, double-bottom working elements are used. The second bottom ls made with Cranaverse louver-like slots through whlch is passing alr OF $08 moving in the channel between the bottoms. ‘The whole ‘working element Is hermetically sealed, which eliminates loases Of the deying medium ‘The structural designe of the working clement of the vibratory ayers are shown in Fig. 37. The dejer (Fig. 37a) Consiate of « fat bottom J under which there is a chennel 2 Song which the hot medium (water or ai) mover, The dryer ix covered by enclosure J with. loading’ and. discharge ‘eninge. The vaporized molsture together with the hot Femoved through opening & The lection ‘of the. motion of Inater vepors ia indkated by broken arrows, and the rectilinear Irarmonie oscillations of the worklng element with ampitude find. frequency w are shown bye continuous arrow. It is pertinent to. note that along with the rectilinear bermonic Secilations, the working ‘element can perform more complex frcilatery ‘motions: biharmonic, polyharmonic, and two- and Ghree-component oscillations, Such oscillations weually ensure high efficiency of the deyng process. Vibratory dryers with, the | conductive method of hest-tranafer to the processed product are widely used in food broduction, eg for drying granulated sugar. Heaters can also bbe arranged as a system of tubes imbedded in the layer of the processed product transversely or longitudinally to. ts Sisplacement. Low pressure vapor, products of fuel combustion, heated aie, or electric heaters are usally used to heat the product. Drying granulated suger end flour in the vibration boiling. layer under ‘conductive heat input into the product Slows sharply reducing its lorser From the working chamber hd drying to’ # low final humiley under high intensity of the moisture evaporation process. Tt lao ensures uoiform drying of the Flour and excludes formation of particle sggregates. When the duration of travel of the product over the Installation Ise than the time of the process cycle, several unite Installed in series or cascade aerangements are uaed “The utilization of vibration —oting layer subatantially reducing the total consumption of lr needed to28 ‘Theory of Vibratory Technology eure 37 Working Basle Schomatics and Design of Vibratory Machines 245 create the suspended (boiling) layer; aswell, the heat ‘expenditures on the drying process are reduce ‘The working clement. of the convective dryer whose bbotsom ie made as a gauze 7, through which the heated alr is ‘supplied by channel 8, le shown in Fig 276. After’ pacsing Through the layer of the processed product which tein vibratory ‘oiling stats, the hot air with moisture vapore are ‘exhausted through opening % The product ie supplied through door 10 and the dried mass Is removed through the dlacharge opening 1 Tae bottom of the working clement of the dyer can be designed as louvers 12 (Fig. 370 or as a stepped surface 12 Vibratory dryers and coolers with external sources of heat or of cooling medium (Fig. 37e) are alzo used. The product be dred ts supplied via opening 14 to the working element 1S nd ls Intensely suspended under the action of vibration while ‘moving gradually to the discharge opening 16 Drying of the product {s carried out by infrared heaters 7 with quartz tubes 48 or by other heaters mounted rigidly on the stationary non-nbrating parts of the dryer. Vibratory conveyance of the processed product In coolers la effected over the surface of the trough. The duct formed by the double bottom ts used to supply the cooling agent to. the {rough surface, which Is im contact with the processed product. Granulated products are effectively” cooled “upon removal of heat from the trough by sprinkling cold water on ite lower srface. The sprinkler system comprises @ collector 19 and nozzles 20 from which water Io sprayed onto the lower surface (Of the trough 21 (Fig. 370. The principal benefit of such s system compared with water jeckete te the following: the ‘cooling water efor absorbing the hest from the ‘rough flows own to the bottom of the duct and fresh cold. water Is ‘supplied. continuously. If the processed product allows diect Contact with the water, the sprinkler system comprising the ‘collector and nozzles In mounted above the convesing, tough, In similar” vibratory Installations the product canbe washed, dewatered, granulated, and subjected £0 other ‘ypes of process operations. The working element of the installation {executing @ Whole complex of process operations (seperation, Grying, and 40 on) consista of © number of chambers whose bottoms are made from mesh with various openings, Thus, the ‘humid product delivered through door 29. is dewatered in chamber 27 on mesh screen 24 and the separated. moisture is246 “Theory af Vibratory Technology, curred away through the dlicharge channel 25. The dewatered product Is fed successively Into chambers 24, 27, 28, and. 29 Wibich are sepsrated from each other by partitions 20, 3, 32 nd 33. (ig. 3.7). The predrying medium (hot ale) with Zpecified various temperatures moves from the top downwards through reducers (confusors) 4, 35, 96 and ts sucked out through the oulet tube 37 Along with the process of eying, ‘aust removal from the product ie algo carried out by screening J through a mesh bottom. Dust-like Iractions of various classes afe removed through openings 38 and 3 Vibratory granulators and mixers (Fig. 37H are. wil used. The trough-thaped working. slement hat a stepped ‘bottom and each step has sharp teeth on the discharge end Sich "a design enstrea intensive. mining of the. processed Product and helps to obtain « homogeneous mixture. 3.4 VIBRATORY ELEVATORS The movement of loads vertically upwards which can be simultaneous with thelr processing Is. effected. by vibratory Drocessing conveying machines with screw-shaped working foment. “These are. divided with respect to thelr_ Inended Durpose, into tives main types: vibratory elevators: designs In Which the transported product is subjected to” processing: Feeding, accumulating, and batching units Uibratory hoppers, feeders, batchers. Fig. 30a shows a schematic of @ one-mass vibratory elevator with electromagnetic dive. It ‘compres. 2 working flement I mounted on the supporting structure by means of feactive section 5 is freely suspended on an clastic s)stem Imports oscillations to the working, clement in the vertical direction. The vertical oscillations of the vibrator are converted into torsionel-transationl nilations ofthe working element far result of Inclination of the principal extremal. stiffoess Gis of the clastic system at an angle to the vertical axe of the ubeatory elevator. Tn some designs of vibratory elevators the reactive. mass of the resonant. vibrator is rigidly mounted on the machine Toundation. The elastic system te attached at the same location and iz made in the form of springs arranged around the Working element at an angle to its longitudinal axe. Figure Basic Schematics and Design of Vibratory Machines 247 CY = . ee ‘ i = : Be nee £ Aa cy gure 28 Schematic diagrams of vibratory slevator 38b shows the layout of the levator in which the Slectromagnetie sibrator Imparte oscillations tthe working Slement at an angle to ite longitudinal axl, The elevator onsiate of “a working’ element. 6 suspended bs vibration Ieolating system 7 from the supporting structure. In order to provide symmetry of the excking force, two or three vibratore fre installed on the working element. The active sections 8 of the vibrators ave attached to the working. element. end. the ‘loments 10.218 Theory of Vibratory Technology Resonance vibratory elevators with electromagnetic drive ‘re usually small in size and limited in power, in thie case the ‘lastic oscillations of the working element are insignificant and pose no danger to Its reliability. [t must be born in mind chat In vibratory elevators with elGetrom drives, elastic focilations are” particularly intensive, since the’ natural OF the structure are close to the forcing ‘Generating drives of various basic designs (ase chapter 4) fare more widely used In hoary installations, Figure. 3.8¢ depicts the layout of an elevator with motor-vibrator drive. ‘The unit consists of a working element If suspended on shock-absorbing working links 12. to which owcillations are imparted. by Imotoribrators 13. They are used in clusters of two. or three Im order to. generate symmetric exciting foree and exciting torque. Figure 38d shows the lajout of a vibratory slevator With special vibrator with four or six unbolanced ‘maser Which generate an exciting force directed along the axis of the Working element and an exciting torque around this exis: The levator consists of & working element /4 suspended Irom the anrying structure by means of shock-absorbing elastic links 15, ‘vith the frame of the inertial vibrator, being ighdly fined to the lower part of the load-carrying element. ‘The exciting Force and torque that are roqulred to. drive the elevator can be fonerated by a tworjint (double) pendulum vibrator. The Schematic diagram” of 4 vibratory elevator with, double Pendulum vibrator Ie ahown in Fig. 3c, where 1? ie the ‘working’ element, 18 are the. shock-absorbing. link, and. 19 is the pendulum ibrator Elevators with slongated working elements can be designed with "resonetors which reduce stresses In the struccural componente, ‘The schematic diagram of” =. oratory Slevator with Inortist drive and resonators is shows’ in Rg SF It consists of working element 20, which Iz suspended trom or resting on the shock abvorbing elastic link 2 At the lower cone an inertial wibrator 22 Is fied to. che working slement. The vibrator generates a rectilinear exciting Force fcting slong the vertical axis of the elevator. Along. the working element resonators are mounted with s specified pitch They Include springs 29 which are inclined to. the. working tevinge by the. elastic links 25. The vibrator. imparta tothe Working element oscillations which excite vibrations of masses 21 of the resonators along the axis of spring 25. The reecve Basic Schematics and Design of Vibratory Machines 249 forces from deformations of the elastic links are transmitted to the working element via springs. The horizotal components of these forces create excting torques around the axle of the load-carrying element. The oscillatory system of the elevator Is tuned to the resonance regime. at Which the motions of the active masees of the resonstore and the lowd-oarying element fre In antiphase, The resonant mode of operation easblee” one {0 design elevators with substantially long working elements ‘Thin ie explained by the face that dangerous elastic torsional oscillations of the working element ae reduced when exciting torques are. uniformly ditributed. along the height of the Installation. The sufficiently high longitudinal rigaity of the working element le rationally utilized as a force-transmitting lement for” transmituing. longitudinal oscillations with thelr {ubsequent transformation into torsionl oscillations Vibratory elevators with eccentric drives are also sed ‘The latter enables generation of” large. smplivudes of the Uworking clement and’ reduction of the. excitation frequency, thie achieving & better detuning from the structural natural Frequencies, “The smaller acting. accelerations. enable. bringing Into motion a unie of larger mass by the eccentric drive. The layout of such an elevator is shown in Fig 38g. It comprises central stationary column 26 mounted on bed 27 on which « Gocble comecting-vod eccentric. drive 29 ie mounted with Connecting rade 2” and 30 attached on the ides of the trorking element 31. The connecting rode are mounted on an (econrle thafe whose ecoontcic are daplaced by 100° relative fo cach other. The load-carrying element of the elastic system [le fined. to the centee! column and tthe bed by. the inclined connecting rade 33, which determine the direction of fwcllations, “The “connecting rods must not necessarily” be mounted in the direction of oscillations of the working Slement. and can even. be arranged. horizontally (Fig” 38 Figure 38) shows the layout of vibratory elevator whose sccentric drive 24 imparts vertical oscillations to the working “lement 35 mounted on bed J with the aid of the directional lactic. ayetem 37. The necessary. translational and. angular Sscllatione of the working slement are. generated 8) using an Slastic system whose maximum stiffness ais is dvected at an ingle to fongitudinal axis of the. working. slement. The Uibratory elevators hove a rigid clastic system and eccentric rive, which together transfer the ‘total inertial Toad tothe Toundation, “To. prevent. this from happening, designe of twormase resonance vibrator" elevators with eccentric. drives250 “Theory af Vibeatory Technology have been developed. The layout of such an levator is lMusteated in Fig. 38%, 1 consists of the working element 39 tnd the balancing frame 99 on which ‘eccentric drives 40 are ‘mounted. The working element and the frame are connected by the elastic system 4 which provides directional oscillations of the working element. The balancing frame and working element fre mounted onthe foundation with the sid. of vibration Taotating Tinks Vertical vibratory procers-conveying machines are very effective in the realization of many process operations, they fceupy small working areas, and have = working slement of Considerable length ‘The basic designs of working elements of vibratory slovators ate presented in Fg 39. In order to carry out the operations of separation combined with the elevation of Granulated products, the working element (Pig. 98) fe made as Stwoventry helical trough, with a screening, working surface 2 placed on the upper helical surface 1. and the trough has Continuous surface ¥ on the lower hellal surface. where the fcreened product is collected and transported, Should there be {3 oed, separation Into three classes can be achieved (ax In a ‘worscreet grizzly). In this case’ the working element ls made asa three-entry helit: two helical troughs: with a screening Surface and one with sold surface, “The vertical vibratory grizsly differs favorably from the fovainary grilys irstly, it enables carrying. out separation on ery extended surfaces on the limited areas of Industral Ballangs, which ensures high separation quality and enables realizing high output per unit area of the screening surface, Secondly, the design of the working element allows dcherging the product below or above the screen at any. point within, the conveying height which facilitates the use of the machine in Any processing layout of food production ‘When carrying out processing of granulated products In liquide, the lower part of the working clement Is pleced In receptace filled with the processing medium (Fig. 3.98). As the iranulated product climbs’ up the helical trough, it comes ut Of the liglid. and in’-moving ‘upwards along the trough it Smulteneously becomes ree of the liquid. For more effective Separation of the processing liquid and for the dewatering of the prodicts « slotted screen Is. placed on the trough of the ‘working element is made with perforations (Pg. 390. In this Gare the machine. plays the role of dewatering grizzly. or levator. The dewatering process can also be carried out 2s gure 39, Working elements of wbratony elevators ‘without special screens or perforations, In this case the Nirface of the helical trough la inclined toward the tubular Gervsing column 2 in which holes Jvare made (Fig. 39}. The Separated liguid flows In the radial direction to the joining. of place the trough and the tube, then moves dowaward and into the tubular column through the holes. ‘Vertical vibratory process-conveying machines can successfully combine conveying with the process operations of ‘ning oF cooling of granulated products. The layout and the Inethode of carping aut. product, processing by heat carrier ‘an be very diverse. depending on the specific conditions and ite physicomechanical properties. Heat-carrying. agents can flow Im a countercurrent in the space betwoen the lower surface of the trough andthe upper free surface of the product (Fg 359, be drained. through, perforations. inthe bottom of the trough, and then penetrate the layer” of the moving product (Fig. 392), penetrate the product where It is poured ut from fone segment of the stepped extended compartmental trough to Shother (Fig. 39H), best or cool the surface of the trough, andase “Theory of Vibeatory Technology thus the product as it moves In the helical gas duct adjacent fo the trough (Fig. 39H. Ie la essential to note that in all the eseribed design varations the efficiency of drying or cooling Increases substantially due to intensification of heat transfer I the vibration boiling layer ‘The operation of compuction of various granular media ix used to Increase the degree of tilzation of various tanks and containers and also to strengthen sorse products, Considered below are installations for compuction af granular media, in Containers or bales. of ttansported loads in rolling stack (cars, trailers, and so on! and compaction of core and. mold sands in casting operations. Compaction of granular media and loads increases the actual capacity of containers. in transport facilities by 15 ~ 20% Vibratory worklng of core. and mold sands is enhancing strength of cover and molds produced from ‘Compaction of granular media takes place as a result of fuctustion of the frictional forces between individual particles Under ibration and action of the fectlonal and inertial forces, Ke continues until the action. of the, forces. ef Internal resistances and gravitational Forces are balanced. To. ensure the compaction of the load by means of vibrations Wt Is necessary that the acceleration of the receptacle har a specific value, For ‘modia with soll Internal friction this acceleration is less than for materials with large forces of Internal friction. Vibratory inttallations for the compaction of transported loads are usually designed ax vibratory platforms on which, the Vehicle being londed rail car, trailer) is tmounted (Fig. 300, ‘The platform consists of « working surface 1 which, when used In railway transportation, 1s equipped by rails, cartying. elastic system 2 and vibratory J usually of inertial pe. Vibratory compactors of the suspended type (Fig. 5 10b,c) which impart “prallations directly to the Baa of the vehicle are aloo being lused. Such compactor comprises. an inertial, pneumatic, OF lectromagnetic vibrator with pade S by means of which it ‘mounted to or pressed against the Body of the vehicle. ‘The ibratory agitator is suspended permanently by means af arm te the loading tation, or by a chain. and ie handled by © rane. In some cases, small vibratory compactors are used. In Basic Schemutice and Design of Vibratory Machines 253, rallway transportation. These compactors are mouated between the rails at the loeding station and oscillations are imparted to falls and to the vehicle which is placed on them (Fig. 310d) ‘The compactor comprises a vibrator & and Jacke 9 by means of which itis extended between the rll Vibratory compactors for core sands are most often made a platforms of various designs, The platform In. Fig. 310° Consists of frame’ 10 mounted on the foundation with laste mounts i Vertical oscillations are imparted to. the frame, by fmeane of an inertial vibrator 12.‘The molding, box ie directly ‘mounted on the frame In order to Intensify the compaction process of core sands the platform is subjected, along with harmonic oscillations, to Impact pulses that are directed upwards or downwards. Figure SHOP and g show uaits equipped with buffers 13 and 14 against Which the frame with the molding box impacts during the sallation process." Asymmetric high-frequenc) oscillations are Induced which facilitate better compaction quality of the sand For # better compaction, velous systems of state loading of the sand. combined. with simultaneous, vibratory procesting fre also used Presented in Fig. 30H ise unit in which the loading of the compacted mixture is effected by an applied weight It consists of platform 15, mousted on a foundation by Ineane of an elastic system 16, Mounted rigidly to the platform fre an inertial vibrator 17 imparting to it vertical osclltions Sis punch 18, which enters the molding box. A weight 19 is Placed on the compacted mixture in the molding bos. Figure Rion shows's layout in which the staic loading of the mixture In achloved by compressed air. The molding box (Fig. 3.10)) has 3 cover 20 witht tube through which compressed. air is tupplled during. the operating process of the unit Vibratory Unies have been veloped im which oscilation excitation ond Static Tonding of the mixture are effected by a single device, ramely pneumatic cinder system. Such a device 1s. prosented In Tig. 310k. It comprises a platform 21 with a punch 22 which enters into the molding box. The platform of the Pneumatic cylinder 23 ix connected with the ‘upper frame 24 During operation compressed sir iz delivered to the cylinder in 4 pulsating flow as a result of which static pressure and Aynamie Toading of the compacted mivture is applied through the punch. Tn order to Increase the capacity of the. vibratory ‘compactor and. faciltate auxiliary” operations which ere ‘irociated with the mounting and removel of the molding box,256 Theory of Vibratory Technology Meare 310 Schemmtic. diagrams of vibratory mac Basic Schematics and Design of Vibratory Machines 258 the vibratory unit ig equipped with handling devices (210), The luni "consists of platform 25, mounted on an elastic system 26 fon bed 27. The Inertial vibrator 28 on the platform imparts to Te vertical gucillations: the mounting and removal. of the molding box is carried out by chain conveyer 29 whose top Branch i mounted on the vibrating platform, 36 VIBRATORY MACHINES FOR PART STRENGTHENING Vibratory processing installations are presently used widely for cleaning, Tinlshing, grinding, and. hardening. (strengthening? operations. If they are to be clasalfled by the type of vibrator, then the most widely used, both domestically and abroad, are Inertial unbalanced-mass and electromagnetic systems, ‘The schematic. di ‘ibratory installations with unbalanced vibrators are shown in fig, 2lleg, and with lectromagnetic vibrators In Fig. lhl. The Working chamber ‘reais eigidly fixed on frame 2 (Fig. 3.lw. The housing of the unbalanced mass 3 is affixed to the frame of directly to the working chamber. The frame, together with the working chamber, tz mounted on ‘laetic cloments 4 on a massive base 5. The working. chamber ‘an also. be olastically ‘mounted to the frame. The elastic lements used are springs, cordcreinforced rubber “clinders With compressed sir, and rubber vibration isolators” Unbalanced masses ore driven by an electric motor. which i installed on ‘base 5, by meane of « V-belt transmission via step pulley and Flexible coupling. The exciting force, gonoratod by the rotating unbalanced mae, imparts circular oscillations 0 the working Chamber” with the working medium and the "processed "The layout depicted in Fig. 3u1b ofa vibratory Installation with a three-mase vibrator har a working chamber Tvvith an Inclined side wall. Such » shape of chamber section, which Is' close to ‘Ovshaped section, accelerates the working process as result of improvment of the conditions of Vibratory mass flow over the chamber walls as compared: with 4 U-shaped section. The shafts of the three unbalanced masses 5 are arranged along the bottom of the working chamber. The housings of the unbalanced masses are rigidly attached to the chamber and to frame 2 by the elastic Ink f which Is mounted fon base S.The first nbalanced-mass shaft is driven by an256 ‘Theory of Vibratory Technology: Basic Schematics and Design of Vibratory Machines 257 lectric motor and its motion is trenemitted to the other two Shafts by gears. Under the action of the generated contig forces, "whe working chamber "performs motion along. & non-circular path which also contributes to the Intensification of the working process. "The working chamber J of a unit with two. Uunbalanced-mess vibrators (Fig. 3.110) has a shape of a horizontally placed cjllader, Which Is open from the top. It is ‘igidly linked with the carrying frame 2 which is mounted on bese |S with “the ld “of springs 4. The casings of the snbolanced-mess shafts J are attached to the carrying. frame. ‘The shaft anes are mounted on both sides of the thls of the working chamber and lie in one. plane with its center of ieravty. Both unbalanced-mass shafts are deiven from 8 Common driving’ motor. The working’ chamber receives vibrations from the unbalanced "masses rotating in one Seection “The vibratory inetallation shown in Fig. 3lld hes the chamber I of the same shape asin che preceding case. Th fifference is to the effect that the chamber oscillations tvcited by six tnbelanced masses 3 whooe housings are rigidly fifixed to the chamber and to the frame 2 The shafts of the linbalanced asses are linked with cach other by means of time belts 6 and gears 7. The chamber is mounted with the aid fof springs Jon base 5. Rotation from the deve motor is franemitted tov the lower right unbalanced mass. All” the Unbalanced masses in their motion in one direction act on the tmars in the working chamber by effective vibrations which Increase the output of the plant as compared vith the single Unbolenced-mase unit. The low degree of rellablty of the system and the high noise level are the main shortcomings of this desien ‘The vibratory installation depicted in Fig. te, unlike he considered installations whose Working chambers are open and Shaped in the plan view az « rectangle, has a closed cjlindeical horicontally placed working chamber i, which is rigidly linked vith the carrying frame 2. The unbalanced masses 3, placed in fubular housings that are rigidly linked with the frame, are ‘mounted outside on shafts parallel to the chamber axis. The hie of the shaft of the. lower (larger in masa) unbelanced ‘mats is mounted in the vertical plane passing through the axis of the working chamber. The axes of the other two (equal) Unbalanced masses are located cbove and symmetrically to this "The shafts of the unbalanced masses are linked with20 “Theory of Vibratory Technology ach other by sprocket 4, chain 5, and auiliry sprockets 6 The carrying frame is fixed to base by meano of preumetic shock absorbers 7. The shaft of the lower unbalanced mace. is driven by a V-belt transmission from an electric motor, The suallary: sprockets enable one to. obtein “2 rotation et the ‘upper unbalanced masses ina direction “opposite. to the ‘tution of the lower unbslanced mass, The resulting exciting force, which "arises with their rotation, causes, sacllatory ‘motion of the working chamber ina complicated. multi lobe trajectory, with the number of the lobes depending onthe transmission ratio between the shafts of the unbalanced masses, Furthermore, the mass inside the chamber performs irculatory motion with high speed around the longitudinal ese ‘of the working chamber. Such = complex motion is attained by very simple means: by the” rational positioning. ol the lnbalanced-mase shafts relative to. the’ chamber” axl, ‘by selection of the unbalanced. imasten, and. by specific transmission ratio between the shafts “The given unit has & number of advantages as compared with the existing: machines, namely the enhanced intosticeion Of mixing of ‘the Teed. the possibility of highly effective ‘working of parte with complicated. external” shape, and Increased output Tn addition to the consldered vibratory installations with fone working chamber, designs with multiple chambers have been developed, Le, with two, three, and four chambers, Thelt main advantoge is an Increase in output Figure Sif shows a design with two cylindrical chambers 1 driven by « vibrator” with, two unbalanced masses whose shafts are situated inthe vertical plane. af symmetry of the Working chambers. There are. installations with "s working chamber of an annular GoroidaD) type. The working. chamber ff such unit, which represents em open torus (Fig. alg) le ‘igidly mounted on frame 2. Under the chamber, and inside its neck a vibrator with two unbalanced masses 2 i installed. The fxes of the working chamber and of the vibrator colnlde, The frame of the nit rests on springs located around the creumferonce. ofthe base 5 ‘The. heavier” lomer unbelenced mass ‘causes vertical oscillations ‘of the loaded. imate during fotatlon and the upper one causes horizontal displacement of the mass around the circumference of the chamber, Ae a result ‘of the addtion of these components, the mass, tavele around the ais of the. ring ofthe working chamber” tahown by arrows). Installations of this type are. aiall in size, operate Basie Schematics and Design of Vibratory Machines 259 with less nolae, and are used to. process flat small Components. “The working chambers of similar vbratory Installations are also. made in the shape of = closed torue (ing), hells, oF polyhedron ‘The schematic diagram of a unit with electromagnetic vibrator ie shown tn Fig. lth. A lever with “armature 2 i ‘igidly attached to the working chamber £. Stator 3 ie afived {to frame 4 which is supported on base 6 by means of the clastic slements & When current flows, through’ the, windlngs Of the stator the armature is attracted to it, Due to. the ‘laste suspension, the chamber with the lever” and. armature performs osclllatory motion Which is imparted tothe leaded ‘A two-chamber unit of electromagnetic action le depicted fn Fig. Siti Two horizontally arrenged chambers. which are Connected with frame 2 form together. with the armature 3 Fixed Between the chambers a single right system mourted on ‘laste elements 4 on. base. The stators of the lectromagnets which are placed under the chambers alternately attract the armature, forcing the combined system ‘of the armature and the chamber frame to perform a swaying tmotion which ie transmitted to the loed, Installations with an Sectromanetic.siorstor hare, ar a rile. lower power tnd ‘output compared with unite of the unbalanced-mass {pe Figure Sil) howe the lajout of single unbelanced-mass vibrator having the same constituent elements as the unit of Fig Sila with the exception of the electromagnetic device. The latter serves as. automatic regulator of the amplitude ol ‘rcilations and consists of an armature & and atator 7, which fre rigidly mounted on the frame ? and the bare 5. 37, VIBRATORY SEPARATORS AND MIXERS. 274 Processing Functions of Vibratory Separators and Mixera ibratory separators and miners perform oppo Functions. Vibratory separators separate dapersed madi according to size, sahape, danaty, “conficents "of friction, “and other Charecteratc propersice of the particles forming the. dapersed fSyetem. Thus. the process of seperation puts sn order tm the ‘spersed aystem with respect to one or several characteristic250 Theory of Vibratory Techology Vibratory mixers, on the other hand, must provide uniform isribution of the mixed components over the entre mass, Le bering the dispersed system Into a stato of the highest possible "The most widely used separators are the types with peeforated screening. surfaces, which are usually refered to a frzzlies. By imparting vibratory motions to the screening Suefaces the processed product is displaced and uniformly Aistributed over the working. surface. Vibratory imations make it easier for the fine grins of the product to pase through the ‘openings af the screen and enaure the removal af the retlned Clases (rections) from the separator, “The working. surface of the grizzly can be imparted harmonic rectilinear osilations in the plane ef the seveen ot t's certain angle to it. Oscillations in the plane of the screen are used for the separation of mixtures with reapect. to. the Width or thickness of the particles with the aid of perforated Working surfaces with round or rectangular openings, Wattled Screens can also be used, Constant contact with the screening Surface Increases the probability of screening. the particles from the lower layer. Rectlinear osciliations at an engle to the working surface or circular and elliptical oscillations in the vertical plane are imparted tothe grizsly for the separation of particles which sare characterized “by disordered. shapes. In such regimes. the Droduct layer is periodically tossed up by the working surface. ‘Thus, the layer Is loosened and impects of the particles on the screen upon Taling leads to an increase in the effectiveness of the process of separation "The circular oscillations ia the plane of the screening surface are imparted to the separator’ for the separation of franular "mixtures into’ larger number of fractions with espect te the thickaees or width of the particles. In such Systems many screens with” ferent’ openings sues are mounted. Vibratory gzlles in which elastic oscilstions of the screening. surfaces ate fealized ere currently being actively Geveloped. “This ise grizsly with resonating grates and flastically deformed screens. In these ‘designs predominantly lranaverse wave-like and wave oscillations of the. screening surfaces are realized. The effectiveness. of such icsies. Ie fatremely high, since the ‘elastic sraine of the screching furfaces provent clogging of the openinge, Basic Schematice and Desi of Wibestory Machines 261 When mixing various granulated media, the particles are subjected tothe. action of differently orlented forces. which Shape their motion in the mass of the medium. Thesis ‘mechanism is determined by the construction of the mixer and the regime of Ie operation. In mixers with » purely sibratory principle ‘of action, the processed medium is acted upon by Torees of inertia, which are generated by the periodic motion of the working chamber, by pressure and fiction forces on the Walla, internal resistances and breakage of the medium under iravity forces, Under the influence of these forces, Complicated vibrocrculatory motion of the medium te obtained ‘whose Taws are mainly defined by the regime of oxilatons Und design festures of the chamber Generally, a number of charactrlatlc processes take place in the mixer. Moreover, thei role in the mixing process ca be very ferent depending on the design and operating regime of the mixer. Formation of surfaces slipping over each other in the mses being mixed Is characteretic for the so-called shear mixing. During convective mixing, groups of particles of the ‘mined mass are displaced from one location to another. The ‘change’ In. locations of single particles is characteritic For “ifusion’ mixing. Impact mixing takes place as a result of Soattering of single particles under the action of collisions fgainst the walls of the mixing chamber. Mining, can also take lace in the process of reduction of the chunk size of the fgeregates constituting the mined product. 37.2 Vibratory Separators (Grizzlies) with a Right Working Element “The fundamental features of the design of vibratory separators sre determined. mainly by the type of the dive. Installations Srith Inertial drive are” the’ most widespread,” followed by Installations with ‘electromagnetic and, finally, with eccentric drives, Installations with an eccentric drive are usually of the resonant pe "At the present time, inertial vibratory grizlies units with unbalanced-mass and self-belanced vibratory drives os well as ‘with vibratory’ motors are used. When vibratory motors are Used, both rectilinear and circular oscillations cam be imparted tothe grizely ‘with an appropriate Installation. Vibratory [tlzlles driven by vibratory motors are the most widely used, particularly in small and medium nts, ‘They are notable for2 Treory of Vibratory Technology ‘extreme structural simplicity as © result of using off-the-shelf vibratory dives, and of the absence of Supplementary electric Imotore and intermediate transmission. ‘Currently produced inertial grizzlies are divided into two large groups: inlined and horizontal. In Inclined griaziies vibrators of the unbalanced-masr type "Inparting circular motion to the duct are used of the self-belanced. vibrators enerating. directional” exciting force end. providing. rectilinear motion oF the dict ‘One of the most Important requirements to modern ibratory machines "in general and to. vibratory grilles in particular, Im addition to high performance, simplicity of Iraintenance. This requirement is satisfied by’ vibratory graalis In which vibratory motors are used. This drive eliminates the need for any intermediate drive elements from the motor t0 the vibrator auch a couplings, chains, ete, As a resuly, the size of the machine Je reduced” assembly at the site becomes ‘isle, and maintenance Is simplified sigoficanty rials with circular oscillations “of the duct, one vibratory motor is usually inatalled, Several vibrators can lao be used, but in this case thelr cophesed operation must. be provided. To obtain rectilinear oscilations of the duct, one can Use kinematically oF dynamically connected vibratory motors Use of wbratory motors with adjustable magnitude of the ‘etcting force and. thelr mounting at aiferent. angles, with respect to the plane of the screen enables one to. correctly {elect the operating regime for the specified worked. product find its chunk size, In vibratory grizelies having a screen with large openings, the vibratory tater ia, mounted in suche way that 0 large bration angle would be obtained. The material In this case is Intensively tossed up. and. performs small jumps. which fnhances Ite effective. separation. For the average. value of Screen openings the vibration angle iz epproximately 43°, When Fine products ere screened, the vibration ix directed at a more gently sloping. angle with respect tothe screen plane. The louble amplitude of oscilations ls established in nccordance With the properties of the worked product by changing. the Imagaitude of the exciting force of the vibratory motor By ‘means of rotation of the adjustable unbalanced mas ‘Schematic. diagrams of vibratory. griesiles with rmotor-vibrators are given in Fig. 312. Figure 2a shows, an Inclined. vibratory grnsly with circular oscillations In the tertical plane riven by 2 motorvibrator” whose, axle is Basic Schematics and Design of Vibratory Machines 243 eure 342 Schematic diagrams of vibratory grietien with horizontal and mounted perpendicular to the longitudinal axie Sf the box. Figure 3126 shows «horizontal vibratory italy with two. dynamically synchronized motor-vibrators Whose boxes perform liner oscillations “The vibrators are adsted for antiphase oscillations; their sxe are arranged at-an angle to” che longitudinal grizsiy ax In the first case the motor-vibeator ia mounted in the middl Dart of the box on a special traneverse beam, in the second ‘age [tls mounted on the Box sides Figure bide depicts a vibratory grisly with «wo. dynamically synchronized. vibrators operating. it phase snd ‘whose axes are perpendicular to the screen surface. The griztly Ttnounted ‘with 2 small Inclination. ‘The screening, acem8 Theory of Vibratory Technology performs circular oscillations In ite plane. Vibratory grizzlies Of all types are suspended or mounted on load-carrying Structures by meane of oft helical springs, Ase result, they do. not practically tranefer dynamic’ loads to the carrying Tertial grizlies are manufactured with one screen and two ‘screens. In both cases, they are. characterized by ‘exceptional simplicity and amail height; they do not. require Targe Tloor areas. Horizontal grizzlies require the least floor teu and vertical space. Vibratory grizice of the typee under {onsideration can be used for the separation of molatare. and for dewatering various products by installing speclal screens, ‘The fundamental_design layouts of vibratory grizaies with unbalanced masses and self-balanced vibrators of special design fre shown in Fig. 313. AS @ rule, similar drives are used in large gritos. Figure 3134 shows the fundamental design layout of unbalanced horizontal” and inclined. wibratory grizzlies with vibrators of the self=balanced type which provide. direction ‘oscillations of the box. In the horizontal vibratory grzaly, the Mfovator’is installed. in the ‘upper part of the box; in. the Inclined grizzly # is installed below. Vibratory gritzies of the Unbalanced type operate far beyond the resonance and, since they are mounted on support structures on soft elastic laments, transfer to them Insignificant dynamic losds Vibratory graziies with inertial drives can be designed in ibrationsieoiated embodiments. (Fig. 220). For’ this, purpose they are mounted on a reactive mass, which ix inlated from the loed-earrying structure by soft elastic elements Vibratory grzali with unbalanced-mess. drives (Fig, 249) whose boxes perform circular oscillations are always mounted st an inclination in order to provide translational motion of the processed product, ‘All types of vibratory grizlies under consideration can have one, two, and more sereens “Grzalies with electric vibrators are used for screening of ‘mainly fine materials and ‘also. for dewatering. and for dust Temoval. They are manufactured also in two versions, namely horizontal and inclined (Fig. 310). In the griazlies of the frst type, oscillations are usually directed perpendicular to. the Sereen plane, and dlaplacement of the material over the screen [caused by gravieational forots due tothe Inclination. oF the arity (Fig. ida), In vibratory installations, of thie type Basic Schematics and Design of Vibratory Machines 265 wcllations can be imparted either to the entire box of the faz, or to the screen directly. Im grlzlies with electric” vibrators and with horizontal positioning of the box. dieplacement of the separated. product Is induced by oscillations acting at an angle to the direction of conveying (Fig. 34B) The vibrator in this case is mounted at fnvangle to the screen, Resonant vibratory grizlies find wide application in Industry. They are more complex indesign than inertial” and slectromagnetic grizzlies. However, they are characterized by umber” of ‘personal marles, namely high sereening quality, Tow energy” consumption, operational reliability. and low208 “Theory of Vibratory Technology. “dynamic loade on the foundation. These ‘pplications of this system, Resonant vibratory grils can be divided, with respect to ‘he fundamental design of the “dynamic system, Into two hree-, and four-mass machines. Depending om the structural layout’ they can have series and parallel serangement. of the boxes. To balance the moving parts, both the bones themselves tnd special balancing frames ‘ca be used.” Reaonant giclee an have one of two bones, ‘The structural arcangements of twor and. theee-mass resonant vibratory griztlien are given in Fig, 36. The structural Arrangement of a. two-mase resonant vibratory grzaly with Feactive frame is depicted in Fig. isc. The twormasy resonant fezzly consists of a box and reactive frame, and. eccentle ‘hive with elastic connecting rod. The box ie connected with the reactive frame by lea! springs and. rubber-metal elastic flements. ‘The reactive frame’ isolated from the supporting [Rructure with apring or rubber Isolators. ‘The structural layouts of reronant vibratory grazlies of ‘hree-mass system with parallel ond series arrangement of the bones are depicted in Tig. Sth, g. The three-mase, resonant ibratory gvazly consiate of two boxes supported by means of Teaf springs and rubbersmetal clastic elements on the balancing frame, The frame J isolated from the supporting stracture Oy tantages led to wide Basic Schematics and Design of Vibratory Machines 267 means of rollers or rubber isolators. The first box is deven by fin ecoentsic vibrator with elastic comnecting rod. Oscillations fre Imparted to the second box reactive), and It oscillates Sppronimately in antiphase to the frst box. When started, the rive does not Immediately impart oscillations to the box, due to the presence of an clastic connecting rod, but It doce #0 ‘gradually by rocking It for approximately 3 ~ 10 seconds. As “ibrations of the first box develop, the balancing frame starts Vibrating. and ite oscillations are transmitted to the second box, which also starts oscillating. Since the” second box frcilater in an opposite direction to the fist, the Inertial Forces cancel soch other on the balancing frame and are not transmitted to the load-carrying structure. However, the frame nonetheless performs small oscillations, since the 2 fof the box do not oscillate exactly in antiphase Fesietances snd energy dlasipation Inthe slastic. elements Oncillations of the balanced frame are tranamiteed to the Free box and are used to-compensate for the losses of energy in the clastic elements of the suspension. Thus, the power of the drive is expended only to make up for the energy losses In the Slastic suspension and on screening the materi Tange resonant grizsies are foursmass designs comprising two twovmase sections conmected By a tle rod. The drive in this case Is mounted only on one section, and the second is rough into stony react force, The fourmae gris in eccentric drive which lw located on the first section nd Conects the reactive. imate. and the box (Fig. 368). Each Section consists of « box, supporting connecting rods, a frame ‘mounted on isolators, and structural elastic connections, The pporting frames of both sections are linked to each other by ‘The schematic diagrams of inertial grizzlies with lacticlly Aetormable screening turfaces are presented In Fig. 315 ‘One of the first to be designed was an electromagnetic fvizly with elastically deformable surface made from steel bers, whose ends were rigly attached to the frame of the agrazly (ig. 3150). The natural Frequencies of the bar screening rface were adjusted for resonance with the forced frequency Of the vibratory drive. When the grisly ie operating the beregure 215 Schematic a csclate with lorger amplitude thin the frame due to Fesonance “ning ‘This ‘atonier the_clasifeaion process ‘thou an increase of the loads transmitted onthe supporting Ieructure of the ballalngs Much" ater, weary giles with rubber resonating surfaces (ig. 2156) appeared which ‘operated onthe. same Principles ae the design considered above, Those grizzlies have tn etentic or neta dive, “The design of machines with forcibly deformed surfaces was 2 fundamentally new direction inthe development of Moratory ratlewth slaialy deformed aurfecee, What ew In thelr desga is the method of ovcllation encation of the serening.autfce. Tow screen it fied toa aetem: of trasqverse_ beams that are ‘moumtad onthe” porte of "she tibrtoryersty vibrating in antphaet, "Therefor when the Imochine Ia operating, the screen ether stiches of cage aaa ferult of change of the stance Setwocn edjacet beams Furthermore, the screen performe waveve motion with & fignfcane transverse ampituse. The” process of separation i {heve unite taken glace ith hgh Incenaey and efcene “the erletly of te GDEP type longs to the class of stbratory machines, The grisly Incades one oscillating mans the frame ofthe screcing surface I with staloney tanoverse bare 2"Uhig. 2150 andthe rence muse, having. moving Uranaverse bra and connected with the rane ty connecting rode 9 with rubber hinges The reecne meee ls driven Inte Snclatory motion by inertial vibrator An elastic. screen te tmounted ‘on the iwansvere bers’ Z and Sn opeaton, wo © result of the phase shift between cxllatons of the working tmarees of the gray, the distance between the beam Basic Schematics and Design of Vibratory Machines 269 petiodcally changes. This is causing elastic straining of the {creen and fonds to wave-like oxilations of the nurface. 'A similar princple of action Is, successfully implemented in vibratory grizzly by the firm Binder Co., (Austria). The vibreory grizty known under the name B-V-Tox consiats of ‘Casing / with a continuous bottom mounted on elastic elements ‘Zon the foundation (Fig. 3.180). Transverse bars J are installed in the Trame. A moving frame 5, also carrying transverse bars 6 ts conmected with the caring by means af springs & Oscillations are imparted to the casing by an unbalanced-msss Inertial vibrator 7. Elastlc screening surfaces are mounted on the transverse burs. The principle af operation af the grizzly bz the same a in the previous desiga 3.74 Vibratory Mixers for Granular Media ‘The schematic diagrams of vibratory mixers for granulated produces are shown in Fig. 6 ‘The simplest vibratory Batch-type miver Is a clindecal chamber, performing recilinear oscillations inthe” vertical Airetion, into which the components to be mixed are loaded (Fig. Blow, Under the actions of the vertical oeilations rising ‘Greulation in the mined medium are created, These cireuation® Contribute to the mining of the components of the mixture Figure 346 Schematic. diagrams of sibeatory miners form0 “Theory of Vibratory Technology The character of the clrcultions of the mixed medium can bbe changed and theie intensity increased simultaneously by limparting to “the Working chamber of oacillations along. the horizontal circular path (Fig. 16D. ln thie case, the miver can operate In continuous regime. When operating in the regime ‘oF continuous mixing, the ‘componente of the mixture are fed from above and the mixed product Is discharged from below. Furthermore, the duration of ming can be regulated. by. the Intensity of oscillations and by the height of the chamber. Tn the cylindrical working chamber motion can be imparted to the mived products. For this purpose, cicslar oscillations and rocking of the central axis are simultaneously imparted to the working chamber (Fig. Sel. Such circulations in the mixed Imedium leads to an increase in mixing quality and shortens the duration of the process, “The so-called through-type miners. are also. used. The working chamber of auch's miner ia a suficiently long trough, Usually, of Veshaped. cross atction (Fig. 36d) Circular ‘otcilations in the, vertical plane are applied tothe tough perpendicular to its longitudinal axis. The components of the ‘mixture are loaded from one end of the trough and the final Product is discharged from the other. To ensure a slow motion fof khe processed product along. the trough, fins ace instaed St the bottom of the trough ate small” angle to. Its longitudinal axis. Under” the influence of the circular ucllations, the mixture Inthe working chamber. performs ‘lip circulatory motion ins plane perpendicular to. the longitudinal axis of the trough ‘With the inatllation of inclined Fins at the bottom of th Uwough the misture performs « spiral motion slowly moving slong the working. chamber. The longitudinal motion of "the ‘mixture Ix alo schloved in 4 smooth trough if it in mounted 1A good mining. process of multi-component. mixtures so achieved in rectangular multissection working chembers to Which reculinesr oscillations” are applied at an angie to. the ottom UF. 3160). Ia this design the components of the mixture are loaded into narrow sections of the chamber which fre separated from the main compartment by walls that do not Feach the bottom, and the mixture Is. formed in the compartment. Mixers with toroidal working. chambers (Fig. 3.160 are widely used, The mixing chamber 1s positioned horizontally and Complex oscillatory motion Is imparted to. tt. This motion Besie Schematics and Design of Vibratory Machines 271 comprises circuler oscillations in the plane of the torus and Svaying. of the central” vertical axis” of the chamber. The Combination of such oscillatory “motions of the. working chamber creates spiral circulation of the mined medium. The Spiral circulation consists of elliptical circulations ln the cross {sctions of the chamber and slow motion slong the. annular fis of the torus. Such cirelatory motions pronde high degree ‘of mixing of the final product components, Mixing oF moving granular products can also be effected. in vibratory conveying ‘machines. For this purpose, load-carrying. elements of special Gesign aro used, Mivers of this type are considered In section 33(CHAPTER FOUR VIBRATION EXCITERS (VIBRATORS): PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION, GENERATION OF EXCITING FORCE 4A. TYPES OF VIBRATION EXCITERS (VIBRATORS) Vibration excitors impart motion to the oscillatory system and iRenerate the exciting force which is necessary For overcoming Interoal and. external resistances, In treneresonant and subresonant regimes, the vibration exciter also overcomes the Inertia forces of the rotating masses or the restoring forces of the slastic links, while In the resonant regime these forces Dlance each other. Various types of vibration excters are characterized by different actions on the driven component of the vibratory system "The following types of vibration exciters are considered: Inertial, aceantrie,sleceromagneti and hydraulic ‘Vibration exciters can be classified with respect to the character of their action Into the following main groups “The first group includes force vibration exciters, which apply to the driven component of the oscillatory ayetem a force which has 2. specific time history depending on the position of thle component or ite velocity. Force. vibration fxciters sre represented by electromagnetic and pneumatic “The distinguishing feature of the force drive ls the possiblity of Ite application in vibratory mechines with one degree of mobility “Tae second group, to which the present section ie mainly devoted, includes Kinematic wWoration exlters, Ley such ‘vibrators whose driving component has fully defined absolute or relative motion “depending only onthe geometrical Gimeneions of the diving mechanism, The. most widely useda ‘Theory of Vibrotory Technology inemetie vibration exclters are inert “The third group includes impact vibration excites, itn vibrators which Induce the oscillations of the driven component Of the vibratory system by Impact. Some types of vibrators such as, for example. Impact electromagnetic. vibrators or Inertial vibratory hammers, impart t the driven component of the machine both linpact end vibratory pulses, Use of such ‘tives Is presently rather limited ‘eccentric, and hydraulic 42 BASIC DESIGN FEATURES; FORMATION OF THE [EXCITING FORCE 424 Inertial Vibrators 42.1 Schematics and Formation of the Evcting Force The exciting force in i tla vibrators is created a s result of rotation of one or several unbalanced masses. ‘The exciting force thus created can have ¢ rotating vector, he, continuouly changing Ite direction, or directional. In vibrators with “Urectional exciting force the latter always. acto inthe same Airection and changes only in magoitude. There are alee. special types of inertial vibrators generating exciting torque or various combinations of exciting farces and torques, Vibrators” with rotary exciting force vectors include vibrators of the unbalanced-masr type in which the exciting Torce te generated by one rotating unbalanced mass, and alee vibrators "for generation of elliptical and. biharmonle oscillations. To obtain a reclinearly directional exciting force In Inertial vibrators, two methods are used: the components actiag imam undesirabie direction are balanced by forces, that are ‘equol in magnitude but acting in opposite directions. or the Known property of the fevolute joint is utilized, namely to tranamit the force only in direction perpendicular to Its exis Im practice, rubber Joints possessing. some elasticity er springs with large transverse stiffness are usualy employed for’ these “The directional action of the exciting force is provided by 4 vibrator ‘of the self-balanced ‘ype which comprises wo Paired unbelanced vibrators rotating ayachronausly with Heptical” angular velocity In ‘opposite “directions, If "the ‘omchronism of the rotation of the unbalanced. masses. ix Stteined without « mechanical lnk, then they are referred to as Self-synchronizing. In order to obtein » directional exciting Force from. one unbalanced mast, it it suspended from revolute joint by means of a rocker In the form of « pendulum, ‘To ensure « stable position of the rocker in space, 1 is fed between two apritgs or a rubber bushing is aed. The exclting force is imparted to the vibratory machine only In the direction ‘of the line connecting the center of rotation of the unbalanced tmass and. center of suspension of the rocker on which the totorcvibrator is fixed. Such vibrators. are called. pendulum Vibrators. The “directional exciting force which "changes Secording to iharmonic law is generated by two paired i-balanced vibrators. One of these vibrators rotates twice a= fast av the other one For the simultaneous generation of an encting force and ‘exciting moment pendulum vibrators with dsploced unbalanced masses that are suspended by means of @ 3-D joint and_specal Trovshaft nibrators with Four Unbelanced masses are used, ie must be born in mind that we are talking. here. about the character of the exciting force relative tothe vibrator Dae, and Ignoring the forces created by ita arm. ‘in mounting the vibrator on the machine, the character of ‘excitation will depend not only on the type of the vibrator, bat Sino on Its position relative to the center of mass andthe fof the restoring forces of the’ elastic or example, if the axle of the simplest iced mass vibrator docs not coincide with the center of mmase of the oxcillatory system, then the latter will. generate fan exciting moment slong with the rotating exciting force "The inertial unbelanced-mass vibrator consists of an Unbalanced mase rotating with « constant anguler velocity on @ shaft in the bearings of the support section which Is rigidly fixed” to. the vibratory machine. Upon rotation of the Unbalanced ase, a centrifugal (exciting) force which is Constant in magnitude and continuously variable in direction is fenerated, In an unbalanced-mase vibrator the exciting force Is enerated by the centrifugal force of the unbalanced: mass Fotating with angular velocity 0. If the dlstance from the Center of rotation of this mass to les center of gravity ier the excleng force te equal to mm “Fhue the exciting force of the unbalanced-mats vibrator fs constantly changing its direction, while rotating with the Unbalanced mass, and) remains constant In.” magnitude2% Theory of Vibratory Technology Projections of the exciting force on axes x J. are respectively equal to = mre sin ot, F, © mrt con ot ‘The pendulum inertial vibrator consists of on unbalanced mass rotating on a shaft fied on a rocker which fe mounted In the support with the ald of rubber-metal bushing. With the PWvoted attachment of the vibrator the component. of. the ‘entefugal force passing through the center of rotation af the Unbalanced mass and the rocker joint. (pivot) is completely fransmitted to the support which Is in turn rigidly mounted on ‘the vibratory machine The component of the ‘entsifugal force fscting In the perpendicular direction causes the rilation of the "Mibrator around the ala of” the rocker plot. Since stiffness of the rubbersmetal pivot is stall, the reection fransmitied to the vibratory machine te Insignificant, He can practically be assumed thet only the directional exciting, Force IS imparted to the machine, “The inertial vibretor of the aelf-balanced ype consists of two unbalanced masses rotating In opposite ‘irectlons with equal angular velocity. on shafts “supported ina common housing. ‘The self-balanced vibrator with unbslanced masses rotating Im opposite directions generates an exciting, force. which is constant in direction and variable in magaitude, F = 2mmr a? sin “The directional exciting force can also be obtained with the ald of «vibrator with three unbalanced mastes, The middle linbalanced mass rotates. In one direction and the other two Side masses in the opposite direction. ‘The schematic dagram Of a vibrator with three unbalanced masses le presented in Fig ‘Lia, The vibrator consists of three unbalanced masses (central ‘and two side ones 2 rotating on three parallel shafts located st equal distances from each other. The shafts are mounted in ‘= common housing. The conteal sheft of the vibrator rotates in & direction opposite to the direction of rotation of the side shafts, All shafts rotate with constant anguler velocity ond the unbalanced maser generate a centrifugal force. hich, le gnstant In magnitude (mrs? from the middle mass. and 1/2me OF rom each side) and continuously vatiable in direction “The Feoultant exciting force of the vibrator is equal to the vector sum of these forces. The pattern of formation of the irectional force in a vibrator with three uabalanced: masses le flcdated in Pig 10, Vibration Exciters ed "ZF Stent, op e #g e @)-@ efe ge Rene 4 Inertal orator with ee un Vibrators with three unbalanced miasses enable one 10 ‘vsily control the direction of action of the exciting force. Is Single I equal to. half the angle which ts formed by the ‘irections ‘of the side and) middle unbalanced masses in the inital position. Thus, Fig. Ate shows the pattern of formation ‘of the exelting force at angle 45° to the axis,218 Theory of Vibratory Technology When it Is desirable to have an exciting moment together with the exciting force, one can use a sibrator with, two snbalanced masses in which the unbalanced masses are shifted relative to ‘each other by some angle aid. are’ rotating. In ‘opposite directions “The vibrator comprises two unblanced masses rotating on shafts in a common supporting housing. The unbslanced masses sre linked by gearing, which ensures thelr synchronous rotation In opposite directions. With such an arrangement af the linbalanced masses an exciting force. ls genertied in the process of rotation directed at angle 46° (90°72) to a straight Tine connecting. their centers, A moment is also. generated which Ie proportional to the magnitude of the exciting force and to the dlotance between the unbalanced masses. In such @ vibrator, unlike the, self-balanced nen, the encting. force Is ‘directed at angle 45° to the horizontal. The Torce magnitude is FS 2mr a its projection on the vertical and horieontal axes fare equal to /272im wf. The tongue created ty the ibrator Is cual to M= mr ula The pattern of formation of the exclting force and the moment at other positions of the unbalanced masses are illustrated by the presented schematic diagram Special designs of vibratory drives are also” used in ibratory machines. These include vibrators for generation of Clliptical Sd. Uiharmonie orcilstlons and alse" three~ and Tour-sbelt vibrators which generate an encting, force thet. is changing ins complex way For generation of biharmonic oscillations one can use Inertial Mbrators with four” unbalanced maser whose sjchronized pairs of unbalanced masser rotate with angular Nelocities having at to 2 ratio. The schematic dhagram of Bihrmonie inertial ibrator with four unbalanced masses, I shown in Fig. 2a, Ie consats. of two pais, af unbalanced Imastes 2 and 4 rotating. syichronoualy in. opposite Aections and ‘which are mounted ins common frame 3. The first pair of the unbalanced marsee rotates: with s two tlnes igher peed “The principle of operation of a biharmonic inertial vibrator ls illustrated In Fig. 420 (the diagram shows the case when the phase shift between the exciting Forces generated bythe firat'and second pars of the unbalanced masses Ie 90°), The following notations are adopted andr” are mats and ccenteicity of the unbalanced masies of the first stage Fotating with angular velocity aj mand ¢ are mass, and eccentricity of the unbelanced masses of the ascond stage Vibration Exciters 9 Ble @ ¢ Oe gle e © $8 oe PROS @.¢ ee 6/6 HESS SS Pili tert? maak Fl BD Rene 42° InersalWihermonie vibrator «schematic When the unbalanced masses are in position 1, the centrifugal Forces of all four unbalanced ‘master act in the horizontal Girection and in. opposite directions in each pair. Asa ‘consequence, the resultant exciting force of each pair of the Unbalanced. master and the whole vibrator 1s equal to. 2070 Position Il corresponds to the rotation of the first par of the linbalanced mosses by 15° and the second. by 90°. In this Position both pairs of the unbalanced masses yield componente fhat are crected dowawarda. The exciting force of the vibrator In position Il will slao be directed downwards and will be280 Theoty of Vibratory Technology qual to the resultant of the components of both pairs of the unbalanced masses F'= -2ni"r"4 uF 18 mi ¢ wf In position Tl (he first pair of the unbalanced massex rotated by 90° and the second by 180%), the exciting force of the fist palr reaches ‘the maximum value 2a 1 a? and is directed downwards, the sultant exciting force of the second pair is equal to zero ‘Therefore, the exciting force of the vibrator az whole. In position II’ is equal to the exciting force crested by the frst pair of che unbalanced maser F'= Zar 2 In position IV {the fist pair of the unbslanced masses is rotated by 138° and the second by 270°), the resultant exciting forces of both pales are in opposite directions. The exciting force of the vibrator 1s equal in this case to thei diference snd ts direction is dependent on the ratio of the exciting Torces of the pairs of the unbelanced-masses: i the resultant component of the first pair is larger, then the exciting Force fof the vibrator is. directed downwards; otherwise, It ie. the other way around. The Formation af the exciting force of the binarmonic inertial vibrator Im. positions ‘Vi~ Vill is evident from the figure. By varying unbalanced masses of each pair and phase shifts between them, one can obtain various birmonic excitations and select thelr optimum character for solution of given process problem, “The law of Variation of the exciting Force of biharmonic orator ia Fe amr sin ot 6 Barut cos (ut + 1 where ¥ Is the phate sbift between the unbalanced masses of the second and first stages Speclal Inertial vibrators with two unbalanced masses are finding application for generation of elliptical oxcllations, The fundamental layout of the inertial vibrator For the generation of elliptical oucilations is analogous to. the layout of vibrator of the eelf-balanced type, Tne diference is in the fact that the kinetic moments of the unbalanced masses of the ‘ibrator are unequal. ‘The vibrator with two unbslanced masses having different Kinetic moments generates a rotary exciting force whore locus ts'an ellipee "To obtain more complex lect of the exciting forces, tihermonlc elliptical wibrator. canbe ured. es fundamental Gesiga is similar to. the biharmonie Inertial” vibrator for {eneration of rectilinear oscillations. However, each of the Vibration Exciers a1 meget a eat. & + ey) andy = Ay ainloe + py), whore the components of the Spite of is forced exclaims ae equl to Vendo pes oF Ay © at# Fart a land the phase shifte between the displacements of the working Clement ‘nd the dlaplocements of the anbelenced maasce of the vibrator are Vibration Exciore 2 ‘The following notations are adopted in these formulas: ny are reduced coufficients of the viscous resatances acting os the regime is called subresonants py <0. fad py > the regime is Interresonant: when Py = and p, srredonance cccurt In the dcetion of the coreepondng wis, It py = wand py « a. the regime Ie called transresonant. From the “expressions for the components of the amplitude It is fvident that the second term vanishes in the cage of resonance Sind. the displacement amplitude becomes maximum. In the esonant regime, the amplitude is strongly dependent on the Iagoitude of the resistances acting in the system. Increasing; the resistances leade to a decrease of the amplitude of ‘vallations. These propertios of the considered system ave {great Influence on the operetional regimes of the vibratory System, Resonant lbratory machines under verieble loads are ‘xtremely unstable In operation unless. special measures are faken, Tranaresonant machines are characterized by high ‘Sperating stability st high Level variable’ loads which’ maialy determine mageitades of resistances acting in the system.20 Theory of Vibratory Technology Resonant vibratory machines can also work der conditions of large variable loads if they are equipped with an ‘automatic control system for Kinetic moment of the unbalanced Imass. When the load Is increased, the kinetle moment of the tnbslaneed mass must automatically be increased ao thet the ‘magnitude of the oscillation amplitude remainw unchanged, From correlation between displacement of the main mass of the vibratory “machine and rotational velocity of the Unbalanced mass, It follows thet large daplacements take place not only when the netural and forced oscillation. Frequencies coincide, but ina. frequency range. The boundaries of this ange are rotational velocities of the unbalanced masses 4 YE/A3m andy Jh/m at which the displacements. of the main mass ate ‘quel to. the eccentricity af’ the unbalanced mass, Aus r It is interesting to note thet the resonant. range Is"the wider, the higher the natural frequencies of the system ‘These boundavies ere established for operation of the vibratory machine without load Under load ‘the relationshipe fre somewhat eiferent. However, the’ substance’ remaine Achanged. With decreasing rotational speed of the unbalanced mass, the displacements of the working mass of the vibratory Iachine are decreasing, and et very high speeds. they are of the unbalanced mass and to the ratio between cotating and total masses of the, vibratory machine, and depend litle on the magnitude of the acting Toad. "This allows an Important practical conclusion to. be drawn. To ensure high stability “of operation of resonaat ratory machines, they must. be designed for high-frequency Fetes. “The operating regimes of a vibratory machine without load 4 the borderline. angulae ‘velocities have some. characteristic Dropeties and, ‘therefore, deserve. special “attention. At. the Tower frequency boundary, the unbalanced mass movee it circle whose radius is equal to the double eccentricity of the linbalanced mass (Fig. 41). Ip this cage the centrifugal force enerated by the unbelanced mass is twice as. large as the Eentrfugal force of the unbalanced mass whose axis is When the vibratory machine operates at the upper boundary, the Unbalanced mass moves around a circle of era ‘radius. In this case the unbalanced mass rotates in absolute Motion relative to its own center of masa, and. the working smass of the machine moves along circle whose radius iz equal fo the eccentricity of the unbalanced mass, and whose center coincides with the center of mass of the unbalanced macs. It Vibration Exciers om Rgure 439 Tajectr Interesting to note that the centrifugal force developed by the unbelanced mass in this regime is equal to zero. Thus, in ied case, the centrfugel force does not affect the motion of the main mass of the vibratory machine. Here ‘Snchronous-like motion of two Independent masses appears to fake place: rotary motion of the unbalanced mass relative to Ite own center of mase and translational clrevlar motion of the fain mass of the vibratory mechine under the influence of & Central attractive force. Connection of the main macs with the unbalanced mass plays only a synchroslzing role ‘Another characteristic property of this regime Ia change of the natural frequency of the systom. The unbalanced mass does hot participate inthe oscillations therefore, It cannot affect the natural Frequency of the system. Thus, this regime Is also resonant regime, since the natural and. forcing. frequencies ‘coincide. These regimes can be realized only when the ¥Ibratory Iachine is idling. When operating with load, resistence Forces ‘uve some deviation from the conadered pattern of behavior "The expressions for the phae shifts show = possiblity of Jieplacements of the Unbalanced mass of the wbrator and the working masz of the vibratory machine to be out of phase. In ctualibratory machines, regimes In which there Is. no. phase Shife between the dluplacements of the vibratory machine and the vibrator” are practically not realized. However, with fubresonane tuning. of the wbratery machine, the phase shift an be emall, At resonance, ierespecive of magnitudes of the SEcting.resiscances, the phase shift Is 909, and. at extreme traneresonant regimes fe reaches 180°, Le, the unbelanced masswe Theory of Vibratory Technology land the working. mass of the vibratory machine In this case move In opposite directions. Let Us consider in more detail interaction of the main ‘lements of the vibratory machine: the working element. clastic Connections and. the “unbalanced “mass. This in extremely Important in order to ensure the correct formulation ofthe problem of the subsequent optimal design of the machine, It is fstablished that when the ‘vibratory machine operates in Subresonant regime far removed from the resonant regime, the Working mass and the unbalanced mass of the vibrator are ‘moving. slong concentric circles, The working. mass moves slong the smaller circle and the unbalanced mass along. the Targer one. They are practically located on stright. Une, originating from the center of the concentric circles, and are shifted to one side. Ifthe centers of the working mass and of the unbalanced mass are connected by lines originating. from the center of the concentric circles, a certain angle exists bbetween them. This angle characterizes s displacement or a phase shift between the displacement of the main mass ofthe ‘mechine and direction of the driving centifugel force which le Usually referred to a8 the excting force. Turing £0 the graphs of Fig. 4.200 we note that In the subresonant regime the angle ‘of phase abife between the unbalanced mass end the working mass of the machine Is equal to zero "The second important feature of operation in the subresonant regime in the fact that the actual radius vector of Fotetion of the unbalanced mass in the stationery coordinate System’ ie larger than ite ecoentecity. Ie is larger ty. the mount of amplitude of the working element. 1 the rotational speed of the vibrator is increased gradually, the unbalanced mass rotates with respect to. the fain macs. With further Increase of the rotational speed of the unbelonced mass, the phare shift la increasing When. the rotational speed of the unbalanced mars. becomes exactly Correspondent with the eatural frequency of the vibratory ‘stem, the pace shift becomes 90° tg. 4.208). Thus Inthe resonant regime the exciting force Ie directed perpendicular %2 the displacement of fe working element Further increase of the rotational speed of the unbalanced mass and the transition of the machine to the. traneresonant Feline of operation is accompanied by the increase of angle of pase shift between the dlaplacement and. direction of the exciting force (Fig. 200). When the rotational speed of the Unbalanced mass considerably exceeds the frequenc) of natural Soe igure 420 Motion trajectory of enermans sbratory machine fotcilations of the machine, such a rogime of operation ts taferred to az deep transresonant regime; che displacement of the main mass of the machine occurs in 4 drection almost ‘opposite to the direction of the exciting force, Furthermore the lese resistances act nthe machine, the closer 42 the phase {hiFt to 160" In the transresonant regime. Wie interesting to follow the effect of resistances on the phase shift in various regimes. In the subresonant. regime Increasing the resistance leads to an increase in phase shift. At fesonance the eslstances do not affect the phase shift, the phase angle always remaining equal to. 90°. In the franeresonant replme Increasing reslatences lead to. decreasing the phase shift betwen the postion of the unbalanced “mass and. the working mass of the machine characterizes the machine ability todo useful work, one. can come to the conclusion that specifics of the considered eeimes play & decisive role in eelection of the type of machine {or various application conditions “Accordingly, particular attention should be given to. the lucidation of the reasons causing change of the mutual positions of the main mass of the vibratory machine andthe Unbalanced mass” and of the phase” shift between the ‘isplacement of the working slement.and_of the unbalanced ‘mass, The main oscillating mass of the vibratory machine ts feted upon by the clastic forces of rings, inertial Forces, and Feslatance forces. The centrifugal force generated. when the Unbalanced mas rotates ia teed to overcome these forces atd to ensure motion of the vibratory machine. Magnitudes and Girections of the resultante of the first three forces. Vary ‘depending on operating. regimes. Consequently, the excitinga Theory of Vibratory Technology force (in our case the centrifuge force) overcoming them must slso. vary” In magnitude and direction. These. variations are Expressed in the variation “of the actual eccentricty of th Unbalanced mass ond the phase shife with respect tthe Alaplacement of the main mace. The restoring force is proportional to daplacement of the ‘mein mess relative to it state position and is directed in the ‘ppasite direction, the inrtinl force I proportional to. the fscceleration and directed Inthe dleplacemont direction, This these two forces are mutually opposed and compensate each other, The resistance foree ects perpendicular to them [Let us now consider interaction of these forces with the exciting Force. The vibratory machine of the subresonant type | characterized by high stiffness of the springs. Therefore, vwhen large restoring forces are developing during ite operation they signifcantly exceed the. Inertia. forces In the” system, ‘These two forces are directed opposite each other, therefore Forces. The difference of these forces, whose magnitude can be vor) significant, acts In the system. Consequently, the exciting Torce must have & component overcoming the excess restoring force. In addition, the exciting force has a component determine the magnitude and direction of acton of the exciting force, The vibratory machine of the transresonant type has soft springe. Therefore, the restoring forces acting) in it are Inuignificane and cannot totally compensate for the Inertia orces. Therefore, the exciting force must hve, in addition to scting egeinst the ineril forces. In the resonant vibratory machine working at the natural frequency, inertial forces. are totaly "compensated by the restoring forces. Hence, the exciting force must overcome only the resistence forces. Consequently. the force is smallest In Imagritude in the resonant repime aad is directed opposite to the reslatance forces, re, under viscous resistances Ht colnedes with the drecton of velocity. If vibratory machioe which was previously operating In the subresonant or transresonant regimes needs to be changed fover to the resonant operating regime b) means of appropriate Shitetment, then there is no need. any longer to” overcome festoring or inertial Forces, The exciting force turns out 0 be Ieger than required for’ overcoming the resistance forces Vibration Exciters ws scting In the system. The excess exciting force would sway the Sibratory machiae Increasing amplitude of the main mast until the growing resistance forces would balance the exciting force ‘The vibratory machine changes over again tothe stationary ‘operating regime which wil, however, be characterized by the Growing’ dlplacementa of the working image, Thie it a Ianifestation of the specific features of the vibratory machine Inthe resonant regime, Te must again be emphasized that In the resonant regime the amplitude Is established and limited only by the acting resistances, The higher the resistances, the smaller the “mplitudes, Therefore, If in the proceas of operation of the resonant vibratory machine, the oscillations of the working Clement begin to decrease due to rising resistances, one mist Increace the’ exciting force magnitude “up to. the velues necessary to maintain the specified amplitude. We bive considered the vibratory machine whose working sloment [x suspended on elastic connections of equal sf vess However, «machine ‘can have, for example, vertical sletic connections that are considerably stffer than the horizontal tones. Thon daplacements of the working element of the ‘ibratory machine in the directions of these connections will be Uiterent. Ie was shown that the atiffmesses of the clastic Connections exert different effect on the daplacement of the working organ in diferent. operating regimes. Thus, ifthe Inechine is tuned st subresonant operating regime, then the working organ would have large displacements In the direction OP nthe elastic. “connection having lower. uffness. With Cransresonant. tuning. everything. will be reversed placements. will be inthe direction of the stiffer elastic Tink. This Is due to the fect that the restoring forces of the flnsle inks in. subresonant. regis are large and are not Balanced ty the Inerual forces; therefore, the vibration excter in forced to overcome these excess forces. It 18 obvious that the softer connection hinders the motion lessr therefore, the isplacement is greater in Its direction Th the teansresonant regime the predominate, and the excting force acts 3 laste connections assist in overcoming these forces; naturally the atffer they are, the leas resistance the Inertial forces ‘Seer ageinat the displacement of the vibratory machine. Different daplacements of she working organ In diferent directions result ina variation of the. shape of motion trajectory. Instead. of 2 circle an ellipse is developing2% ‘Theory of Vibratory Technology Moreover, the configuration of the ellipse varies with chenging resistance and stiffness of the elastic connections “Thus, by placing clastic links of ifferent stiffness in uiferent” directions, one can change the shape of motion trajectory of the working pare of the vibratory machine, This iz Important "from ‘the practical viewpoint, ince. it enables fenoration of "various operating regimes of the vibratory Inachine with simple unbalenced mace dive Im. the ‘subresonant. regime, the working mass of the vibratory machine and unbalanced mass move along. ellipses Whose aves coincide. ‘The working part travels along. the inner tllipse snd the unbalanced mass along the outer ellipse Fg ‘U2la). The characteristic Teature of the relative motion of the working mass of the vibratory machine and the unbalanced Inass In the subresonant regime te the fact that the direction oF the radius of the unbalanced mass dows wot. pass through the origin of the coordinates except for the cases when both masses. are located on the major axes of the lipses. The Working ‘mass of the vibratory machine and the unbalanced yhass duving the process of the entire motion are Inthe ime Suacrant with respect to the coordinate axes. Despite the fact that position vectors of the Working. and unbslanced masses traverse diferent angles over equal time intervals, the rads of the unbalanced mass turns BY equal anglos over the eae time intervas Since distance along the path of motion between successive positions of the working mass ie diferent, its absolute velocity varies not only in direction but also in magnitude. When the working mass or the unbalanced mass are Toeated on the principal axes of the ellipse, megaitudes of these velocities acquire extrome values, When they are located fon the minor axis of the ellipse the velocity Ix maximum, snd ‘when located an the major als the velocity 1s minimum im the tranaresonant regime the picture. changes. sharply. ‘The motion also takes place along sllipes; however, ther axes sre mutually perpendicular andthe masses are on. different tides of the origin of the coordinate system (ig. 428). In the lransresonant operating regime. the mejor axes of the elliptic paths of the working, and unbalanced ‘mates are positioned Perpendicular with respect ¢o each other. The working and Unbalanced masses in steady-state motion are positioned. In opposite quadrants. ‘The working and. unbalanced masses located simultaneously on” the princlpal sxer of the eliptcal trajectory but on opposite sides from the coordinate origin. Vibration Exciters sr wo “i = Ie The most diverse trajectories can be obtained in this case when stiffnesses of the elastic connections are selected in such {way that the natural frequency in one direction is lower and In the perpendicular direction higher than the forced frequency. Le, “there ie transresonant tuning in one rection, and subresonant tuning In the other direction. Ths regime received the name intermediate or interresonant rage Im the Intermediate regime. when ky = ky and Py > 09> the trajectories of the working mass nd Bf the “unbalanced ‘mass will be ellipses, and the half-axes of the unbalanced mass trajectory are equal to ay = Aye rand a= ay ~ F (Bg.4210. In this cate the tralectory is elongated slong axis X When plotting trajectories of oth masses and determining thelr mutual location, the parametric angle of trajectory of the working meats must be lid off ta the direction opposite to the Totation of the rotor: ‘This is due Go. the fact. that inthe and the unbalanced mast move in opposite directions ‘The Intermediate regime of operation of the vibratory machine Is characterized" by the greatest diversity of ‘of motion of the workIng and unbalanced masses Gand of their mutual position “during” motion. The regime Presents big opportunities for synthesis of the effective Processing regimes: however. It requres that special measures be taken to ‘ensure the effective operation of the sibratory ‘machine When resistance forces proportional to velocity act on the bratory machine, the working, and) unbalanced masses will Comcids with the coordinate aves. The acting vesietancee in the fystem seem to rotate the ‘trajectory of the working mass Felative to the coordinate axes. Since the production process ftfectiveness depends largely on the trajectory of the working Imass, cls should be considered for the optimum design of the machine ‘Owing to the fact that, as we already know, the parameters. of motion of the working mass of the sibratory Imachine affect the laws of motion of the unbalanced mace, [ee frajectory also becomes. elliptical Ia this case, the mutual porition of the working and unbalanced masses is determined bythe phase shift between them and. Bence, by the operating Fegine of the vibratory machine and the magnitude of the Fesiatance forces. In this case the machine le tuned for the Intermediate Unterresonant) regime. when the detuning factors in the direction of extremal stffnesees of the clastic conmections are diferent, the configurations of the elliptical frajectores and thelr mutual positon can be very diverse In och specific case, The tractors of motion of the working Sed unbalanced masses Tor the interresonant regime py > > Dy are given in Fig. 42e Tf the natural and forced frequencies colncide, py =o, In the dirsetion of one of the axes, resonant amplification of the boscllation takes place. The transient regime of establishing the esonant ocillations in the direction of one of the elastic Snnections of the vibratory machine ts presented in Fig. 42th Vibration Exciters oe ‘eajectory of the working mass during acceleration of the vibratory machine with Isotropic links in the resonant regime is Shoven in Fig. 4214 From the standpoint of providing effective execution of ‘the specified production process, the form of the trajectory of tmotion of the working clement of the vibratory machine tx of Considerable interest. Analysis shows that, generally, trajectory ff motion of the working. element is an ellipse which can, ‘depending on such perameters as the stiffnesses of the elastic Connections and frequency, vary from circular to linear. The Production process with elliptical and circular trajectories Significantly affected by the direction of trajectory following ‘which ir determined by direction of rotation of the unbalanced Irase, The angle of inclination of the principal aie of the Cliptical trajectory to ani x and the ratio of the malor and tninor aver depend on angle 7 = 0% + py - pj) and are etermined by expressions Abas f@heap tga, ay Ape Al [ART AD WAAC “The direction of traversing the elliptical trajectory, which is extremely important. In many practical cares, is obtained without changing ite configuration by changing the phase angle From +7 t0 "7 ‘Another very important problem for optimum design of the ‘ibratory machine is study of the factors) influencing Imegotude of the excking force on the vibrator) machine. Tt Imight appeer that this le simple, and ifthe vibrator parameters re known, then It would’ not be difficult. to compute. the Generated contriugel Forse, However, this ts not the care at SIL Te was established earlier thet radius vector of rotation of the nbelanced mass ls_dependent not only on the structural purameters of the wibrator, but also on the regime and parameters of oxcillations of the part of the vibratory machine ‘Sn which the vibrator Ie mounted. Thus, we have established That the oscilation regime of the slbratory. machine directly affecte the magnitude of the exciting Force generated by thea0 “Theory of Vibratory Technology vibrator. Let us determine the way the magaitude of the actual Fadlus vector of the unbalanced mass’ depends on the Parameters of oscllations and tuning of the vibratory machine. Since during operation of the vibratory machine the axis of shaft rotation of the unbalanced mast is diplaced inthe stationary coordinate system by x, with acceleration §, and the center of the unbalanced mess performs « complicated motion (relative rotation with an angular velocity around. It ‘wn axis and transfer motion together with the oscillating smass), the exciting. force scting on the owcllting maee opendent on the acceleration of the tranafer motion, ‘The working vibratory machine Is ected upon by the components of the exciting force = mira? con wt ~ 8) = Py sin Wot ~ 4) By mew? sin at =f Py contut ~ 4) Where the amplitude values of the components of the exciting Force are equal £9 ing + [na oP Inet + py AP PRICE a Wah yt les between dlaplacements of the snbalanoed tor Sq and Jy and the components of the ‘iting force Fy and Fy are : any 2 fet OE as Lat Waele 2any 0? owe oD dale Vibration Exciters Py From these expesions it allows that the amplitude valuta the component th. dneaones force nthe rede of stntyone anlar fie wae) machi sees nctteag, wor are ropa tothe tefal’ force ofthe wnslaced mace ane bat les ‘Spanien on th fining’ Confers of unre ny" «oe seep and on thea g of the rotating do meee Fie Bisa’ urine and ase on the Soeunesnaners Singin ioe jee which ar shred ee dnging fos enya “The iron" of ae Setting fore dans not clade with the potion" the unbaannd muses and fastened © Se fanmtery and ning of the nratary maton "he evcing free eacher simu‘ machine parts it's reson rome, Tee nla 6 Toei taint tgine mpi a te wenn shoes (Stina! nds Soups th rds veer of ton of etna. zaman, ithe, eresonant sea eases Sf te weting somes Ser alr Muri the racer pie, bet since they sve sae ap tdue to ‘acute ate tglbetmeen dapaconete of he setae? lett cle Ebalaced mae the ecting fore Ting fhe etry eaten ie grner thn iw ee fer genered by the elon bao: In the weaned reget working ase ofthe vitor macie he Sess Sr ciates eet comers cue one pie ieebtses Gevetor the sss Paar of the waned mse eee age ae toe uae at arte eines mae eas the te acing farce enrsed Wye Sone beta. ee corrutan beeen magnus af the ening force nd tng SET rtoy acne ad the mong. rohit fore She teem roine the cnsting foe increases ta Teter eT cine forces attg on the ory maine {Ee male, Mosca, desesing of te resstance leo t= Soot cra ooees eet re eee Ce eee os eee ee fee"Gutereeran resins an erp doped ake nc” So Sikiay Wace beeen stances ats is ofthe stone sets an inert” rat conceit be Sra The muberopan, error sn sr’gutcaa'wenreonan regimes athe ratory chee Seats Ghancersed acer say: ncretoga ‘Theory of Vibratory Technology load leads to decreasing exciting force and, consequeatly, to Aisruption of ‘the oscillation regime In the’ traneresonant regime. the increase of load on the vibratory machine is Ssecompanied by a rise in the exciting. force. Sich = Characteristic. of the vibratory machine in. the ta ogime provides stable operation under large variable For optimum design iis important to know not only the considered features of formation of the exciting force, wt so Information om the required specific value of the exciting force, ‘which haz tobe applied to the vibratory machine in various tuning regimes and fonds. Analysis shows that the unit exciting Force: changes sharply in different operating regimes of the vibratory machine. In the aubresonant regime, ensure the Same parameters of oscillations much larger forces than in the Uransresonant regime are needed. Minimum forces for imparting ‘sailations to the sjstem are required in resonance. Increasing the resistances in the system In-an) operating regime. of the Nibratory machine causes an Increase of the unit exeting fore, However, in the subresonant and near-resonant regimes, the cexcting force Increases with Increasing resistances more rapidly than In the traneresonant regime. Hence the conclusion follows that under large loads the transresonant operating regime of the vibratory machine with fn inertial deve. ie very effective. From the standpoint of Feduction of ‘the exciting force, the resonant regime has an ‘vantage only at salad limited loads The exciting forces genereted with the rotation of the unbalanced masa are transmitted to the vibratory machine ‘a the vibrator bearings. Since these forces are very late Feliablty of the machine with an inertial drive. is ‘termined by Information on the opersing. conditions bearings and” by corvect selection of the type and. size of bearings Let us consider the conditions of operation of the bearings unite in the unbalanced-mase vibrator” rst. of all, let us ‘decermine which forces act on tho bearings. Having some fexporience Of determining the magaltude of the exciting force, wwe shall not assert thet the bearings are loaded bythe Centrifugal force generated by the rotating unbalanced mass of the stetlonary vibrator. But Tor conducting bearings falouations, the enciting force determined above lao cannct te taken at the design load ‘Let us determine the load acting on the bearings by analyzing how itis formed In the opersting vibratory machine Vibration Ecitere an ‘The pressure on the Bearings is equal to the unbalanced mass multiplied by the acceleration of ite center of mass in the Stationary coordinate frame. The projections of the acceleration Gf the center of the unbalanced mast onthe sttlonary Coordinate anes aro detormined from double fferentition of projections of the dlaplacement of the center of the {nbalanced mass in the stationary coordinate frame. As Follows from the layout of the vibratory machine presented in Fig. 4, the projections of the iaplacements of the center of the linbalancad mass in the stationary coordinate system of the ses ere equal to yeryrzane “Therefore, the projections of accelerations of the center of the unbalanced mass on the exes of the stationary coordinate tame are fot Fab con e- a ain By projecting acceleration of the center of the unbalanced mass on tee radius and multiplying the obtained expression by fhe unbalanced mast, we determine the Jond om the bearings Fy som Reon pF ain p28) Subtituting Into the obtained expression the values of the coresponding accelerations, ste. determine pressures. In the bearings of the vibrator. When the vibratory machine oscillates Slonge citcular trajectory, Le, when the major and. minor Talf-acee of the ellipse are identical ay * Ay =A, pressure on the bearing units can be determined froin expression autipt - 68) ml Fas mt [ for from the graphe of Fig. 622. By analyzing the presented pendence it becomes. evident that the lowds In the. Dearing nits of the vibrator are lao substantial) dependent on theoe Theory of Vibratory Technology a 7 fe ‘operating regime and resistances acting inthe vibratory machine” When the Working element of the vibratory machine {in motion slong a clreuar trajectory, equal losda that are Constant in time act on the bearings In all directions. The magnitude of the loed on the bearings ie determined by the Conenfugal ‘force of the unbalanced masa relative to. the orator axle and depends ‘on the. tuning of the oscilatory ‘System of the vibratory machine. In the resonant regime. the Vibration Excters ats value of the resistances does not influence the load magnitude, ‘The Forces ecting on the beatings Tor the resonant tuning are the same as in @ stationary vibrator. Tn the subresonane regime, the loads on the bearings of the vibrator are inereesing. reaching a muximum value at detuning factora. of 07 = O75. In the Irenaresonant regime, leeds on the bearings decrenee, especialy at detining factors oF 135-150. The londe on the bearings decrenee most Substantially in traneresonant.reghmes tt low resistances and ‘with the Increasing ratio between the value of ‘the unbalanced ihass and the total mass of the vibratory machine ta the aubresonant regime an opposite picture i observed Sncreaning the vesotancee aed the ration. of the rotating, aud total masses of tho vibratory machine leads to increasing loads fon the bearing units This characteristic property of vibratory tmechines with inertial drive rust be taken into account by the ‘esigner for multicriteria! design optimization For the resonent tuning. of the machine, loads in the bearings are “determined only by the magnitude of the centrifugal force generated) during the “rotation of the Unbalanced mass. The magnitede of the loads of the bearings ‘of the vibrator In the resonant regime te not influenced by ther the resatances acting in the system or by the ratio of the rotating and total-maases of the machine. In the resonant Fegime, the loads. in the vibrator bearings and, hence, the ‘ffore involved In overcoming. them, are lower then in the Sbrosonane regime but igher then In the tranaresonent fegime, This ir an indication that the ‘opiion held among Serigners that resonant machines are more energy efficiency Ie not substantiated with repect to machines with inetal dive Tn view of the above, the expression for determining the toads in the bearings units of vibratory machines Is convenient terrepresent as a cosfficient of variation of bearings loeding ta the subresonant and transresonaat regimes compared with the 1( Fe.) te i 3-)- See ‘This expression and the graph in Fig. 4.282 can be used for vibratory machines whiowe working slement travels along « ireular path. In ths case my" ny = te Py = By =PTheory of Vibratory Technology WIP oon bg Ps On oe I the trajectory of the working slement differs from the ‘computations must be conducted by the formule Vo ee (Gs) tite vu tt Perr 2 any 0 1 follows from the presented expression that with clliptical trajectories of the Working element of the vibratory Imachine, the loads on the bearing nite sre changing I Aiffeent directions. Furthermore, in addition to the constant from the centrifugal force of ‘the rotating anbslanced iso periodic Toads act, on the bearing unlts: pulsating ‘changing sign) lowde slat at and cost st with frequency lacand alternating Toads with Frequency 2a. Figure 4.326 shows Performing rectlinesr and! circular oscil rect Toads on the "Bearing unit of) the vibratory machine ton at cifferent detuning factors and values of the Vibration Exciers a7 land total masses of the vibratory machine, Tt is fvident from the graphs that in the resoaent regime in both ‘cases the bearing Wnts are subjected to identical forces in all rections. In the subresonant regime under circular oscillations ‘he loads on the berings in all directions are increasing neh Ientical way; for rectilinear oscillations the loads "are Increasing only in the direction of oscillations while remaining Unchanged in the perpendicular direction. In resonant regimes vith etreular oscillations the loade on the bearing unite. are Secreasing in ll directions; while with rectilinear osllations they are decreasing only in the direction of oscillation, while remaining unchanged In the perpendicular direction Contitions for bearing units of vibratory machines im the regime of periodic loading and alferent. loads in alfferent Girections are more demanding and lead to a faster failure ‘Therefore, from the standpoint of creating favorble conditlons of operation of the vibratory machine, regime of circular ‘oscillations te more desirable From the standpoint of uring favorable operation of the vibrator bearing nit 10 extremely Important to Know the loade on the ‘bearing white tn various regimes and under the ction of diverse loads, but for the same amplitude of ‘rcilations of the vibeatory machine, Le, changes of the unit Toad on the bearings. From the above presented dependences, It follows that the load ‘in resonance Je equal to. the sominal load, while in fubresonant regimes the load Is Increasing and ia the franerevonant ‘regimes ~ decreasing, The resistances acting. In the ayetem tn ll replies Toad to. decrease of the loads. on the bearing units, The effect of the fesltances ts particularly rident in the resonance regime, From the viewpoint of operational durability, 1t Ix very Important te know ‘which loade act on the wlastic system of the vibratory machine and are transmitted. chrough Ie to. the Supporting structure. The loads onthe elastic. system are fenerated by the inertial forces of the working clement of the Mibratory machine and by the Inertial forces of the unbelanced nase, which act via the bearings. supports on the working “lement and then transmitted to the elastic connections, These forces are. deforming the elastic connections and. internal Strescee generated in. them are determining. their service fe. Two types of stresses are ctested In the elastic connections (Mastic stresses whove values are. proportional to deformations nd viscour stresses which are proportional to the rate of ‘deformation348 Theory of Vibratory Technology In the absence of external resistances the inertial forces ‘acting, in the vibratory machine are completely. balanced by Fractions in the elastic conection and. by the exciting force ‘cting opposite tothe inertial force vector. The. more. the Inertial forces are compensated by the component of the ‘ecciting force, the less the loading of the elastic system. The reactions of the elastic connections are in thelr turn transmitted to the ipportig elements of the structure on which the vibratory mech ie mounted. Thus, for durability of the. elastic. system and” for "reduction af loads, on. the supporting. structure (reduction of transmission of harmful Vibrations to the surrounding medium), i Is desiable to reduce loading of the elastic connections. as much ae. possible. Since the elastic eloments have hysteretic losses, (usually they are Imodeled by the forces of viscous resistances), not only the Inertial forces of the ibratory machine, which are not compensated by the component of the exciting. free, are tranemited to) the clastic system, but a0 the Feolstance forces. As a result, the total stresses in the el System, made up from elastic and viscous ‘omponents, ane Increasing’ and larger dynamic. louds are transmitted tothe bse, Te should be noted” that" ia Some types of elastic sloments, Tor example, in rubber slemente, hysteresis losses tre large. Therefore. their contribution to the Inerlal stresses (Can be significant and ie would be Incorrect ignore I “Thus, in the general case, the elastic system Is loaded by the Inertial forces of the oscillating. masses. of the vibratory machine, which are not compensated by the drive, and by the hysteresis resisances in the material of the elastic elements This creumstance ought to be taken into account forthe ‘optimum multicrterlal design of the vibratory machine TIneernal stresses In the slaatle connections and. reactions fon the load-carrying structure are determined by expressions Rex [hy 08 (ot ~ 99) + cyuninlot ~ 9y)]Ay= RE-comloe-f) gf -sintue- fy) Ray = [np sintoe~ 9p) +6, conor gy] Ay were the unit (educed to unified inertial force of the total scllatory moss of the vibratory mechine) amplitudes of the ‘ates of the preastre Componente are equal to Vibes oie eat op eee eg ees Gag Pecng aa 8 AY taf Pog land the angles of phase shife between the displacements of the Vibratory machine and the pressure components of the elastic flements are on Exeiters ue act 22" are the coefficients of realtence of the tleatic Winks refefred tos unit mass of the vibratory suchine In the directions of mes 7 rom the presented expressions it follows that the pressure onthe ‘elastic links le proportional tothe inertial Force of the total. mass of the’ vibratory machine and atbetanthlly dependent on the tuning. of the cecllator, System. ‘The pressures. are particularly high during of near Fesonance. During operation in transresonant regimes the pressure drops aherply ‘A double effect of the reslatances on the value of loading of the slastie connections would be noted. In subresonant. and hear-resonant ropimes the Toading Is ineresing with decreasing satances. In. the tranerosonant regime thi ts reversed. and ecreasing resistances results in reduced loading of the elastic ‘connectons “The phase shift between displacements of the vibratory rachine and the force compononts In the Taree from zero degrees for 50° for a ‘care when they” have. practically no.stiffness: for example, when the vibratory machine Is mounted on alr ‘ishion. The phase shift in the resonant regime ie determined by. the resitences in the elastic system. "With increasing resistances, the phase shift is Increasing ‘Phase shifts betwoon the displacements of the unbalanced rasees of the vibration exeiter and componente of forces In the elastic connections “are determined ty the following expressions byt Py By30 Theory of Vibratory Technology Hm ty * hs “Thus, In order to reduce loads in the elastic connections fand on the carrying. structure, and to limit propagation of ibrtions into the surrounding medium, it Ie expedient t0 tine the vibratory machine For traneresonant operation, 4323 Parameters of the Vibratory Machine with Constant Reslstancee Independent of the Machine Motion ‘Let us consider the pattern of operation of the vibratory ‘machine with constant resistance forces in the syste, Constant resistances. are applied tothe working. clement ‘of the vibratory machine In a direction opposite to the velocky ‘of its dleplacement and remain constant in time, The resistance forces are expressed in terms of their projections on the coordinate axer Fy. Fy. Although the resistance forces are Constant, their projections onthe coordinate exes” will be ‘arable quantities, since in the motion process of the vibratory ‘machine ‘direction cosines of velocity vectors vary. Therefore, he componente of the constant reristance forces “can be Fog * Fn (at + Og, Foy * F cot lat 2) Here oy and oy are the phase shifts betwen the position of the unllanced’ mace and’ direction af the components. of the constant resistances forces Motion of the vloratery, roachine ttder the sctlon of countant resistance forces ie described by the following diferential equations (Meme + kyr = mat conwe + FF not + ry) (tem 3 = ky = me sine © Fc08 lat © 5) Solution of these equations enables one to. determine Aisplacements parameters of the working element J Ay sa (ot + 1) Vibration Exeiere ost Where the components of the amplitude of the forced ‘Orcilstons of the working element are aed fF pene anak fF ope A Phase shifts betwoon the displacements of the working element fnd the travel of the unbalanced mass of the vibrator are y+ arcsinf* ‘The following notation Is assumed here Quantity characerioes the ratio of the constant resistance force and the exciting, force generated by the ‘bration exciter. "The presented expressions indicate that constant resistances lead eerentially to the reduction of the fective Force generated with the rotation of the vibeetor unbalanced ‘mass, Therefore, the amplitade of dleplacement of the working Slement of the vibretory machine is proportional to. the ‘difference between exciting and resistance forces. “Thus, the motion of the vibratory machine Is possible only If the forces of constant resistances do. not exceed the exciting Force generated with the rotatlon of the unbalanced. mass. of the vibrator The quantity [In the cases that are of practical Tnorest can change from zero. (constant resistance forces are 0), n‘which case the machine is ldling, to unity (constant Fesatance forces are equal in magnitude to the amplitude value (of the exciting force generated by the vibrator). im which case the machine stops “The toning of the vibratory machine considerably affects the magnitude of the oscillation amplitude. The oscilation fmplitude Increases sharply Inthe near-resonant regimes, ‘reaching Infinity at resonance. Te must be meatloned that th Constant resistances, If they are less than the exciting force ina2 Theory of Vibratory Technology magnitude, do not restrict the oscillation amplitude ia the Fesbnant regime a6 In the case of viscous resistances in the System. In the regimes other than the resonant regime the Oscillation amplitude decreasee with Increasing constant The phase shift between the unbelanced mass and Aisplacement of the working element in the case of constant Fslatances lz independent of the tuning of the silatory ‘ystom and Is determined only by the ratio of the resistance Force and the exciting force of the vibrator. As investigations tahow, the phase shift cannot exceed 45°, since further Incretee fof the resistance causes a decrease in the power supplied by the vibrator” to overcome the resistances, The mation trajectories of the Working masz. and unbalanced masses are tllipses. ‘The motion trajectory of the working mass Io an fllipse whose axes of symmetry coincide with the coordinate Sxes, Thus, the ‘constant resistances uniformly change the “dimension of the ellipse, but do not turn it relative to the axis of symmetry, Figure 4.24 shows the motion trajectory and the mutual positions of the vibratory machine mass and the unbalanced ‘ass when the unit is opereting in the Interresonant regime Under the action of significant constant forces thet are equal fof" = OS. In this case, the constant forces are equal to half the amplitude, value” of the excking force of the Unbalanced-mass sibraton excler. Inthe presence of constant resistances, the following components of the exciting force act on the vibratory machine with anlsotrople elastle elements Fes Py ain (ot + gh By = Py cos lat + 4) where the amplitude values of the components of Ube exciting Force ere equal to poe ne Ee DR OE Vibration Exciters 383 Figure 426 Trajectory of motion and mutual positions of the toto im she tren opin wre can 1 follows from the derived expressions thet the exciting force generated by the vibrator, in care of constant resistance forces, Is proportional to the. centrifugal force of the Unbalanced mass and depends on the magnitude of resistances tnd tuning of the oscilatory syatem of the vibratory machine. In the subresonant regimes, the amplitude of the exciting force Incresses proportionately to the magnitude of the centrifugal force of the unbalanced mass. The exciting force Increases particularly sharply” ia. the’ near-resonant.rogimes: In the Eraneresonant regimes a reduction of the amplitude value of the exclting force takes place, The variation of Intensity of the fxciting force, both. rae and fall, le. "determined. by the Imagaitide of the resistances In the system. ‘The. larger the rificent the variation of the exciting rent reglaes “The phase shife between position of the unbalanced mass and direction of the exclting. force Is zero If there are no fslatances in the system. With increasing resistances the phase Shi increas. The louds on the bearing unite of the vibratory machine with clastic links of “equal stffacss and with constant Tesltances are directed slong. the radiub-vector of the tinbalanced mase and are proportional to the centrifugal force ‘The dimensionless excens Toad on « bearing anit, Ley the load rcribed to the inertial force of the oscillating mass of ‘the ‘oratory machine and which exceeds the load generated by theast Theory of Vibratory Technology tunbalanced-mass centrifugal force, i determined from ‘expression (fe ana The excess load on the bearings unit decreases with Increasing constant resistances in the oscillating system. ln the Subresonant operating regimes of the ‘vibratory machine. the loads increase proportionately to the lows due to centrifugal force. In the tlansreconant regimes loads on the bearing units fate reduced. The bearing unite are loaded particularly heavily in {he earesonant regimes, In the far traneresonant regimes, the loade on the beoring unite decrease significantly. The formula for determination of the excess load acting on the bearings cannot be used for calculations in rexonaace when p= {Go since the phase shift in this case is 90° Irrespective of the cuing resistances. In thls case, the direction of the eccentricity | perpendicular to the radius vector of daplacement. of the Vibratory machine. Working mass and transition takes place From positive to negative exeese lords, tes transition through ‘The loads tranemitted by the elaste connections to. the supporting structures are. proportional to their stiffness and ‘magnitude of deformation. ‘These loads coincide in phase with fhe displacements and are, therefore, phase shifted relative. to location of the unbalanced mass y= RY (cost + yh Rye BE sinlat + 3h Where the amplitude values of the load components are sssumed absent; therefore, the stresses In them are determined ‘nly by elastic deformations. Lauds sige (oA) Fey and sige (9) Vibration Exciters as which are in antiphase with the veloclty, are transmitted ‘Bough the pare with constant resistances Ifthe constant Ferlstances act in the elements of the suspension assembly, then they are transmitted to. the supporting structure. When the constant resistances act along the contact of the working ‘loment. with the process load, they afe transmitted to the processed” anedim, ‘Strictly speaking, i ls necessary inthe Kitter case to take into. account the laws of motion of the processed medium. In the calculations, one must take into Consderation the relative velocity between the worklng element find. the process load instead of velocity of the, working Slement on which constant resistances act Exact’ methods of Caleuletion of vibratory machines under load. ‘which are ‘developed using ‘rheological models of the process load, are presented In section 5. 42246 Parameters of « Vibratory Machine with Combination (of Constant and Velocity Dependent Reslatances The motion of 4 vibratory machine when velocty~ proportionse and constant resistances act simultaneously Is Gescribed by the following system of efferent equations (noms + ogi + ken = mrutconat + FPaintot + ¥) omy + 65+ kyy = mrutein wt + Freoslat + ¥) ‘The right-hand ides of these equations include the projections of the centrifugal force of the unbalanced mass and fhe constant resistances. By analyzing the right hand “sides of these equations, st can bo seen that they contain expressions that are independent of the motion parameters of the vibratory Imachine, All these. quantller are harmonic Tunctlons of the Sngle of rotation of the unbalanced mas and are shifted with fespect to each other by angle 7. These harmonic functions can Gerreduced. to one function. The component. force of the Constant resistances reduces the component from the exciting orces ‘When co land velocity proportionate resistances act in the oscillation system each one_ influences Inotion of the vibratory. machine. Therefore, the general olution of the equation comprises two parts. The Working ‘lement performe displacements350 Theory of Vibratory Technology A= Ay, 608 (at = 9) + Agg sin [at-tp, 7] FF Ay, tin (oe + 99) + Ayy cos [ot = try ©] Where amplitudes of components of the forced oscillations are Tespectvely equal to 7 ey ots s Jentre pra Ot" Tate ar yest ae Pee ee Daas peat “V8” Tanga eae land the phese angles between the working element and the Unbalanced mass of the vibrator are ange = y= arcsin #* ‘The presented expressions indicate chat the first componente of the eucllation amplitude of the working lement are determined only by the velocty-proportionste Feslatences and are exactly equal tothe ‘componente of the Gisplacemente which are determined in the oscillation system Under the action of only this type of resiatsnces. Furthermore, they have the same phase shift with respect to the position of the” unbalanced” mass.” The ‘second componente of the ‘osellations of the vibretory machine are dependent on both the Viscous "end. constant roaitances and their phase. abift ie determined oniy by the constant resistances, ‘By analysing the effect of eich type of the resistances on ‘oscilations of the vibratory machine, one can determine. the Components “of the complex oscillation amplitude. of the ‘working clement which are formed due to both wpes of x= Ax conLlot ~ 9p) + 1") and y= ay ain[loe - 99) + v4] Where the components of the complex amplitude of the forced Dscllations are respectively equal to tps ELE, 4, we NS Yanget oan “Tansee oop = ae land the phase shifts between the working lement and the linbalanced mass of the vibrator are Vey = 7") and (py =" where Analysis of the presented expressions shows thet the componente of the motion amplitude of the working. element fre proportional to the effective magnitude of the exciting Force which taker into account values of the constant resistances. The resistances that are dependent on the vibratory Velocity. and tuning of the oscillation system significantly Affect the amplitude." In_ the “subresonant and. transresonant Feghmes, the amplitude decreases vith the Increase of both ‘iscous" and constant resistances, In the resonant. regime the Amplitade of oscllations of the working element Is restricted ‘only by. the. yelocity-depending’ resistances, The constant Feslstances. only Increase the duration of the period of the transient process for the etablishment “of resonant fvcllaions, since they reduce the magnitude of the effective sxeting force “The one~mass vibratory machine with anisotropic elastic connections with constant resistances and velocty-dependent Fesistances is acted upon by the components of the exci Force Bet Pe ot + Yy) and Fy = Fy costae + 9) where the amplitude values of the exciting Force are equal to Pia + [hwo The WR OF ee wait PA [ap - eon iC Tape GE aEasa Theory of Vibratory Technology land the phase angles with respect to the position of the Fe FOP ee He Gy FOF By HT Here the phase angles between the exciting force and the sachine velocity are equal te pg = eget 2a Pat Of o arete From the expressions given above it follows that the exciting foree generated by the wbrator, whe bath constant tnd velocty-dependent resistances. ae. acting. It proportional to the centrifugal force developed by the unbolanced mass and dependent on the total value of the” acting. ronstancen, In Sbresonant regimes the amplitude of the exciting force rises ce gered wth the vols ofthe canrfuga) force of the Sislnced mass, The exciting force icreeses most Significantly in near-resonant regimes. In transresonent regimes the exciting force amplitude decreases. ‘The degree of veretion of the exciting force inthe aubresonant and. transresonent fecimes te dependent on both types of resistances, Increasing Both types of resistances reduces them ‘acting fore tate cabronansan aod teroreconent. give In the tramaresonant™ regime’ the resistances, wich are Force, while the constant resltances fclitate its reduction. In the resonant regime. the agaitade of the cing force le restcited only by the components that are velocty dependent. ‘The toads on the bearing unite of the vibeator under the Nibratory machine, for which the stiffness of the elastic Conectons ie the same In both axes directions, colnide In Gireeion with the radlue-vactor of the anbalaned mass. The loads on the bearings ere proportional to the centfugal fore of the unbalanced mass developed by the moving vibrator. The Simensionloss excere lod on the beating unite af the wbrator is atecnined from expresion Vibration Exciters 399 4 (Ao. ) We trigtawtt a rat ante + tao? ‘The ratlo of the rotating and total masses of the vibratory machine ‘sigoificantly affects the excess. Toad magnitude Increasing this ratlo when the machine. Ie operating In the sbresonane region leads to an increase of load on the beating Unies. But onthe other hand, the bearing units can. be significantly unloaded In the’ transresonant regimes by Increasing the unbalanced mass while keeping the mass of the vibratory machine constant “On the basis of the above stated, in order to unload the bearing unite, ne can recommend for tansresonant machines © reduction of he oscillation frequency and an increase of the Unbalanced mass” without changing the excling force Iageitude, Increasing constant resistances in. the. vlbratory machine leads to's decrense of the losd on the bearing unite oth In the subresonant. and. transresonant regions. Inthe Teeimes near resonance the loads are maily affected by the ‘constant Tesltances. The veleclty-dependent resistances reduce Toads on’ the beariog unite. in the. subresonant regimes end Incroaee In the transresonant regimes 4325 Operation of Vibratory Machines under Translational ‘and Torslonal Osallatlon In a number of cates, the ale of rotation of the unbelanced fnass "dove not coincide with the center of mass of the Working element of the vibratory machine. Then the. vibration Trelter’ generates an exciting torque, "which leads tothe {reation of torsional osellations of the working element. The erque magoitude depends on coordinater a, b of the axis of Fotation end is determined by the following expression M= mrt (a cos wt © 8 sin at) ‘The torsional oscilatlons of the working element of the vibratory machine are described by the equstion Ti = ch kjo* mira? (a con wt + bin wtM0 Theory of Vibratory Technology where cj, Kj ave viscous resistances and stiffness coetMiciente Of the ‘elastic system for torsional oscillations; I is the ‘moment of inertia of the working element of the vibratory machine The generation of torsional oscillations causes various points ‘of the working element to oscillate along. differeat frajectories. The laws of formation of the trajectory fields of the working element when it excited by two synchronously rotating unbalanced vibration exclers are considered in. work cs Let us consider the formation of the trajectory field of the working element of a vibratory machine that is excited by fon unbelanced-mace vibrator whose anie is located at different points with respect to the center of mass of the working ‘Toren it the ania of rotation 0, does not coincide with the center of mass O of the working element of the vibratory tachine, then It will perform, in the general case, oscillations long elliptical trajectories which at some points degenerete Into clcles oF straight lines. The distebution ‘of the oscillation Urajectories of various points of ‘the Working element of the ratory machine which it excited. by an. unbalanced-mass Vibration exclter, whose axle of rotation is located at dlatance 1h from the center of mass, is presented inthe schematic ‘lagram on Fig. 425, From this dagram, it follows that there fare some characteristic points of the working element. which have circular or rectilinear oscillation trejectores Thus, the ‘center of mass of the working clement long. a circus trajectory whose amplitude I A = fmr/M, where tm andr are mass and. eocentclty of the Mibalanced mass; Ms mane of the working clement (this Gependence to true for an operating regime of the vibratory tmachine far into the traneresounnt reine! Tm addtion, point O, also. oarillter slong = circular trajectory. Thi point Is removed from the center of oscillations of the Working element K by a distance = 1/Mb, where I= “Mp2 isthe ‘moment of inertie of the working lement with respect to axis perpendicular to the plane of foscllations; isthe radius of inerun of the working clement The rocking center, located st distance HY from the center of mses of the working slement, oscillates along. rectilinear frajectory in the direction of line KOO, with an amplitude of 4 ‘mr/Mt All the paints af the working clement located on the Ssright Hine pessing through the rocking. center perpendicular if fat 4 {0 line 00,K also perform rectilinear oscillations parellel to Tine O0,k, but with larger amplitudes. The stright line OO, la'the ails of aymmetr of the vibratory field. One of the axes of the eliptical tsjectorios of the “points of the ‘working Slement ying on thie asis of symmetry ia always directed Slong it. The lengths of the corresponding falf-axea are the Same for all these points and are eqial to. A. ‘in practice, vibratory machises with a uniform field of vibratory trajectories lrectiinear, clfcular, and elliptical) of the Working elements are often used How should the unbalenced-mass vibration exciter_be mounted on the working element of the vibratory machine in trder to obtain uniform eacillations long trajectoriee of the same ind? in order to ‘obtain circular uniform trajectories of the working element, the axis of rotation of the mbelanced mass oF the vibration exciter ought to coincide with the center of fmate ofthe working element. Furthermore, the plane of Fotation of the unbslanced mass must coincide with the plane of longitudinal symmetry of the working clement. If excitation {is eeaized by two unbalanced masses synchronously rotating in fone direction, then the axes of their rotation must be located St che same distance from the center of ase of the working Clement (Fig. 4260)we ‘Thoory of Vibratory Technology [nea Be Bae ualiannat B tli ele 7 : ey, Be Figure 426 Schematic For the generation of rectilinear uniform oscillations Urajectores of the working element, vibrators with two lnbalanced masses, whose shafts rotate In opposite directions (Fig. 4260, are used The vibrator must be mounted in auch way that ‘the. resultant of the ‘centifugel forces of the Unbalanced masses passes through the center of mess of the ‘working element of the vibratory machine ‘Avuniform field of liptical trajectories can be created by 3 tworshaft vibrator With kinetic moments of the unbalanced inasses rotating in opposite directions Bring not equal to each Sther (Fig. 4.260. If the exes of rotation of the unbalanced Imasses coincide. then they must slao coincide with the contor of mass of the working element of the vibratory machine. If the exeo of rotation afe different, then the releton 4/4, D7, = mey/myr, must be observed (Fig. 4.26 Vibration Exciters ua 4.326 Energy Parameters of Vibratory Machines “The power which is required to operate the vibratory sischine In the given regime and the power which can be transmitted by 1 vibrator of specific’ type are determined by. &. whol complex of factors: vibrator parameters, machine Cherecterstcs, and the acting loads in the machine. It is not possible to impart additional power to the vibratory machine by simply Increasing motor output. Each vibratory. machine consumes strictly determined power, whose value Is dependent on a whole set of factors. acting In the vibratory ‘machine-ibration exciter-oad system, {Wt us examine the work of one-mass vibratory machine driven by an anbalanced-mass vibration excieor with = moto having. “suiclent’ power reserve, To. eliminate torsional oscillations of the vibretory machine, the axis of rotation of the vibration exciter is located in the center of mats of the fsailation system. The elastic system is designed In such = ‘way that the movement in the direction of one of the extremal {eifneases would not ates the elastic system in the direction (Of the second extremal ifess. In this cae, the oxcillations ff ‘the ‘vibratory mechine In the ‘direction of the extremal Suffnesses of the elastic system will be Independent. For xelusion of torsional oscillations, the the ‘restoring forces of the clastic aystem must pass through the center of mass of the vibratory machine. Let us make use of the computational schematic of the vibratory machine with Inertial vibration exciter of the unbalanced-mass type shown in Fg 48. ‘The power of the vibratory machine drive is easier to determine by considering the equation of rotation of one drive shaft of the vibration excler ‘As noted earlier, due to the fect that the vibration exciter shaft performs oscillatory” motion along with the loratory Imechine. the amplitude of the exciting force and the pressure fon the bearings of the vibration eklter are not equal In Sholitude to the centrifugal force generated by the unbalanced fmaet when it rotates’ around an axle not performing ‘ucilations: The dependences enabling one to. estimate the Character” of ‘change of the value of there” forces during ‘machine operation as function of its parameters, load, and tuning in specific operating regime, have been considered in the previous sections.ee “Theory of Vibratory Technology Let us analyze in more detail one more feature of the formation of the exciting force n'a working vibratory machine. Analysis of the graphs representing the tralectory of motion of the centers of mast of the vibratory machine "and. the Unbalanced mass indicate that the ‘exciting force. does not always pase through the center of mast of the oscillatory The forces of friction and the oscillations of the center of the unbalanced mass also affect the direction of the resultant orca von the bearing wt. These conditions. must. be remembered when designing vibratory machines with Inertial bration exciters effective coefficient of Friction in the bearings of the bration exciter ie p, then the resultant of the forces loading the bearing unit is equal to Fy “at +o? Fy and le directed at angle @ * arctg i to the pressure acting. Gn the bearing unit Fy Here, ¢ is the radias of the friction citcle, p= = D/2) D 1s" the diameter of the rotating race of the vibration exciter Dearing. The frictional moment In the exciter Ie equal t0 Fain) My = om (a? ~ ¥ cone ~ ‘Teking thls into consideration, the equation of motion of the rotating parts of the sibratory machine in unsteady motion ls (Y + mej + omg + mi (cosg ~ zsing) + mi (psing + ross + mer cos'p U8) where Lip) is torque on the shaft of the driving. electric "This equation expresses the dependence between the oscillatory motion of the vibratory machine and. the” time history of rotation of the exciter shaft. The first term in the lefeehand side of the equation is the moment of inerda of all the rotating. parte of the vibration enciter. In atendy-state motion at constant angular velocty of the unbalanced: mses, this moment of inertia is aero. The second term of the ‘equation characterizes the constant component of the moment OF the resistance forces scting in the bearing units of the Mibration excter. The third and fourth terma af the equation tre expressions of the momente of reistance from the periodic ‘Componente. of ineral and. resiatance forces acting ‘on the Fotor and bearing unit of the bration excite Sometimes, these momente are refered to ae wibratory momenta, They Vibration Exciters 2s Include. two components: a moving component which Is proportional to the eccentricity of the unbelanced mass, and a omponent ofthe resistance forces which ix proportional to the "redius ‘of the fiction circle, The fifth. term of the left-hand side of the equation isthe moment from the gravitational force ecting on the unbalanced mass of the bration exciter "The presented equation enables one to determine the moment on. the shaft of the vibration. exclter in the Steady-state. operating regime of the vibratory machine ‘by Substituting into ie the corresponding motion parameters 1p) + at [SESS A tt = getty Aisin) sau « E conut + Uzsingy = aAY cong ltntons(Azsing, 24% cosp,)eoator + 6] Here, Af, Af are dimensionless amplitudes of oscillations of the vibratory imachine slong axes x and 1 # the ratio of the radiue of the friction circle and the radita of the contor of mass (eccentricity) of the unbalanced mass, s = 6/7. "The moment (torque). onthe’ unbelanced-mass shaft represents a complex periodic function ‘containing. components that are proportional co Frequencies 20, 0) 4/2. The frat two terms represent the reactive moment characterizing. clrulation fof energy in. the system. The last. terme are” the act Component of the moment and determine the meen energy ‘xpenditures that are caused by the actions of the resistances Sind friction In the bearings of the vibration exciter the very Tast term is independent of the vibration regime of the ibratory” machine By Integrating the torque on the shaft of the vibration cexciter, we determine the energy expenditure of the vibratory ‘machine per one revolution of the exciter shalt We nmt [AZ singy © AZ sing) © AZ conn, + AZ Cony)xs Theory of Vibratory Technology “The first term in the square brackets characterizes the dimensionless work spent on overcoming. the resistances, nthe vibratory’ machine. Included here are resistances generated by the process load and hysteresis. lonses in the elastic system: ‘Attention should be paid to the universality of the precented txpression for the determination of energy consumption of the Wibratory machine. Te iz valid for any types of process Fesistances and any resistance patterns in the elastic System. Al the possible features of vibratory machine operation are taken into consideration by the components of the oscillation amplitude and by the phase sifte Between the deplecements Of the vibratory machine and the position vector of the Unbalanced mass. By substituting into this expression, parameters characterizing motion of the vibratory mechine under ‘the acton ff viscous resistance forces and after some transformations, Wwe "determine components and total dimensionless. power Consumption on overcoming viscous resistances acting in. the ‘machine yee Be neat ae Tart” Inf at (pg wit" Inf aPeigp wP and the dimensionless componente and total power Consumption om overcoming the resistances to rotation of the ve cereal Re P tee] the working clement is stationary, the dimensionless power expended by the vibration exciter to. overcome the Fesistances in the bearings is equal” to. unity.” Power ‘expenditures during machine operation vary compared with the ldling regime. In order to assess the effect of the operating regime and parameters of the sibratory machine on power expenditures ‘as compared with idling, it" Is convenient. t0 rewrite the Formule as follows Moat oth eg ere eee a Ue op aF | ape GaP Vibration Exciters er 1k is interesting to note that energy expenditures per unit Aisplacement of the vibratory machine under the action of Wseous resistances are proportional only to the coefficient of ‘lecous reeatance and eecllation Frequency no Energy expenditures in the bearing unite are proportio to the radius of the friction circle, total mass of the nbratory machine, eccentricity of the unbalanced mass, and are Gependent ‘on the regime of operation. In the subresonant regime energy expenditures increase, and in the traneresonant regime they decrease ‘When operating in resonance, energy expenditures do not change in relation to the energy expenditures of the stationary bration exciter. The variations of the given anit energy losses due to. oscillations of the vibration exciter shaft are proportional to the ratio of the rotating and total messes of the vibratory machine, inversely proportional to the eccenticty (of the unbalanced mass, and dependent on the tuning of the oratory system ait = wh fant ye oP Np a the resonant regime the additional energy expenditures are qual to zero, in the subresonant regime they tend to approach ero, and Inthe far transresonant regime, particularly under the action of insignificant resistances that are proportional to velocity they tend to approach ‘Analysis of the presented dependences Indicates that the largest" energy expenditures are inthe” resonant and near-resonant regimes of machine operation Moreover, energy Inereae with decreasing damping factor. Energy expenditures in far transresonant regimes drop and vary insignificantly with changing, detuning "factor. lncresting the load. inthe traneresonant regime leads to increaze of the required vibratory inlysit enables one to conclude that the subresonant sand near-resonant regimes of vibrator) machine operation are Unstable, since Increasing the resistances reduces the ‘capabilites of the machine with respact to. power requirements ‘This property of s machine with Inertial drive le particularly tmanifested In the resonant and near-resonant regimes. In the traneresonant. regimes the operation is stable, since when the8 ‘Theory of Vibratory Technology resistances are Increasing more energy is imparted to the Imachine from the motor to overcome them. if, by analogy with the Induction "motor, one analyzes characteristic. ofthe wibratory machine with an inertial drive, then two. modes can bbe identified, namely unstable (region of aubvesonont. and near-resonant regimes) and stable (region traneresonant By analyzing these correlations it cen be seen that in the subresonant regimes, the total energy expenditures increase, ‘nd in the transresonant regime, they decrease. The increase tnd decrease of energy expenditures ate particularly sharp in the nearresonant regimes. Decreasing damping, coefficients results In broedening the range of variation In chersy ‘consumption. Energy expenditures are also significantly affected by the ratio of the rotating and total mass of the vibratory machine. The larger this ratio, the wider the range. in which nergy expenditures in the bearing units vary ‘As already noted above, both active and reactive power act in the vibratory mechine. The ratio of these powers. can be sssessed ty the angle between the displacements and. the ‘exciting force (p ~ "ph. The active work done. by the exciting force "is determine by the expression PA tin Ip = dh therefore, the closer angle (p = 9) gets 10 90°, the higher the ratio of the. active "and. reactive components of enetBy ‘expenditures. The phase’ shift between the exciting Torce and the displacements ix determined by the expression a arcte ere rere By analyzing correlation of the phase shift between the ‘exciting force and the displacement and the detuning factor 2 = {i/p at different damping factors » = n/p, we can see thet the tangle between the exciting. force and the dieplacement in Fesonance is small.” The angle increases. with decreasing Fesistances in the systom and increasing ratio of the rotating nd total mast of the vibratory machine. It is pertinent. to note, however, Uhet in practically realled. machines ies with Sufficient ly Targe resistences and limited values of the) mace fatio, the phase’ shift’ between the exciting. force and Aisplacement doce nat reach 90° Thus, In vibratory machines With inertial drive the reactive power is practically always present. Moreover, in heavily. loaded Imachines it might be very substantial, It must also be noted that energy clreuletion In a real system is always eccompanied by losses. "These formulas are universal and can be used for determination of the fesistance torque on the shaft of the ‘bration. exclter and ‘energy expenditures of the vibratory ‘machine with any types of resistances, When constant resistances, which are velocity independent ct In the vibratory” machine, the consumed power will be determined by expression wa Mh mipe pf 204tpg - ip} = 1 the stiffness of the elastic suspension in the vibratory machine Is the seme in all directions py "Py =P. then the formula for the consumed power becomes Baetaton in ay DoH “The power required to bring the vibratory machine with constant fesistances into oscillatory motion Is determined by the Kinematic end dynamic. parameters of the. system and by ‘ageituses of the reslatances, From the presented expression Ie'le evident that the power which the vibratory machine can Sovelop under the action gf constant resistances will bea {movimam at phase shift 43° between the dlaplacements of the Anbalanced masa and the working element. ‘At. maximim power consumption “components of the amplitude of orcillations of the working element Will be equal ag = 2207 grat "Thus, if constant resistances act in the vibratory machine, yp at the maximum power developed by the vibeation exclver,a0 Theory of Vibratory Technology the oscillation amplitude Is reduced under the influence of the resistances by approximately 30% both ia the subresonaat and transresonant regimes. In the resonant regime, at already mentioned ‘arier, the resistances do. not limit the ciation Amplitude. Only the rate of ‘rise. of oscillation amplitude ‘creases ‘Within some range of loading, the oscilation amplitude creases whon the constant resistances increaie, But inthe same time required power’ is Increasing. Such an operating Fegime. occurs at loads below the crical, Lev until the ‘oscillation amplitude Is reduced by about 30%, With further loading. the reduction of the osailation amplitude. will be secompanied bj a decrease of the power used to overcome the Seting resistances. This operating regime. i unstable and frentually the machine salle despite the fact that the Unbalanced mase continuse to rotate Let ux compare the specific features of the operation of = vibratory” machine under the action of constant and Yelocity-dependent resistances. In both cases the ovcilation Amplitude “decreases with Increasing. resistances.” Under the Action of loads that are velocity-dependent, the consumed power decreases In all the cases with increasing load inthe Subresonant and neaf-resonant regimes, ie these cepimes are Unstable within any losd range, Under the’ acton of constant Fesistances in the region of subcritical loads, all yegimes are lunstable. Operation with veloctj~dependent loads ia. rtable fnly’ at transrosonant regimes with sbove critical constant Toads," all operating. regimes of the vibratory machine are unstable ‘Analysis of operation of the vibratory machine under ‘constant velocity-independent loads, shows practically complete Snalogy with operation of an induction motor. At suberitical Toads" operation taker place, on the stable. branch of the Working characterete, at transcriticsl anda, operation. Is on the unstable branch. By analogy with the induction motor, the ppomer corresponding. to the celtical load ie referred tO. a2 breakdown power However, there are differences in the operation of an Induction motor and the inertial vibrator, since in. the motor {he rotation frequency is changing. and in the vibrator the amplitude is changing. at constant oscillation frequency. In Srdee to. maintain conetant vibrator Frequency” the breakdown power of "the induction motor must exceed the breakdown Power of the vibration excite, Vibration Exciters an ‘The breakdown power of the inertial vibrator in the vibratory machine with feotropic (equal stiffness) elastic” inks | determined from expression Ng 822 hy 1 follows from the presented expression that the rmagritude of the breakdown power is dependent on parameters (of the sforation encter, the ratio of the rotating. and. total, Imasses of the vibratory” machine, the working frequency, and the tuning of the oscllation ‘system. “The breakdown power Increases In the near-resonant regimes and decreases inthe subresonant and transresonant regimes. In the resonant regime the oscillation amplitude and’ the’ breakdown power are Increasing simultaneously (theoretically, infinitely). However. In Practice limited oscillation amplitudes are_cheracterstc for the fesonant regimes. Consequently, the breakdown power is Imited in the reronant regime Since the oscillation amplitude ie determined by the process raqurements ireapective of the operating regime of the vibratory machin. In any operating regime of the vibratory fachine resonant, tubresonant, or tranaresonent ~ it hes 10 be of the some’ value, Accordingly. comparison of the breakdown power In the vibratory machine at various regimes fof its tuning Is convenient to conduct at unitary oscillation ‘amplitude "The unitary breakdown power, Le. the power required to ‘excite “oscillations of the ‘vibratory machine’ with 8 unit ‘amplitude ie determined by the expression d* oe ‘Thus, the unit breakdown power is independent of the operating regime of the vibratory machine and is determined fnly by" the parameters of "the vibration excter andthe operating Frequency of the machine. “The unle breakdown power can also be represented as function of parameters of the bratory machine and tuning In the following form Ltemutvut ng = eetmm “Thoory of Vibratory Technology This expression characterises stability of opertion af the vibratory machine with a specified amplitude in varios ning feximes hat are chracereed by the detuning factor =. The Ureakdown power Ie recommended for ase aa characteristic Of stay of the operating rene ‘By anatyzing ths expression, we can ase hat the stably inargin of brary” machine operation inthe ner-revonant ‘egies is small Thi te capsid. ty the fact that In he nearresonant™fogines the" wovatry machine with ‘en “hbulaned-mass die with small osiaion amplitudes cannot > much work due to Jow value of the kinetic moment of the fnbalanced masses of the vibration excor, Therefore, the Spcration of a nbrtorytmachine with inertial deve and eer tie apstem In the narresonat regimes under contin of ‘arable loa i chracercad by stably Experience with the tae of vibratory machines with ier dives having elas links of fferenstffvess ies thet In Salton "tothe resonant vegies Interrexnantopertig fegimes can also be unstable. for apayal a Inerrevomant Speratng regines of the vibratory machine the expressen for the" breakdown’ power of a ibestary machi with eas Inke army? + nf = 20% semnlog + nf = 20 208 (p- GE Na From this expression, it is evident that at some ratios of the natural frequency of the vibratory machine and angular velocity of the unbalanced mass, the breakdown power can be ‘ual to zero. This happens when the condition py pf a= O'ls setafied. This expression can be rewritten ve (p2 ~ w2) + (of = w= 0, Les the condition Jn. satisfied when’ the Aiferences (3 ~ of) and pf ~ uF) are equal in magnitude but ‘opposite in ign. By turning to. the dependences” presented rie, It Is evident that the oscillation amplitudes Ay and A, Im this case are equal despite the Ineauality py f° py bit paste in sgn “The oscillation amplitudes have different signs inthe Interresonant regime, ‘Moreover, the sbratory machine travels along a clreuar’tarjectory despite” the ifforont principal (extremal) stffnesses. ofthe elastic links. This regime corresponds” to the points of intersection of two lamplitude-frequency characteristics; with one branch of the characteristic belng transresonant and another subresonant ‘Such an opercting regime of the vibratory machine cannot bbe realized In practice, since it has zero breakdown power. The ‘operating regimes of the vibratory machine in the vicinity of thi point can be practically realized, however, they have, Low stability due to. Inadequacy of the power imparted to. the Vibration exclter of the vibratory machine In order to minis Its operation ‘By anelyzing the expressions for the breakdown power, it la noticed that the closer the trajectory of motion of the vibratory machine approaches a cicle, the lower Ie this power. When the vibratory: machine operates, on elongated elliptical trajectories,” breakdown power of the vibration exctter ‘On the whole, the interresonant operating regimes of the vibratory. chine’ are characterized bY lower etait then “Comparing the megsitudes and the eharscter of change of the cocray consumption of wbratery techie with inertial rive under diferent forms of acting resistances, it cam be noted that the character of the load influences not only the nergy consumption, but also. stability of operation of the ibratory machine 433. Translent Regimes of Transresonant Vibratory Machines ‘with Inertial Drives 4331 Methods of Elimination of Resonant Oscillations In ‘Transient Regimes ‘The Inertal vibratory drive ix mainly used in vibratory machines of the transresonant type, Such an operating regime ensures table operation of the hibratory machine under large vareble Toads. However, during starting and acceleration, the vibratory ‘machine crosses the resonant roplon which causes 2 sharp Increase in oscillation amplitude of the working. element Furthermore, coming the resonant regime is sccompatied by sharp increase in energy consumption. In the resonant regime the drive conatice several tee more energy thea in’ the Working transresonent regime “These features of vibratory machines with inertial drive create a number of ‘serous problems Including limitingan ‘Theory of Vibratory Technology amplitudes of the working element and energy consumption uring trenation through the resonant region, 'A rumber of methods For limiting the amplitudes. during transition through the region of resonance ix. known; theee Include methods axsocisted with the introduction ‘of damping loments into the oscillation "stem, methods based on impact Glamping, and on the use of am elastic system with notlinest ‘characteristic; methods that are based on increasing. the. speed ‘of transition through resonance and on use of self-regulating tibestors “The first method is based on the disipation of part of the energy of mechanical oscillations of the working element during resonance transition with the ald of various damping or braking devices connected in parallel to the clastic elements of the ibratory” machine, oF "using the working load. ‘The shortcoming of the method of damping is the reduction of the Coefficient of vibration teolation, since the dynamic, losds are ansmitted to. the supporting structures. via” the el sloments and damping devices simultaneously. Furthermore, in 4 number of cases, the unproductive loses increase not only uring the period of resonance, but also. during. the working ‘Starting the vibratory machine under = large load is found to be effective. In this case, the machine easily reaches the Working regime without notable rise in oscillations and enerey Consumption “during the transition through the resonance fepion. However, implementation of this method ls not always Tetsble in production conditions ‘The use of Impact wbratory dampers bumpers) and nonlinear elestic system in reasonably effective. However, thir Imethod Is. limited manly ‘by the high-frequency operating Feglmes and Is associated with adaitional dynamic loading. of the slemonts of the structure and. with energy” dlesipation ‘Another disadvantage of impact vibratory dampers is. nosy operation Tk ls knowa that the motion amplitude of the oscillatory system during transient regime Ie correlated with the angular Scceleration by-an Inverse Felationship: the lower the angular Scceleation with which the system passes the resonant region, the higher the resonant amplitude. By changing the value of the angular acceleration, it Is possible to effectively Influence the resonant oscillation amplitudes, This iz a basis for the method of elimination of ‘the resonant increase of oscillations ty increasing the speed with which the ayetem passes throuth Vibration Exciers os resonance, However, to realize this method the installed power of the drive. must be Increased with respect to the power Fequired for normal operation in the working regime or elimination of Fesonance oscillations, » method based fon the. use of special vibrators with automatically variable Kinetic moment "is. becoming widespread. These | wibrators Combine the functions of the oscillation source and the device for suppressing the resonant ogcllation amplitudes during the transient regimes of the vibretory machine. “This princple of elimination of resonant oscillations Is based on the fact that during starting, the automatic actuation of the vibrator mechanism taker place following transition of the resonant. region, and disengegement (slancing) during fan-out is effected prior to reaching the resonant region at the Inoment when the Kinetic energy of oscillations of the working Cloment te. minimal, "Thus, forward end. backward transition Ghrough resonance. is effected Ine totally balanced vibrator (the kinetic moment of the unbalanced mass Is equal to 2er0) 4232 Determination of Working Parameters of Mechanlems or Changing the Unbelanced-Moss Kinetic Moment ‘Machanlam with sliding unbalanced mass. Tie design schematle fof an inertil vibration exciter with sliding unbalanced masses 1 shows in Fig. 427. The vibration exclter consists of a drive hat and disc 2 with lm 3 The shaft of the. vibration Shelter is mounted in bearings which are assembled in the Frame of the wbrator. Am unbalanced mass 5 le mounted in fides on the disc and le pressed by spring 6 to the hub by Force Py, In this position of the unbalanced mass the vibration fxciter rotor la “completely balanced, Upon starting of the Slbration excler, the rotor i of the inital tension of the spring, remains balanced for some time without generating fn evciting force, The force of spring pretension holds the Ainbalanced mate at the Internal stop until the angular velocty Of the vibration exclter exceeds the natural frequency of the Vibratory machine oscillatory system. The angular velocity at Vihich the unbalanced tase begins to. move from the Internal {othe external stop is determined by the condition of equality Of the centrifugal force of the unbalanced mass to the springa “Thoory of Vibratory Tachnology 2 Ept where Ap 18 eprng sifnees f i inal spring tension), ty fe the Tass and centric of the center of gray of he Unbslanced martin she ial postion at the lane stop Dering run-out af the. escillatory. system takes place in the reversed orders When the sng the vibraton exter is reduced to the specfied value the Aibalanced mass returned from the outer othe ier stop by the force of spring tension. The vibration encter Te then Balanced and the vibratory syrtom parses the resonant. relon without’ the exciting force’ n” der to obtain” minum Fesonant amplitudes, the angular velaciy ofthe vibration Seite at Which the unbslanced masses must be daengaged Funcout is" determined fromthe relationship oyeon SS where pte the natural feguency of the noraory tacking) “The angular velocty of aengagement. ofthe tnbulanced messes in determined from the contion of quality of the Torees of spring compression and the ccnrfugel forces of the Unbelanced mare on the outer nop Vibration Exciters an Thea Mop = [ee nop * |r, 7 where + Is deplacement of the unbalanced mass from the inner Xo the outer stop, From this expression for dpa ahd Oytop. we determine the relation between, the angular" velocities “BF starting. and stopping the vibration exciter — een ates eens rs omc coe Shean en A a te et 2 Se See oe ert ee Soe ee ofa i am sac a te, ee Se ee ee SS ees an ee ee eee a eis carena ‘Theory of Vibratory Technology sccelaten tothe oir stop when & > enop, the ang ticcyof ie rotor ia it eeerge ter it snela tnteced mats Cana te sable South etre Sten Grogi tos ieee the ont Pra wih icing ‘of the’ ge te a eae ea coerton th ce ret ie pict py tak hg iar mpue oFceute's Setowteey item compra by neler cance of ea omg ote eda rs em acca ana ‘enty of the some af pe of ae eased Sa ie amar bea Mechanlom with plvoted unbalanced masses In order to ‘lucidete in "more" detall_the mechanism of action of th Wibration excter with pivated “unbalanced masses, ne. shal Consider is kinematic ayout (Fig. 4.28), The unbalanced masses I and 2 of the mechanism are ‘mounted on « sleeve which ix eccentric relative to the axis of vibration exciter shaft, and are pressed by spring 9 to stops 4 and 5 of dise 6 with « specified initial adjuateble moment. The ‘Stops of the unbelanced masses are arranged. on the duc. tn such’ a way ‘thatthe mechanism Inthe. state state. In completely balanced relative to the axis of rotation, The principle of “operation “of the mechanism of the vibrator isa follows. Axis 0, of rotation of the unbelanced masses Is ‘offset relative to! axis O of rotation of the mechanism by rThe centers of the unbalanced, messes are at distance from axix 0, When the motor of the vibration fxciter started the unbalanced masa of the mechaniom Is accelerated with some angular acceleration up to the nemiaal angular velocity, The motion of the unbelanced masses It this case takes place in a centrifugal force field with intensity 96! (@ Is the distance from the axis of rotation to the center of ravity of the unbalanced masses; # is angular velocity of the mechanism). “As result ‘of this, the normal Pi". Pond tangential PS, Ps inertisk forces in transfer motion (rotaton scound axis 0) act on the unbalenced masses until the moment they are detached from the stope, By analyzing the forces. acting on the unbalanced masses, 1 ls ‘easy to ote that their rotation doce nat take plece Simultaneously, When the muchanism rotates, counterctockmise, the unbalanced mass) begins to move first, since the normal 22 and tangential PF components of the inertial force In the ‘igure 4.28 Design schematic of « vocation oxciter sith pivoted Spe er ee epee mies See Sea Sa en Se Me Pg aM os dent tat to rotation of the’ unbalanced mast” Here, Aq) and Prim are eo ia ie ee eo a eae eee oe St ee ee heeled hetierepe pepeeeeiinr a ee ea pas coo Sia See eet cnt a erage eyecare lara See soa ee ene280 ‘Theory of Vibratory Technology Forces in the hinge of the unbalanced mass. With further scceleration of the mechanism, the rotation of both unbalanced masses tates place simultaneously until dynamic equilibrium Is stabished ‘Thus, Inthe mechanism under consideration, the lunbalanced masses rotate in turns generating st the start a ‘smooth load on the electric motor, During the run-out process, the angular velocity of the unbalanced. masses decreases and at a value somewhat fxeeeding. the frequency of the naturel oscillations ofthe vibratory’ machine. the spring moment overcomes. the moment (of the inertia forces which decreases sharply ae the rotational Speed of the vibration exciter shaft drope and the unbalenced Masses. return to their initial position, "Rotation af the unbalanced masses during run-out is effected in a reversed ‘order to starting, since the direction of the angular {ceeleration in this care changes to the opposite side, Further Fun-out of the vibrator and Its transition, through. resonance fakes place with’ a belanced unbalanced-mass, mechaniam (he Kinetic moment of the unbalanced masses equal to sera. "To regulate the vibration amplitude, the verstion exciter must have aa adjustment of the value of the exciting force at Constant speed of rotation. The value of the excling force Is Sependent on the eccentricity of the mechanism with all other parameters remaining the same. By changing. the ecceatrii, fone cam smoothly adst vhe value of the exciting force end Correspondingly, the osilation amplitude of the vibratory “The adjustable unbelanced~mass mechanism has an eccentric assembly. on which the unbalanced mast is mounted, Im the form of two eccentric sleeves, one. placed inside. the ‘ther and linked together by threaded joint The rotation of the sleeves relative to each other smoothly changes the Value OF the eccentricity of the mechanism “The value of the total eccentricity ¢ of the mechanism depends on eccentricities of the sleeves my 1 and. Is ‘determined by Formila fr he retin co oh where gis the angle of displacement of the sleeves relative to ‘ach othe ‘The design schematic of the automatic rotation of the unbalanced masses Ie given in Fig, 428, Coordinate frame 3, Vibration Exciers aa in coincides with the axis of rotation O of the ahaft of the sbration excter “The. mechasisme are characterized by the following. parameters the unbalanced mass m the eccentricty of the mechanism (the distance from the ais. of rotation of the Imechanism to the axiv of rotation of the unbalanced mass) 7 the sistance from the rocking axis of the center of mass of he unbalanced mass the mass of the eccentric sleeve my (che ‘ase of the eccentric rocking. sleeve of the unbalanced Imassor Ie concentrated st point O, at distance from the as fof rotation of the mechenism):'the locaton angle of the Unbalanced masses corresponding t0 the total balance of the ‘mechanism 2 diameter of the eccentric sleeve d “The location angle of the unbalanced masses corresponding to total balance of the mechanism Is determined fromthe Condition of static equilibrium of the static mass moments ‘lative to the aula of rotation of the deve shaft 0. ov meme (8) For the design of 2 vibration exciter with rotating unbalanced inasses, one must Know the dependence between the static moment of the. mechanlam and the angles of fotetion of the unbalanced masses 4, end ayy which can onerlly be different. The resultant static moment of the frechanism it. determined as the geometrical sum of the Projections of the kinetic momenta, of each mass on the ‘Coordinate ais. When the angles of rotation of the unbalanced tmasser are equal a; * "a the resultant moment of the mechanism is determined from expression Mec * (i + 2mie ~ 2ml cos (2+ a) ‘The exciting forces of the vibration exciter are proportional ta the Kinetic moment of the mechanism and 0 the square of the angular rotational velocity; therefore, the esultant exciting force developed by the vibration excter ix qual to Po ot [rlm, + 2m) ~ tnt con to +l]se ‘Thoory of Vibratory Technology ‘The moment of Inertia of the unbalanced-mass mechanism relative to the atie of rotation O is made up from the moment of Inerta of the eccentric sleeve relative to axis 0, the ‘moment of inertia of the unbalanced mast. Jy relative to its Cit. and depends on the Kinetic moment of the mechanism. ‘The moment of inert of the uabelanced-mass,mechenlem of the vibration exciter is equal to Ing =m (et B) 6 24, + 2m [18 62 a0 con (0 + a) Dynamic analysis of the oscillation system, which te excited by an inertiel vibration exciter with rotating unbalanced masses, canbe conducted without” sigrificane. errors by Feplacing the unbelanced-mass” mechanism of the vibration ‘xciter by an equivalent one-mass mechanism (Fig. 423) ‘As a criterion of “equivalency of the mechanism, the of their Kinctic moments Is adopted. Let ue introduce the following, notations "for parameters of equivalent mechanism an? is equivalent mash, mr =m © 2m o" cecentricty, 2m = sgt cos to + (in pretension of the equivalent. spring 1s spring stiffness coettcient Belo [ace ae er eer] The correlation of the eccentricity of the equivalent mechanism with the parameters of the lnvestigeted. machanlem And angles of rotation of the unbalanced masses Is determined from the condition of equality of the Kinetic moments of both Vibration Exciters 383 gure 429 Mathemetical model of © vibration exciter with ‘The value of the pretension 5% of the stiffness coefficient Kip. ix determined from the condition of ‘equality of the potestial energies of the analyzed and ‘equivalent mechanisms From the expressions for the spring pretention and ‘equivalent spring stiffness, it follows that at an initial angle ‘Of twist of the spring € equal to sero, the spring. pretension ‘Of the equivalent mechaniam Ie also equal to toro. The spring characteristic Is. tlnce Ite stiffness coefficient te Sependent on deformation 5°. In. the motion "process of the oscillation system, the unbalanced masses of the vibration exciter mechanism sre subjected to the action of an Inertial force field, us » result of motion of the mechanism together with the working element ‘of the vibratory system, and of centnfugel force eld [generated upon rotation of the mechanlams. The acceleration ‘Of the inertial field force are stall ‘compared with the ‘centrifugal accelerations acting on the unbalanced masses of the vibration ‘enciter, This condition enables one to ignore, the fffect of the Inertial forces when considering the system tibration exciter motor “The motion ‘of the system: drive-ibration exciter in the steady-state regime Is described by the system of differential equationsa4 Theory of Vibratory Technology aintora Bat He oteoator ad A2B fovajsa) «0 or a (rasta =O May F ctaintcray Bat ttl ateoatora) A (yoa,eay) a Celia where Mis the dissipative resistance torque of the vibration Analysis of the first two equations of the system reveals that the angles of rotation of the unbalanced masses Inthe steady-state regime are equal, Le, 2, = ay Zero difference of the moments in the third equation is a witness to. the fact that the disipative resistence torque ix alwaye balanced by the orque developed by the motor Since the angies of rotation of the unbalanced masses In the steady-state regime of motion are equal, the dependence of the angles of rotation of the unbelanced masses on the angular velocity and on parameters of the vibration exciter mechanism an be determined from the fret equation of the system (sing + BE cosctcosa cosa £4 sina a int eta ir = eo = This transcendental equation can be analyzed by traphical_method after ie ie reduced. to 8 more. convenient Format (Rg. 4.30) comps ego wire 2, 2Kpee mt Ry oe ie yeas ype Migr rat ine rt ma ¥ te the angle of shift of the cosinusold with respect to the The left-hand side of the equation represente « cosinusoid, and the right-hand aide le an equation of a straight line offset to the coordinate avi, Vibration Exciters 85, erage awe Figure 420. Graphical datermination of usbalanced-mase ‘The real root of the equation Is glven by the abscisss of the polnt of intersection of the cotinusokd and the straight Uline. Since’ cosficiest cis the tangent of the angle of Inclination of the straight line of the abacasa, we can write 24 mttat It Follows that angle p of the shaft rotation is ly proportional to the square of angular velocity. For different angular velocities of rotation of the mechanism, the langle of Inclination of the straight lines changes, but all the lines intersect at the pole (point Hof the graph. Let us denote the ordinate of the pole by »*, and along the abscissa by vt Absctse g* is determined by the simultaneous solution fof two straight line equations corresponding to two arbitrarily Selected angular velocities wy and oy Ack Where ey eye Fy ate coefficients for a and oy the ordinate of the pole for a specific umbalanced-mass mechanism ls a constant which depends only on the mechanism perameters and on the Init angle of twist of the spring When the angle of twist is zero, the abscissa 9° Is equal to the shift angle of the cosiauseid26 Theory of Vibratory Technology If a= 2/2, a counterweight is needed for the initial balance of the unbalanced-mass mechanism, The ordinate of the pole H and angle p of inclination of the straight Tine to the ‘abscissa remain unchanged. ‘The value of the angle. of rotation of the unbalanced mess in this case, ix determined GS the difference between angles g'and v (eee Fig. £20), ‘The angular velocity of the beginning of rotation of the unbalanced mass” during stering Iz determined from the Condition of dynamic equilibrium of the forces acting. om the Unbalanced mess relative to their axis of ‘rotation. When the mechanism in rotated ‘counterclockwiee the fir unbalanced smass separates from the stop fist. The active forces acting on the unbalanced mass include the moment of the inertial Torces ‘The rotation of the unbalanced masses iz hindered bythe ‘moment of the fictional forces ih the attachment hinge of the linbalanced masses and by the moment of the pretwisted From the equation of the boundary equlltrlam of the forces scting on the unbalanced mam one can determine the value of the angular velocity corresponding to the beginning of Fotation of the unbelanced messes during starting, The angular Velocity of the beginning of mutual rotation of the unbalanced masses during starting. depends both on the parameters of the ‘mechaniam snd on the angular acceleration, of the vibration fxciter. The higher the acceleration of starting, the lower the Sngular velocity at which transition of the unbalanced masses from the balanced position to the working position takes place However, the effect of the staring ecceleration on the ‘value of the angular velocity corresponding to the rotation of the “inbalanced masses Is not significant “Taking. Into account thet the vibration exciter with rotating unbalanced masses does not require use of & drive ‘motor with high starting moment, the starting. period can be Passed "with small acceleration. In this case, the angular cceleration of the drive shaft can be dlregarded ‘The formula For the determination of the angular velocity ‘of the beginning of mutual rotation of the unbelanced masses uring starting period is wml reosaneh nar ang] aare” 1 ple taino-E ad t= r* cose) ] ‘Thus, without introducing substantial simplifications, it fan be-aacertained that the angular velocity at the start of Vibration Excters sw transition of the unbalanced mass from the iling position to the working position depends only on the parameters of the ‘mechanism and on the initial angle of twist of the spring. "The angular velocity corresponding to the beginning. of| mutual rotation of the unbalanced masses. during stopping process is determined From the equation of dysamic equilibrium SF the unbalanced mass and has the Form __ [Ripiorta (Pestana) 4 par atonal ee Fisiniora) Lad [1 -F*costoea J} “This expression indicates that the angular velocity depends ‘on both the parsmeters of the mechanism and on the angle = SF rotation of the unbalanced masses during starting of the "By subetituting a = 0, we determine the a fap at which the linbalanced’ mase of the. mecha vibration exciter I totally Balanced (etched of __ xy OO mL etsing + yd t= reos0) “The difference in the expressions for the angular velocity corresponding. to. the balancing of the unbelanced-m ‘mechanism diring stopping end for the angular velocky etermining the beginning. of rotation of the unbalanced mass ‘during starting is inthe. sign st the second term In the ‘denominator. The minus sign is replaced by plus. This means that for the same angle of twist of the spring 9, the value of he angular velocity corresponding to total balencing” of the Inechanismn during stopping t= lower than the angular velocity Of the beginning” of mutual rotation of the uabslanced. mass Guring starting. ‘Therefore, detuning of the machine from resonance, should be carried out for the stopping. regime. It ‘Aitomatcally provides detuning from the starting resonance 4293 Steady-State and Transient Operating Regimes of « ‘Vibratory Machine with Rotating Unbalanced Menees Investigations of regime parameters of the vibratory machine thd. the “control mechanism for the kinetic” moment ofa8 Theory of Vibratory Technology the unbalanced masses conducted at angular velocities of the rive shaft ranging from © to 2000 rpm and angles of twist of the unbslenced~mass mechanism equal to. 60, 100,140. and 200° led to the following conclusions ‘The angular velocky corresponding to total balance of the lunbolanced-mass mechanisin daring run-out le somewhst lower than the angular velocity at which separation of the unbalanced Imasses from the stops "takes place” during starting Accordingly, tuning of the unbalancedmass techanis shou be ‘conducted with respect’ tothe run-out regime, then euaning from the starting resonance Te achieved eutemetially From amplitude-frequeney charscevistics of the ibrator) machine it follows that with Increasing initial moment of. the Spring twist resonance, oscillation amplitudes decrease sharply ‘his is explained by the fact that at angles of spring Uist cesceeding 140", engaging of the mechanisms In the acceleration process takes place at velocites shove the. resonant sped ‘Therefore, the vibration excieer passes the resonant frequency while Balanced nd without exciting the oscillation system, Ia the deep transresonant regime (dstuning. factor, ¢ 23) the ‘oscillation amplitude remains practically unchanged and hes the same value as that of the vibratory machine without control ‘mechanism of the kinetic moment of the unbalanced masses, Upon’ “transition through resonance In conventional vibratory machines the moment of resistance. to oscllations Increases: therefore, for the Implementation of such vibratory machines 4 substantial power reserve of the electric motor it needed, During the starting process” of the vibratory machine ith a vibration excter equipped with an adjustable unbalanced mass. the consumed power”) the "electric. motor upon transition through resonance However. with Increased Initial moment of spring. twist, the Deak power surge decreases, and’ "under the Initial spring ‘moment corresponding to twisting angle of 200° It ls absent (together. In this case transition. of the, vib through resonance. takes place In the Uneveited. sate. and Without eddtional power consumption. Thus, the use Of vibration exciter with rotating unbalanced masses not only eliminates rsoneat oscillations in. translent regimes, but also reduces the starting power of the. delving slectric' motor. This allows selection of the electric motor of the drive not with reepect <0 the starting characeritie, But With respect to the required power in the stationary operating regime Vibration Exciters eure 421 Oncitlograms of sranatent regimes of & vibratory Iechine axcted by. Inertial vibrator, wich rotating unbalanced Experimental study translont (starting. and run-out) ond steady-state regimes was performed 9 determine characteratc Properties of the regimes of the vibratory machine driven by 2 ‘bration exclter with rotating unbalanced masses Figure ¢.3la thows an oscillogram of displacement of the working slement. ips. real machine. At an inital angle of pring wt of 20°, a maximum oscillation swing of Hl mm 1S Sbtained” With Increasing angle of spring twist, the oscillation Swing at the resonant frequency decreases and at angles of ‘nist exceeding 120", Ht remaine 3 mm “Thus, the proper tuning of the unbelanced masses of the ‘mechanisms provider an approximately four Umes decrease of the resonant oscillation amplitudes upon starting of the ‘The oscilograms of run-out are Resonance at run-out, ax expected, ls more pronounced than at ‘Rarting. At an angle of spring twist equal to 20°, the Swi ‘of resonant oscillations amounts to 15 mm a8 opposed to tl mmm ae starting the oscillation system. As the inital moment ‘of spring twist Is Increased, the “amplitude of resonant ‘tcilations decreases and the oscillation swing assumes the sented In Fig. 4b0 “Theory of Vibratory Technology ‘minimum value of 3 mm only at angles of twist that are equ to or exceeding 160". Thue, the amplitude of resonant Osailations of the vibratory machine during run-out. decrenses Sharply (by five times) and becomes equal to the. starting “Analysis of oscillograms during starting end run-out Indicates that ‘detining Irom resonance during. run-out takes place at larger intl angles of spring twist, as was {stablished theoretically earlier Im order to explain. the causes of this phenomenon, ‘additional dynamic. experiments of run-out of ‘a ibratory Machine were carried out Studied were time histories of the Singles of rotation ef both unbalanced masses of the Imechanism, effect of the inital moment of spring twist on the ue of the resonant oscillation amplitude, and also. angular velocities of “the beginning and end of motion of the Unbalanced masses Into the Intl balanced position. Values of the angles of rotation of the unbalanced mas following run-out, starting, end daring, the steady-state regime were computed. Angular velocities of vibrator” rotation Corresponding to the beginning and end of motion of the linbalanced masses in the inital position were also determined by computational means. “Analysis of the owcllograms Indicates that with Increasing Initial moment of spring tension, the motion of the unbalanced Imasses occurs with some time delay which is greater, the more Substantial “the angle of spring twist. Furthermore, the Character of motion of the unbalanced masies also. changes. At Initial angles of spring twist’ equal to. 60, 100, end 140°, uniform, constant acceleration, and constant-deceleration motions in the relative displacement of che unbalanced maasee svore observed. However, at angles of twist of 200 and” 240", the motion of the wnbslanced. masses becomes strictly constant-acceleration motion, Furthermose, with increa fsogles of spring twist, the angular rotational acceleration of ‘the unbalanced masses is increasing Because of significant angular accelerations of the Lnbalanced masses, the mechanism should heve special devices fo cushion impacts when the unbelanced masses return t0 the Initial balanced postion Tt also follows trom the oscllograms that changing. the Initial angular rpring. twat. effectively” decreases resonant scilation amplitudes” of the vibratory machine at run-out. ‘Thus, at an titial angle of twiot equal to 60% the swing of Vibration Exciere oa the resonant oscillations amounts to 10 mm, and at an angle fof twist of 200°, the swing ts just 2S mm, Thus, the resonant ‘sallation amplitude is reduced by a factor of four. Tt must be noted that at all tunings of the wnbalanced-mass. mechanisms, the working oscillation amplitude stays practically unchanged. ‘Starting ragine war etudied with the purpose of eveluating the character of motion of the unbalanced masses, determining thir angles of rotation, angular velocities corresponding, to the beginning of “take-off” of the unbalanced masses, and. also determining the angular sccsleration of the wbrator shaft "The experimental resuleg Indcate that already at an alti angle of spring twist of 100°, the vibratory machine passes the esonant region with balanced unbslanced-mase mechani. In this case, the swing of the resonant osclallatlons does not fxceed 2 mm, Motion of the left unbalanced mass occurs in the rao region at a rotational speed of the mechanism of 910 rpm. end the, ght unbalanced mace ata speed. of "1200" rpm Consequently, the travel of the wnbslanced masses tothe working postion ducing staring is staggered, thus generating, © Zmooth load on the motor. The angles of rotation of both Unbalanced masses in the steady-state reglme In this ease are qual to 30% Im order to Hdentify the effect of the oscillatory system of the sibratory machine’ on the. parameters of the vibration frciter, ies the establishment of feedback parameters, ‘ditional experimonts were conducted, In the frst serles of fests an. additonal viscous resistance to. the ‘motion was Introduced by means of hydraulic dampers inserted between the ‘working mass and the frame of the vibratory machine parallel To'the elastic connections, ‘The damping factor of the system Stmounted in thir case to 12 Wace. In the second series of ‘Kperiments, stiffoeases of the elastic links were changed with fo damping Inthe system, "The stffoess ‘coefficient of the elastic links of the oscillation system war equal to 7100 kg/m, which provided eoonance. at a frequency of 372 V/min. In both cases, the Sngles of rotation of the unbalanced masses were measured a function of the speed of rotation of the vibration ‘excter Shaft, ae wells angular velocities “at which the. relative {motion ‘commences of the unbalanced masses during starting Gnd total balence is achieved of the mechanlam at run-out of ‘the oscillation system. Results of the experiments enabled onewwe Theory of Vibratory Technology to establish that the introduction of resistances into. the system, and also changing the siffaess of the elastic links do fot noticeably affect the angular displacement. of the Unbalanced masses at the same rotational speeds of the Mlbration excite “The above stated provides the basis to conclude that the angles of rotation of the unbalanced masses are Functions only ‘of the rotational speed of the vibration exciter shaft and. the Angular velocities corrsponding to switching the mechanism on uring starting and to. complete balance at run-out” are ‘dependent on the parameters of the unbalanced masses of the mechanisms and the inital moment of spring twist. Thus, both ‘with introduction of resitences into the system and with the change of its natural oscillation frequency, the vibration exciter with rotating ‘unbalanced masses ‘ensures the elimination of Fesonaat oscillations. Experience shows that the system Provides rellabe suppression of the resenant ‘oscillations. for Various operating conditions of the vibratory machine $24 Osallation System with Becestrlc Vibrator 43441 Eccentric Vibrator with Blastle Connecting Rod There ere a number of vibratory machines in which the ivection of the driving force does at coinede with one of the Aiections of the principal stfToees.axer of “the oscillation tystem. Such machines Include, for” example, vibratory Conveyors with longitudinal excitation, and vibratory plants for the compaction of core sands In which the driving force acts slong the axle of the working element and the elastic rubber ments are placed at an angle to the load-carrying. element ‘The clastic supports are made as paired rubber rectangular paralelopipeds ‘between which the ‘bracket of the working flement is mounted “The design layout of the vibratory machine with longitudinal excitation includes an cecillating mass m mounted fon the frame with the ald of ‘an elastic system working. in ‘shear along axis (stffaess in shear ky, concent of viscous feslatances cy) and in compression log axis? stffness in Compression ‘ky. coef lieient of wecous resistances cy). The hustle system’ creates «restoring force, and. the “Samper Imodels the hysteretic Tosses which are assuimed proportional £0 the rate of strain. Drive te realized by an cosentnc. vibrator Vibration Eaciters ow having an elastic connecting rod that is characterized by sffncas ky end by the cocfficent of viscous resistances (ig. 4.3 ‘The stiffness of the elastic elements along ais X te 3 ‘minimum (stiffness in shea), and aloug avis Y Ie maximum (Gtitfnese in compression), Taking. into account the” verieble force Tleld generated by the rubber elements, the later cam be refered to a0 anisotropic elastic links. The force generated 8) the drive when the oscilator is stationary unexclted) Fy) described by expression Fill) = bag * de 0) where 4 is daplacement of the point of the connecting rod of the eccentric mechanism, which Ie joined with the conveyor by sgt rein wt an Under the action of excitation FO, mass m Is browght Into oncillatory motion described by coordinates % and y st us resolve the driving force ft) into. componente tong axes X and Y a. (as [Fa ()=(laa bestia as Upon excitation of the onion spate, the devin closes slog a, Xie deformed bythe amount cot io. tnd slong exe) bythe amount tay an : ‘The components of the driving force that act from the side Of the "dre om the onlatry system In opretion are Saul to (Fae) = se besteasfy— here aan Ve (hss exssinB— bey —eah (a3) “The differetal equations of motion of the vibratory system have the form [net eb e ba b he J rtusinet + can easet) conf 40 [nd (eet eR + He (igsina meant sings aan